HP 3577A Operator`s Manual

HP 3577A Network Analyzer and

HP

35677 AlE

S-Parameter Test Set

,

Operating

Manual

Operating Manual

Network Analyzer

HP 3577A

And


HP 35677 A/8

�3

HEWLETT

PACKARD

HP Part Number:

035n-9OOO3

Microfiche Part Number : 035n-90203

Printed in U.S.A.

Print Date: May 1994

«:lHewlett-Packard

Company, 1983, 1990, 1994. All

rights reserved.

8600

S op

e

r

Hill R o

a d, Everett,

Washington 98205-U98

Notice

Hewlett-Packard makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose.

Warning

To prevent potential fire or shock hazard, do not expose equipment to rain or moisture.

F/i'iW HEWLETT

11:1:..11

PACKARD

SAFETY SUMMARY

The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation, service, and repair of this instrument. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design, manufacture, and intended use of the instrument. Hewlett-Packard Company assumes no liability for the customer's failure to comply with these requirements. This is a Safety Class 1 instrument.

GROUND THE INSTRUMENT

To minimize shock hazard, the instrument chassis and cabinet must be connected to an electrical ground. The instrument is equipped with a three-conductor ac power cable. The power cable must either be plugged into an approved three-contact electrical outlet or used with a three-contact to two-contact adapter with the grounding wire (green) firmly connected to an electrical ground (safety ground) at the power outlet. The power jack and mating plug of the power cable meet International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) safety standards.

DO NOT OPERATE IN AN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE

Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable gases or fumes. Operation of any electrical instrument in such an environment constitutes a definite safety hazard.

KEEP AWAY FROM LIVE CIRCUITS

Operating personnel must not remove instrument covers. Component replacement and internal adjustments must be made by qualified maintenance personnel. Do not replace components with power cable connected. Under certain conditions, dangerous voltages may exist even with the power cable removed. To avoid injuries, always disconnect power and discharge circuits before touching them.

DO NOT SERVICE OR ADJUST ALONE

Do not attempt internal service or adjustment unless another person, capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation, is present.

DO NOT SUBSTITUTE PARTS OR MODIFY INSTRUMENT

Because of the danger of introdUCing additional hazards, do not install substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification to the instrument. Return the instrument to a

Hewrett-Packard Sales and Service Office for service and repair to ensure the safety features are maintained.

DANGEROUS PROCEDURE WARNINGS

Warnings, such as the example below, precede potentially dangerous procedures throughout this manual. Instructions contained in the warnings must be followed.

Warning

G

Dangerous voltages, capable of causing death, are present in this instrument. Use extreme caution when handling, testing, and adjusting.

��

HEWLETT

.:�

PACKARD

SAFETY SYMBOLS

General Definitions of Safety Symbols Used On Equipment or In Manuals.

rfr

OR

-

...

-

.J.

Instruction manual symbol: the product will be marked with this symbol when it is necessary for the user to refer to the instruction manual in order to protect against damage to the instrument.

Indicates dangerous voltage (terminals fed from the interior by voltage exceeding

1000

volts must be so marked.)

Protective conductor terminal. For protection against electrical shock

if]

case of a fault. Used with field wiring terminals to indicate the terminal which must be connected to ground before operating equipment.

Low-noise or noiseless, clean ground (earth) terminal. Used for a signal common, as well as providing protection against electrical shock in case of a fault. A terminal marked with this symbol must be connected to ground in the manner described in the installation

(operating) manual, and before operating the equipment.

Frame or chassis terminal. A connection to the frame (chassiS) of the equipment which normally includes all exposed metal structures.

Alternating current (power line.)

Direct current (power line.)

Alternating or direct current (power line.)

Warning o

Caution

The WARNING sign denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure, practice, condition or the like, which if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in injury or death to personnel.

The CAUTION sign denotes a hazard. It calls attention to an operating procedure, practice, condition or the like, which, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in damage to or'destructlon of part or all of the product.

Note

The NOTE sign denotes important Information. It cails attention to procedure, practice, condition or the like, which is essential to highlight.

rz:.

HEWLETT

PACKARD

CERTIFICATION

Hewlett-Packard Company certifies that this product met its published specifications at the time of shipment from the factory. Hewlett-Packard further certifies that its calibration measurements are traceable to the United States National Bureau of Standards, to the extent allowed by the

Bureau's calibration faCility, and the calibration facilities of other International Standards

Organization Members.

WARRANTY

This Hewlett-Packard product is warranted against defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from date of shipment. During the warranty period, Hewlett-Packard

Company Will, at its option, either repair or replace products which prove to be defective.

For warranty service or repair, this product must be returned to a service facility designated by

HP. Buyer shall prepay shipping charges to -hp- and -hp- shall pay shipping charges to return the product to Buyer. However, Buyer shall pay all shipping charges, duties, and taxes for products returned to -hp- from another country.

HP software and firmware products which are deSignated by HP for use with a hardware product, when properly installed on the hardware product, are warranted not to fail to execute their programing instructions due to defects in materials and workmanship. If HP receives notice of such defects during their warranty period, HP shall repair or replace software media and firmware which do not execute their programming instructions due to such defects. HP does not warrant that the operation of the software, firmware or hardware shall be uninterrupted or error free.

UMITATION OF WARRANTY

The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate maintenance by Buyer, Buyer-supplied software or interfacing, unauthorized modification or misuse, operation outside of the environmental specifications for the product, or improper site preparation or maintenance.

NO OTHER WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. HEWLETT-PACKARD SPECIFICALLY

DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILlTY AND FITNESS FOR

PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES

THE REMEDIES PROVIDED HEREIN ARE BUYER'S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES.

HEWLETT-PACKARD SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL,

INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT, TORT,

OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY.

ASSISTANCE

Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance agreements are available for

Hewlett-Packard products.

For any assistance, contact your nearest Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office. Addresses are provided at the back of this manual.

Table of Contents

Introduction of the HP 3577 A Network AnalYD'r and the S· Parameter Test Set

Front Panel Overview . . . . . . . ... . .. . .. . . . . . . 1·2

Rear Panel Overview .

. .

How To Use This Manual

Instrument Description

. .

.

.

.

.

• .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

• .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

1-4

1 -5

.. 1-6

Initial Inspection ..

.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Chapter I:

Ge!tlng Started

Introduction . . . . . .

Instrument Turn On

... . ... . .. .. 1-1

... . ...... 1·2

"Hardkeys"

Definitions

&

"Softkeys" ....

.

&

Operat

.

.

.

.

ing

Hints .....

.

In Case of Trouble ..

. . . . . . • • .

. . . . . . . . . .. 1-4

. . . . . . . . . .. 1-4

... . . . . ....... . ... . ....... . .. . . . . 1-6

Confidence Test

. . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . .

. .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • .

. . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Chapter 2:

Making Measurements

Tuned Stub Notch Filter

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

• .

.

.

.

.

.

.

• .

.

.

.

.

.

• .

.

.

.

.

.

.

• .

.

.

.

2-3

Measurement Set Up . . . . . . .

M aking

Measurements

Store Trace Data ..

· • .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

• .

.

.

2-5

... . . 2-9

.

.

.

.

.

2-14

Save InstrumentBtate .

Bandpass Filter .....

Measurement Set Up . . . . .

Bandwidth Measurements ..

Passband Ripple ......

.

· .

· .

.

.

.

.

• .

.

.

. .... . .. . . . . . 2-16

. .. . ... . . .. . . ..... 2-17

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

• • .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

2-19

2-25

Passband Insertion Phase

Group Delay .

.

.

.

. .

.

. .

. . .

.

.

.

.

.

Amplifier ...................

.

Gain Compression .............

.

.

.

.

.

.

• • .

.

· .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

. .

.

.

.

.

. .

.

.

.

. 2-30

.

• .

.

.

• .

· .

· .

.

.

.

.

.

.

•

.

2-33

2-35

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

2-37

.

.

.

.

.

2-37

.

.

.

.

.

2·42

Low Pass FIlter ......

. .

.

.

. .

· .

Measurement Set-up

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

• .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • .

.

. .

.

.

• .

.

.

.

2-44

Insertion Loss . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 2-46

Insertion Phase

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

2

-4

7

Passband Ripple

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . 2-48

Stopband Rejection

Measurement Setup . . . . .

.

. . . .. . . , . . . . . . , , . . . 2-50

Amplifier S-Parameters . . , . . . . . . " , . . . . . . . " ,. . . , . . . . . . "

. . . . . . . . . 2-52

. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53

S21' Forward

Gain and Phase

S12 Reverse Loss . . . . . . . . .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

. . . . . 2·56

. .. . . 2-58

Sl1' Input Return Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

. . . . . , . . .. . . . 2-61

S22' Output Reflection Coefficient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . ,. . . .. . 2-64

Complex Output Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66

Chapter 3:

Remote Operatioo

Tbe Hewlett-Packard Interface Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . 3-1

What is the HP-m? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , , . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . 3-1

How does the HP-m Operate? . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . " . . .. . , . .. . . . . , . . .. . . . . . 3-1

HP-m Specification S umm ary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . 3-2

Bus Structure

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

• .

.

.

.

.

3-3

Management (CONTROL) Lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Tbe and the HP-m

. .. . . . ... . . .. . . . ..... . . .. ... . . . . . . . . ....... . ... 3-4

HP-IB Capability

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

• .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

3-4

Data Format Vs Transfer Rate

.

.

, .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

• .

.

.

.

3-5

Direct Plotting

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.

.

, , . . . . . . . . . . . • .

. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

HP-m Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

HP -m Diagnostic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

The's HP-IB Address .

.

.

.

T aIk!listeo Addresses

. . . . . .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

. .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 3-8

. . . . . . . . . _

. . . . . . . . . 3-8

Viewing the's HP-m Address

. . . . . . . . • .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Setting the HP 3577A 's HP-m Address

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

_ .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

_ .

.

.

.

. 3-9

Bus Messages

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

_ .

. . . . 3-11

Bus Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Device Dependent Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Display Format

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

. .. , . . . 3-23

Instrument State . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HP-m Only Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .

.

.

.

.

.

. . . . . .

.

.

.

.

.

.

_ .

.

.

. . . . . . . 3-27

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

3-28

. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. 3-30

Instrument Preset (default) Parameter Values . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59

Tbe Status Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,. . . . . . . 3-62

Status Byte Bit Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62

"How To Go Fast" Example Programs

.

.

.

• .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

3-64

" :

Cha p ter 4: Reference

Amplitude . . .

.

. .

• .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

• .

.

.

.

4-1

Attenuation . .

.

Average

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

• • .

.

.

.

.

Continuous Entry

· •

· .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4-4

.

4-6

. . . 4-8

Data Entry

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

• .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

Data Register . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

Define Math

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • . . . . . . . . . · .

.

.

. .

.

.

. . .

.

.

.

. . .

.

.

.

.

. . . . • .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

. . . . . 4-9

.

.

.

. . . 4-11

.

.

4-U

Display Format . . . . . . . . .. . . ...... . ... .. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

Display Function

.

.

• .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

• .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

Entry Block

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

• .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4-20

External Reference

.

.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . • .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

Graticule . . . . .

. · .

.

.

.

.

4-25

Hardkey . . . . . .

.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

Input . . . . . . . .

Instrument Preset

.

· .

.

.

· .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4-27

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4-30

Instrument State .

. .

Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . 4-32

. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . 4-33

Length

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

• .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

. . . 4-34

Local . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35

Marker

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • • . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . • .

.

.

.

• .

.

.

.

.

.

.

• .

.

.

.

.

4-36

Marker

�

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

. . . 4-39

Measurement Calibration

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

• .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

• .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4-44

Menu . . . . . .. .

. . . . . . . . . . . . • .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50

Message Block

Output . .

Overload . . . . . .

.

. . . . 4-52

· .

.

4-53

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54

Plot . . . . . . . . .

.

Recall Instrument State

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55

.

• .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4-59

Receiver ......... . .... . . . . .... . . ... . . . .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60

Resolution Bandwidth

.

.

.

• .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

• .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

. . . 4-61

S-Parameter Test Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63

Save Instrument State

· .

.

4-65

Scale . . . . . .

.

Screen

· .

· .

.

•

4-66

4-69

Softkey

· .

.

4-70

Source

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4-71

Special

Functions

Store Data .

Sweep Mode

Sweep Time

Sweep Type

Trace

1

Trace 2 . . .

Trigger Mode

TriggerlReset ......

.

Ch apter 5: General Inrormation

Introduction . . . . .

Initial Inspection

Power Requirements ......

.

Power Cable And Grounding Requirements

Operating Environment

Accessories Available

Accessories SuppJied

Options ......

.

Installation .

.

.

.

.

.

IB Connections .

Storage and Sbipment

Source Characteristics "

Frequency Characteristics

Output Characteristics .

Sweep Characteristics

Receiver Characteristics

Input Characteristics

..

.

Magnitude

Characteristics .

Phase Cbaracteristics (A/R,B/R,A/B):

Polar Characteristics .....

.

Real/imaginary Characteristics

Delay Characteristics . . . .

Display Characteristics . . . .

Programming Characteristics

General Characteristics

.4-72

.4-75

.4-77

·

4-79

.4-81

.4-85

.4-86

.4-88

·

. 5-15

.

·

5

-

5

-

1

15

.5-16

.5-17

·

5-18

8

.5-18

·

.5-20

5-21

.5-22

·

·

·

5-1

5-1

.5-2

.5-2

.5-4

·

5-6

·

5-6

.5-7

.5-8

·

.

5

-

11

.5-13

·

.5-14

.5-14

.5-14

·

5-14

;:

:

".

;

.

.

,.:' '\

�

. �

Appendix

A;

Special Topics

Data Pr ocess ing and

Structure

Optimiziog Sweep Time .

Appendix B: Remote Grapbics

Digital Display

Quick Reference Guide

Digital

Display

Conunands . . .

.

. . . . . .

.

. .

. . A-I

. . A-4

. B-l

.

B-1

Appendix C: Screen Messages

Message and

D escri p tio n

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Col

Appendix

D:

Programming Codes

HP

3577A

Programming Codes .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-1

Appendix

E:

Bibliograpby

Introduction of the

HP 3577A Network Analyzer and the

HP 35677A/B S-Parameter Test Set

I

1-1

1·2

Introduction

HP 3577A

Front Panel Overview c ;

(J!) -... -. .. -

I

I

�

\

,

, " ,---,

..

j------<l!

:

I Ir=

II

� l

B>

,

. r==

-

(6

..

'�/�

�

Q

\

�

-

0

D

I

. .

IIJ':":':!�.� .....

Wl"._. __

@

I

I

@

\

CAUTION

'\

�

1 00 not exceed maximum s ig n or these level s

IS exceeded, strument may result. a l level of ·27dbm

30 VDC on either test port. If either at damage to the

In

@

i

@

\

\

@ � �

I

G

-

2

The

I-'P

356778 hos 75n type-N femate connectors for test ports one and two. may

These be physically damaged If 50n Iype nectors ore used on the test ports. connectors

N con

A.Soflkeys

Select rtems from the menus using these eight keys beside the display: Select . a parameter for data entry, periorm an

Immediate execution funetton, make a selection from a list. or display the next level menu.

•

•

Data Entry Block: appears when a data entry softkey is active or bright, and displays the current value of the parameter. When entering or modifying new data, rt displays the new value.

Graticule: is displayed in linear, log, or Smith Chart formats.

Menu Area: is located on the right side of the screen indicating the sottkey labels of the chosen parameter. '

B. Screen Areas

The TRACE hardkeys in the

OISPLA

Y

FORMAT section select the active trace. This trace and the associated measurement parameters are shown on the screen in several information blocks or areas.

•

•

Marker Information Block: appears in the upper nght·hand corner of the screen above the graticule. n describes the trace display function and input definition and lists the marker position and measured value for each trace.

Scale Information Area: appears in the upper left·hand corner of the screen above the graticule. It defines both the reference level (dashed line) and the vertical scale in units/division for each trace.

•

C. Data Entry

The data entry section contains knob. Turning the numeric

key

pad and the the knob moves the marker or mod�ies a data

entry.

The key above the knob toggles between the marker and data entry modes. Correct an entry error backspace key. The entry off

by

using the key clears the menu which effectively eliminates further data entry.

'

. .

1-4

I

ntrod uction

HP3snA

Rear Panel Overview

11

I

�

0

0

(

�---

0

0

0

°Co

1/

I

CD

F

E

0

A. HP-IB Port:

Control operation of the HP 3577 A from a remote controller. with older cables using English fasteners.

Metric

are available from HP to upgrade older cables. fasteners c

D. External

Trigger:

This input is used of a

m

signal or to

trigger

a measurement on the falling edge a switch closure to ground.

B. Port Bias 1 & 2:

Two inputs on the rear of the HP a bias voltage to the front panel connections labeled PORT or PORT 2.

35677 NB serve to connect

1

E. 1 0 MHz Output:

A frequency reference output provides a stability of 0.05 ppm per· C.

0

dBm signal with

C.

Instrument Interconnect:

The HP 3577 A is connected to the HP of theteS! set, and allows the HP

35677

Test Set at the rear panel with the interconnect cable. This cable supplies power to the test set, controls the configuration

3577A

NB S·Parameter to sense the presence of the test set, changing the INPUT menu.

F. External Reference In:

This input is used to phase lock the HP 3577 A to an external frequency reference.

The signal applied should be between

-7 and + 15 dBm. The frequency of the external reference may be any subharmonic of

1 00 kHz.

10

MHz,

but greater than

G. CRT Display

Adjustments:

See Installation in the General Information sectiOn.

! :

:··1

Introduction

HP

3577A

O.


The HP 35677 NB is a 100 kHz to

200

MHz scattering parameter test set bui� for use with the HP 3577A Network

Analyzer. The A model has 500 test ports and the B model has 750 test ports. This test set provides a convenient method for making reflection and transmission measurements et one and two-port devices. The

HP

3577 A provides signal. power, and control forthe test set and provides a menu which includes S-parameter sottkey selections S11, S21, S12, and

S22.

I.

Source

•

•

•

Sweep Type: selects linear frequency sweep. atternate sweep, log frequency sweep, amplrtude sweep, CW, or sweep direction up or down.

Sweep Mode: selects continuous, single, or manual modes.

Sweep Time: is selectable from 100 mS/span to 6553

S/span for linear sweep type.

•

•

•

Frequency: specifies the start, stop, and center frequencies, frequency span, center frequency step size, sweep resolution, and full sweep.

Amplrtude: ranges from -49 dBm to

+

1 5 dBm in

0.1 dBm increments.

It can also clear a source trip.

Trigger Mode: available in free run, line, external, and immediate.

E. Source Output

The source output has overvo�ge protection circuitry that disconnects the output from the source when a signal is or greater.

4 V pk

F. Receiver Inputs

All three inputs have overvo�ge protection circuitry that senses signal levels greater than 1.1 V pk and switches the input impedance to 1 MO. The inputs may be overloaded without swrtching attenuation exceeds the signal level beyond the input

-20

dBm, but does not exceed 1.1 Vpk.

This condition causes inaccurate information to be displalyed and is indicated by an audible alarm, illumination at red alarm

LEDs over each overloaded input and a warning message displayed on the screen.

G. Instrument State

•

•

Special Functions: HP·IB address, talk only orYoff, confidence tests, beeper orYoff, service diagnoStics,

INPUT menu S-parameters orVoff.

Save Instrument State: saves the current state in one of five registers.

•

•

Recall Instrument State: state or the recalls a saved instrument the instrument at the last power down.

Plot: controls all plotting parameters to an HP-IB plotter.

J.

Display Fonnat

•

Input: R, A, B. NR, BIR, user defined inputs, S11, S21,

S12, S22.

•

Display Function: log magnitude, linear magnrtude, phase, polar, real, imaginary, group delay.

•

•

•

•

•

•

Scale: autoscale, reference level, /DIV, reference position, reference line orYoff, copy scate, phase slope value, phase slope orYoff.

Marker: marker position, marker on/off, zero marker, marker offset orYoff, marker offset (value), frequency offset (value), marker coupling orYoff.

Store Data: store data to one of four registers, user defined store, store and compare.

Measurement Calibration: Normalize, normalize w�h a short, one port parrtal calibration, one port full calibration.

Define Math: User may define three complex constants

(K1-K3), and five functions (F1-F5).

Marker ..... reference level, ..

. start frequency, ... stop frequency, ... cerrterfrequency, ... maximum, ... minimum, marker offset .. frequency span, marker search right or lelI for target value.

H. Receiver

•

Resolution Bandwidth: provides and 1 Hz.

1 kHz, 100 Hz,

10 Hz,

•

•

•

Averaging: selects a weighting value for exponential vector averaging.

Input Attenuation and Impedance: allows selection at attenuation (0 dB,

1

20

dB), and impedance

MO,) and clears receiver trip(S).

(500

or

Length: allows for data corrections for cable lengths in unrts of meters or seconds.

1·3

Introduction

HP3snA

Instrument Description

The HP 3577 A Network Analyzer is a three-input, dual trace, synthesized, 5 Hz-200 MHz programmable network analyzer. It features menu-driven operation, using eight softkeys located next to the menu display area of the CRT. A menu is a list of softkey labels that appears on the

CRT next to the soft keys. Display a menu by pressing the hardkey for the parameter to be modified or the measurement to be made. This permits control of many features with a minimum number of front panel keys by redefining the softkeys with each new menu. Marker information and sweep parameters are displayed above and below the CRT graticule and give the current instrument status.

Trace information displayed on the HP 3577 A CRT is digitally stored as complex data (real and imaginary) in trace memory. Using the storage and math processing capabilities of the HP 3577

A, up to eight different display formats may be derived from the same trace data and changes in scale may be made without repeating the measurement.

All HP 3577 A graticules are electronically generated on the screen as part of the display operation.

Thus, no screen overlays are needed for polar or log graticules or the Smith chart. In log sweep the graticule changes to reflect changes in start and stop frequencies.

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

Other features of tbe HP 3577 A include

Electrical length correction/measurement

Automatic plot routines for HP-GL plotters

User defined vector math

Vector averaging

1

Hz resolution bandwidth

Automatic self-protection on the source output and receiver inputs

The ability to save and recall five instrument states

The HP 3577 A has three functional blocks: SOURCE, RECEIVER, and DISPLAY FORMAT.

The source and receivers work together to gather data and store it in trace memory. The display section takes the trace data and formats it for viewing.

-.

. '.

1-<;

Introduction

HP3SnA

How To Use This Manual

The GETTING STARTED section is designed to help the first-time user. This section describes how to turn on the HP 3577 A It also defines some terms used in this inanual, gives operating hints, and shows how to run the confidence test.

The MEASUREMEN T section describes the use of the HP 3577 A Network Analyzer and the

HP 35677

A/B

S-Parameter Test Set in making typical measurements on several common devices.

These measurements are examples that cover topics of general interest and demonstrate the capabilites of the HP 3577 A and the HP 35677

A/B

.

The REMOTE OPERATION section describes the Hewlett-Packard Interface Bus and how it is used to operate the HP 3577 A with a controller( computer). To use the HP 3577 A under remote control, first become acquainted with front panel operation then refer to the REMOTE

OPERATION section.

The REFERENCE section is an alphabetical listing of the front panel sections, hardkeys, and terms.

Each hardkey topic shows its associated softkeys and describes each softkey command in detail.

Before proceeding, read Installation in the General Information section. This reading covers initial inspection, power requirements, power cable and grounding requirements, installation for the

HP 3577 A and the HP 35677

A/B

, and definition of the operating environment.

1-5

Introduction

HP 3577A

Initial Inspection

This instrument was carefully inspected both mechanically and electrically before shipment. It should meet published specifications. To confirm this, inspect the instrument for physical damage incurred in transit, inventory the supplied accessories (listed in table 5-2), and test the electrical performance using the Confidence Test listed in the section on Getting Started. If there is physical damage, if the contents are incomplete or if the instrument does not pass the Confidence Test, notify the nearest HP Sales and Service Office.

If the shipping container is damaged or the cushioning material shows signs of stress, notify the carrier as well as the Hewlett-Packard office.

Keep the shipping material for the carrier's inspection.

Warning

G

The integrity of the protective earth ground may be interrupted if the

HP

3577A is mechanically damaged. Under no circumstance should the

HP 3577A be connected to power if it is damaged.

1-7

Chapter

1

Getting Started

Getting Started

Introduction

This section is designed to get the fll'St time user ready to make measurements. To do this the

HP 3577 A must be configured and fused for the available line voltage and safely connected to the power line before it is turned on. As the

CR T w arms up, a self test is run that sounds the beeper, illuminates aU the front panel LED's and tests internal RAM and ROM. By the time the CRT is warm enough to display a screen, normal operation has begun. Approximately ten minutes after power is turned on, the beeper will sound again as the oven reference reaches operating temperature and switches in as the frequency reference for the HP 3577 A Network Analyzer.

After the detailed turn-on procedure is a defmition of some of the terms commonly used in this manual and some operating hints to help the new user establish good operating habits. "IN CASE

OF TROUBLE" is included under operating hints.

1

1-1

Getting Started

Instrument Turn On

Instrument Turn On

I. Before connecting ac power to the HP 3577 A a.

Set the rear panel VOLTAGE SELEcrOR switch to the position that corresponds to the powerline voltage to be used:

Voltage Selector

115V

230V

Lina Voltage

B6Vto 127V at

4B Hzto

440

Hz

195V to

253V at

48 Hz to

66 Hz

Warning

o

To avoid serious injury, be sure that the ac power cord is disconnected before removing or installing the ac line fuse. b. Verify that the proper line fuse is installed in the rear-panel FUSE holder:

Voltage Selector

115V

230V

FusaTypa

6A, 250V Normal 810

3A, 250V Normal 810

HP Part No.

2110-0056

2110-0003

Warning

(I

To protect operating personnel, the HP35nA chassis and cabinet must be grounded. The HP 35nA Is equipped with a three-wire power cord Which, when plugged into an appropriate receptacle, grounds the Instrument. To preserve this protection feature the power plug must be inserted in a three-terminal receptacle having a protective earth ground contact. The protective action must not be negated by the use of an extension cord or adapter that does not have the required earth ground connection.

Grounding one conductor of a two-conductor outlet is not sufficient protection.

Ensure that all devices connected to the HP 3577A are also connected to the protective earth ground.

1-2

Note

"

Getting

Started

Instrument Tum On c. Set the front panel power switch to the OFF position. d. Connect the ac power cord to the rear panel LINE connector. Plug the other end of the power cord into a three-terminal grounded power outlet. e. Turn on the power to the instrument by pressing the LINE switch on the front panel to the

ON position. Verify that all front panel LED's illuminate simultaneously soon after the

HP 3577 A is turned on.

Each time the HP 3577 A is powered ON a self-test of ROM and RAM is run and the results (pass/fail) are displayed on the screen. (Normally the CRT will not display these results because it hasn't warmed up). The beeper will sound and all front panel LED's should illuminate when the instrument is flTSt turned on. The operator should vis u ally verify that all LED's illuminate.

Note

" f. Verify that the cooling fan on the rear panel is operating and that the SWEEP LED on the front panel is flashing about once per second. g. Approximately ten minutes after power-on the beeper will sound and the screen message

"REFERENCE UNLOCKED" will appear very briefly. This indicates that the oven reference has reached operating temperature and has been selected as the frequency reference for the Voltage Controlled Crystal Oscillator (VCXO). When the switch occurs, the VCXO takes a moment to achieve phase lock which causes the screen message. Until this switch occurs the VCXO uses its own

10 MHz crystal as the frequency reference. If

"REFERENCE UNLOCKED" remains on the screen, contact an authorized repair facility.

The internal oven will automatically become the frequency reference when it reaches operating temperature; no external connections are necessary. The jack on the rear panel marked EXTERNAL REFERENCE should not be connected to the

10

MHz REFERENCE OUTPUT beside it.

1-3

Getting

Started

"Hardkeys" & "Softkeys"

"Hard keys" & "Softkeys"

Before using the analyzer, it is important to understand the difference between hardkeys and softkeys.

Hardkeys are front panel buttons whose functions are always the same. Most hardkeys have a label printed directly on the key. Throughout this book, they are printed like this:

HARD KEY

Softkeys are keys whose functions change with the analyzer's current menu selection.

A softkey's function is indicated by video label to the left of the key (along the edge of the CRT display).

Throughout this book, they are printed like this:

SOFTKEY

Definitions & Operating Hints

1. It is good practice to start a measurement setup by pressing INSTR PRESET . This is a quick way to set all parameters to known values (the PRESET state) and is used as the common starting point for measurements in this manuaL For a listing of the PRESET state parameter values, see INSTRUMENT PRESET in the REFERENCE section.

Note

•

The PRESET state depends on whether an HP

35677A/B

S-Parameter Test Set is connected to the HP

3577

A Making the connection without turning off power to the HP

3577 A

Network Analyzer, requires pressing

INSTR PRESET to update the starting parameter values.

2. The recommended sequence for setting up a measurement is

•

•

•

•

INPUT

DISPLAY FCTN

FREQ

AMPTD

This sequence is a good, general start for setting up an instrument state and should be easy to remember. See the circled numbers in figure

1-1.

I

" �

1-4

Getting Staned

Definitions & Operating Hints

(

\

0

TRACE 1

0

)

(

TRACE

2

)

\

�-,

[STOR

E lO��VJ

' l l

SCALE

1 B

(HEASR) (DEFINE) �

CAL

MATH

�

DATA

-

DATA ENTRY

.... -0

,anT 0

0

I

Fig

....

1-1. Set-UP Sequence

I

SOURCE

-

.,,-T_

0

0 wEEP

TYF'

UT .. ,

0 l

TRIOl

FREO AHF'TD

-

MODE

RE SE r

]

T

RECEIYER

El (ATTEN) (

LENOT

1

,

INSTRUIUiNT STATE

I

3. The HP 3577 A is a menu·driven instrumenL The hardkeys (an keys with a function stenciled on them) are used to display the various menus. If the menu displayed is not what you wanted, press another hardkey to display another menu. If you decide not to make a data entry after beginning the entry on the numeric keypad, you may press another hardkey to exiL Since data entries must be terminated by selection of units (Hz, dBm, etc.) no entry is made if units are not selected.

4. The softkey labels will appear next to the eight softkeys, along the right·hand side of the display screen. Each group of softkey labels is referred to as a "menu."

5. The beeper will sound to attract the user's attention when the HP 3577 A displays a new screen message unless the beeper has been turned off; (see SPECIAL FUNCTIONS in the

REFERENCE chapter).

6. If the HP 3577 A is used as part of a measurement system, it is recommended that the frequency references of all instruments be phase. locked to a common frequency standard.

The HP 3577 A will lock to a frequency reference applied to its External Reference Input if the signal is between - 7 and + 15 dBm and the frequency is the result of dividing

10 MHz by an integer and is above

2:

100 kHz (:20 ppm). The HP 3577A can serve as the system reference via its 10 located on the rear panel.

MHz,

0 dBm Reference Output Both of these connections are

If the HP 3577 A is used as the standard, the stability will be

.05 ppm per 0c.

7. The HP 3577 A requires 60 minutes warm up time before all of the specifications win apply; however, the instrument is operable during this warm·up period.

1·5

Getting

Started

In Case of Trouble

In Case of Trouble

8.

If the HP 3577 A fails to respond to front panel key presses, perform the following steps until normal operation is restored: a.

Verify that the HP-m status indicator LED labeled "REMOTE" is not illuminated. It is possible that the instrument has been addressed over the bus, in which case it will not respond to front panel operation until LOCAL control is restored by pressing the hardkey or via a controller issued command. The LCL

LCL key will not restore LOCAL status if the controller has issued a LOCAL LOCKOUT command. b. Press INSTR PRESET . c. Turn the HP 3577 A power OFF and back ON.

Caution

I

The test described in the following step will erase the contents of all nonvolatile read/write memory on the main processor board. This resets all six instrument states, plot parameters, and the HP-m parameters to their default parameters. d. If none of the previous steps have returned control to the front panel:

•

•

•

Turn power OFF

Hold down SAVE and RECALL simultaneously

Turn power ON

Continue to hold the keys down until all power-on tests are complete. This procedure will test parts of the main processor memory not normally tested and may reset a bad memory register, allowing normal operation to continue. e. Contact an authorized repair facility.

1 -6

Getting

Started

Confidence T es t

Confidence Test

After unpacking the instrument or whenever a quick check of basic operation is necessalY, run the confidence test using the following keystrokes.

�;'�)!:':;\rVVi:\:':n,""

SPCL FCTN

CONF TEST

Hardkey in the INSTRUMENT STATE section used to display the SPECIAL

FUNCTION menu. This menu contains the softkey, CONF TEST.

This selects the confidence test. Note that the screen displays a message to connect a cable between the output and the input to be tested. The menu contains commands to test any of the inputs. Connect the cable as shown below.

TEST R

Softkey that begins test of input R.

The HP 3577 A will run nine tests and display pass/fail results of each. These tests are:

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

Log Sweep signal level test

Log Sweep flatness test

Linear Sweep signal level

Linear Sweep magnitude flatness

Synthesizer and LO. feed through

Amplitude Sweep accuracy

Output limiter linearity

Receiver Impedance

Receiver Attenuator

If any tests fail, the HP 3577 A Network Analyzer will stop the testing and display a failure message.

Testing may be continued by pressing the will be bright.

CONTINUE TEST key. Any screen listing of a failed test

1-7

Getting Staned

Confidence Test

Inputs A and B may be tested in the same manner by connecting the source OUTPUT to the receiver input to be tested and pressing t

ti

e corresponding softkey. When testing is complete, press

INSTR PRESET

or any other hardkey to exit the

CONF TEST

menu and be

gi

n a measurement setup.

Note

"

If any of the HP 3577 A CONF1DENCE TESlS fail, refer to the HP 3577 A Service

Manual for instructions.

Warning o

Service procedures should only be executed by trained service personnel, only. To avoid electrical shock, do not perform any servicing procedures unless qualified to do so.

. . 0 1

-8

Chapter

2

Making Measurments

Making Measurements

This section contains step by step instructions demonstrating the use of the HP 3577 A Network

Analyzer and the HP 35677 AJB S-Parameter Test Set to make measurements.

Using the HP 3577 A by itself, characterize:

. 1. A tuned stub notch filter a.

Measurement set up b. Using the marker to make measurements c. STORE trace data d. SA

YE Instrument State

2. A bandpass filter a. Measurement set up b. Measure - 60 dB and - 3 dB bandwidths (calculate shape factor) c. Measure passband ripple d. Measure passband insenion phase e. Measure passband group delay

3. Gain compression of an amplifier a. Measurement set up b. Measure - 3 dB gain compression point

2

2-'

Making Measurements

Using the HP 35677

A!B

S-Parameter Te�t Set with the HP 3577

A, characterize:

4. A low pass filter a. Measurement set up b. Measure insertion loss c. Measure passband insertion phase d. Measure passband ripple

5. S-parameters of an amplifier a

Initial measurement set up b. Measure S21 ' forward gain and phase c. Measure S12' reverse loss d. Measure S11 ' return loss e. Measure S22 ' output reflection coefficient f. Conversion of reflection coefficient to complex impedance

This list of measurements was selected to cover topics of general interest and common usage such that most of the capabilities of the HP 3577 A Network Analyzer and HP 35677

A!B

S-Parameter Test Set are demonstrated. For details on operating features see the REFERENCE section. The listing of the hardkeys in the REFERENCE section is alphabetical.

As you read this section press the keys on the HP 3577 A listed at the left of each page. Even if nothing is connected to be tested, references to menus and data entry exercises will help you learn to operate the HP 3577 A Network Analyzer. It is inlportant to start each topic at the beginning

(i e., at INSTRUMENT PRESET).

Note that most hardkeys are used only to display a menu of softkey labels. If a mistake is made in data entry or feature selection for data entry (such as forgetting to select CENTER FREQ before beginning to enter it), pressing the hardkey again will display the original menu.

2-2

Making Measurements



Connect the cables and adapters as shown in figure 2-1. This configuration should result in a notch filter whose center frequency is related to the length of the open-ended cable. The notch filter is constructed from the following parts:

1

1

1

Qty

2

2

Description

N(m) to BNe(f) adapters

1 foot BNe cable

BNe tee (f) (f) (m)

BNe(f) to BNe(f) adapter

2 foot BNe cable

HP Part Number

1250-0780

8120-1838

1250-0781

1250-0080

8120·1 839

CABlE

I-IP

1250-0060

FEMALE BARREL

[]

'---t-'-

N

(mI TO BNC (f)

ADAPTERS

HP !120-183B

1 FT aNC CABLES

ILENCiTH NOT I/"PORT ANTI

�';";'=:"":;;;;;;;:-a--

LE

A yE END OPEN

(SPECIFIC

LENGTH f;£OVFi£D TO MATCH

MANUAL RESUL TS)

F igure 2-1. Circuit Configuration

2·3

Making Measurements

Tuned Stub

Notch Filter

This measurement exercise is designed to show:

1.

How to set up the instrument state to make a measurement.

2 How to use the markers to make measurements.

3. How to STORE trace data.

4. How to SA YE an instrument state.

Data entries require four steps: press a hardkey to display a menu, press a softkey (if not already active or bright) to select the parameter for data entry, enter data with the numeric key pad, and press a softkey to select units. If the knob or arrow keys are used, unit selection is not necessary; since existing values are modified, units do not change.

Any of the three receiver inputs may be used for this example. If the operator wishes to use an input other than R (the default input definition), connection should be made to that input and the corresponding selection should be made in the front panel connections R,

INPUT menu. Note that "receiver input" refers to

A, and B while "INPUT' refers to the definition of the screen trace under the INPUT hard key.

This measurement setup begins, after INSTRUMENT PRESET, by defining INPUT, DISPLAY

FUNCllON, FREQUENCY, and AMPUTUDE.

2-4

Making Measurements

Measurement Se t Up

Measurement Set Up

��KS':.:"

...

;:ii" .:·

INSTR

PRESET

This green hardkey in the INSTRUMENT STATE section of the front panel presets HP3577 A parameters to their default values. These are listed under

INSTRUMENT PRESET in the REFERENCE section of this manual. Note that the

INPUT

menu is displayed.

A

Entry Block

Softkey used to select receiver input A as the INPUT definition for the active trace. Note that the LED above the TRACE 1 hardkey is illuminated, indicating that trace one is active. The screen should now appear as shown in figure 2-2

I D l Y

1 0 . 0 0 0 d B

M ....

RKER

MAG ( A )

1 0 0 0 0 0 O O O . OOOHz

- 3 2 . 7 4 5 d B m

R

A

T r e e

�

' A '

1

-.......

'"

\

/'

B

"R

. / R

Source QuIp

Signal Leve

I �

I

START 0 OaOH=

-..

AMPTD - 1 0 . 0 dBm

DATA

REO

USER DEF

I NPUT

STOP 2 0 0 0 0 0 O O O . O O O H :!

COPY

T " 2"

Figure 2-2. Log Magnitude of Input A

2-5

Making Measurements

Measurement Se t Up

TRACE 2

A

DISP

FCTN

PHASE

Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section that selects trace two as the active trace. Note that the

INPUT

menu shows that INPUT R is active for trace two.

Note that trace one and its alphanumeric information above the graticule dimmed slightly when trace two was selected.

Softkey that selects receiver input

A as the active input for trace two. When this key was pressed the beeper sounded and the screen message "WARNING:

TRACE IS OFF" appeared.

Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section that displays a new menu listing the seven possible display function formats available for each trace. Note that trace two is OFF.

Softkey used to select the phase display function for the active trace. Pressing this key turns trace two on and defines its display function to be phase. Note that trace two is brighter than trace one. This difference in trace intensity and the LEDs above the TRACE hardkeys indicate which trace is active. Any softkey commands given or data entered will affect the active trace. Note that when trace two was turned on another set of alphanumeric information appeared above the graticule. This information applies to trace two and is the same intensity as the trace.

The screen should now appear as shown in figure 2-3

T r a c e 2 R e f

L e v e

I

(�e�O��;�L fO I V

10 , DOOdB

MARKEA

I1AG < A I

'00 000 000 . 000H2

-32 7)008'"

COG

MAO o Od.g

'

.

4 5 . QOOd.g

PH

....

SE ( A )

0 0 0

-

"

D O O . OOOHz

67"0_"

" N

MAO

T r a c e 2 �

---...

"i

'"

PMASE

POI..

...

R

-----

,

"

,

----

"-

\

.

"

'"

�

�

"'-

RE"'L

J M"O

"

DEL.AY

ZTA!'<T

...... PTO

C 000"';:

- 1 0 . 0038",

STOP

'00 0 0 0

0 0 0

000H2

OF<

Figure 2-3. Log Magnitude and Phase of Input

A

"

'

.:

'

2-6

Making Measurements

Measurement Set Up

FREQ

1

MHz

STOP FREQ

1 5 0

MHz

Hardkey in the SOURCE section used to display the FREQUENCY menu.

Note that the softkey label START FREQ is active. Since this is the parameter to be modified, selection of a softkey parameter is not necessary.

Data entry done with the numeric key pad in the DATA ENlRY section.

Softkey used to select units for the data entry.

Softkey used to select the stop frequency parameter for modification or data entry of a new value.

Data entry done with the numeric key pad in the DATA ENlRY section.

Softkey used to select units for tbe data entry.

2-7

2-8

Making Measurements

Measurement Set Up

AMPTD

Description i.3: :

:

: f: 1: {::�:�"'>:< �: � ::::t � : �� .

;i:; �t:;;;;;�m :: :: : �:+:�: t:: m ��J�w:::�: u ��g : �{�: tl{ :mill :::<;;:::: ::::f:m : �::.m�� : %:E +;;:i-: ::X:'i.:t'1 : � � : mt � � : �': :;':

::X::"l

� t�',: �:t� .i�::.t

�}i:�::: :: :

Hardkey in the SOURCE section used to display the

AMPUTUDE

menu. Note that the softkey label

AMPTD

is active. Since this is the parameter to be modified, selection of a softkey parameter is not necessary. Note that the

ENTRY BLOCK shows the current value of this parameter is

-

10 dBm.

TRACE 1

Down arrow key in the DATA ENTRY section used to decrement the active parameter by the STEP SIZE. Note that the value in the ENTRY BLOCK and the alphanumerics at the lower left corner of the graticule show that the source amplitude is now

-

1 1 dBm

(i.e.

STEP SIZE is 1 dB).

Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section that selects trace one as the active trace.

SCALE

AUTO

SCALE

Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section that displays the scale parameter menu.

Softkey selection that selects scale parameters such that the active trace will fit in the graticule. The screen should now appear as shown in figure 2-4.

No'.

� • • values for Trace 1 r

)

REF L.EVEL a . Odeg

,

- 2 S . 000dell'l i

-

'

-

-

1 0 1 11

5 . oooaS

4 S . 000dotg

MA.RKER 75

MAG C A !

MARKER 75 500 o o a . OOQHZ

PHASE I " I

�

1 \

.�

...........

"'-

,

,

\ j

T::C:

I

FV",

· 2'

(

/

"-

"-

500 0 0 0 . 0001'1%

_ 4 9 . 6 7 2 dBtr'I

-e6 . 6 0 7 C1 a g

•

,

-

I-.....

,

AUTO

SCALE

REF

LEVEL

I D 1 V

REF P05N

REF L I NE

ON OFF

COpy

SCL

2· '

START

AMPTD

,

000

"

000

OCl8m

OOOl-tz S T O P

1 5 0 0 0 0 OOO . OOOMz

Figure 2-4. Changing Source and Scale Parameter Value

Now the measurement set up is complete. Next we begin to take measurements.

Making

Measurements

Making Measurements

Making Measurements

RPG KNOB

MKR

The knob in the DATA ENTRY section should be in the MARKER mode

(indicated by the LEDs above the knob and changed to modify data in the

ENTRY mode with the key next to the LEDs). Turn the knob and notice that the markers move along the traces and the change in information display in the marker information block. Position the markers at the extreme left of the graticule.

Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section used to display the

MARKER menu.

ZERO MARKER

MKR ...

Softkey used to turn on the OFFSET MARKER feature and set the

MARKER OFFSET

(which is a magnitude in this case) and

FREQ OFFSET values to those of the regular marker. Note that a triangular marker appears on top of the circular marker on trace one. This offset marker is now the reference for measurements taken with the marker on trace one. Note the change in the marker information block for trace one from "MARKER" to "OFFSET."

Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section used to display the MARKER

GOES INTO .

.. menu. These keys may be used to make data entries with the marker after positioning it with the knob or to move the marker to maximum or minimum points on the trace.

MARKER

SEARCH

Softkey used to display the MARKER SEARCH menu, which is a second level menu. Note that MARKER TARGET is the active (bright) softkey label and that its default value is

-

3.000 dB.

MKR ...

R TARG

Softkey used to search right for target value. Note that the regular marker on trace two moves right until it reaches the first point on the trace where it is three dB below the OFFSET MARKER.

2-9

Making Measurements

Making Measurements

Key

. . . . . ... ,.,._.,.'-'_ ...

MKR Hardkey described previously.

ZERO MARKER

MKR ...

Softkey described previously. Note that the offset marker moves to the position of the regular marker.

Hardkey described previously.

MARKER

SEARCH

Softkey described previously. o dB

MKR ...

R TARG

Data entry for a new marker target value.

Softkey selection of units for the new marker target value.

Softkey used to search right for target value. The MARKER information block now shows the 3 dB width of the notch filter as shown in figure 2-5. r

REF LEVEL

- 2 S . 0 0 0 d 8 m

O . O d e g

�

'-.

I D J V

5 . 0 0 0 d 6

4 5 . 0 0 0 d e g

OFFS�T 59 972 500 . 000Hz

MAG ( A )

MARKER

1 0 . 9 2 7 SOO _ OOO

H z

PHASE ( A )

O . 0 2 f1 d B

_ 2 5 . 5:3 4 1:111:;

---..

�

1'\

I

I-....

�

I

�

\ j

!

"-

T l" oc

DJ-"

�o

1

....,

'"

--

"-

"-

MKR

�

R TARG

MKR ...

L

TARG

MARKER

TARGET

START

AMPTD - 1 1

.

0 dBm

STOP 1 5 0 000 O O O . O O O H z

RETURN

Figure 2-5. 3dB Width

D

D

D

D n

D

2·10

Making Measurements

Making Measurements

Key

.

-

.

--.-

.

-

.

-.-

.

-."-

.

"

.

,,:,

.

,

,'· w.,',,_,",_:.,

MKR

MKR OFST

ON OFF

MKR -

MKR - MIN


Softkey used to turn offset marker on or off. This is a push-push toggle type key; continued key presses will toggle the feature between on and off. One keypress now turns it off. Note the return of the marker information block to marker.


Softkey used to move the marker to the lowest value on the trace. This point is the center frequency of the notch. Note that the marker information block now contains the notch center frequency and rejection magnitude as shown in figure 2-6.

REF LEVEL

[enter Frequency &

Rejection Level of Notch

I

,

- 2 S . 000dBm a . Dele!;)

I D l v

5 . 000a8

� MARKER

4 '5 . 000der;J

MAG I ", '

MARKER

"

'

"

OOO . O OOHz

MKR ..

- 6 3 . 1 39d8.-

77 n ,

O O O . ODDHz

REF eve

PHASE ( A ) - 3 4 . 5 4 20elJ

MKR ..

I

ST ,lI;;RT

I i

START

AMPTD

, ,

I

-

�

\

\ !

I

/'

".

"

""

�

,

0 0 0 0 0 0

_ 1 1 . 0aSm

I

DO OH%.

"-

I j i

S T O P " 0 0 0 0

"

r"

I

O O O . ODOHZ

MKF! ....

STOP

NI<:R ...

CENTER

MKR

.

OFST

SPAN

MKR ..

MAX

MKR ..

M I N

MORE

Figure 2-6. Notch Center Freq uency

I

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

2-' ,

Making Measurements

Making Measurements

TRACE 2

SCALE

- 1 6 0 deg

TRACE 1

DISPLY

FCTN

DELAY



Data entry.

Softkey selection of units.

Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section.

Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section used to display the DISPLAY

FUNCTION menu.

Softkey selection of group delay as the display function for the active trace.

Note that this softkey label changes to read DELAY APERTURE when pressed.

Also note the DELAY APER alphanumeric data under the lower right corner of the graticule. See figure 2-7.

REF LEVEL

O . OSEC

- 7 S . 0 0 0 Cl e g

I D I V MARKER 7 7 7 3 5 O O O . OOOl-lz

1 0 0 . 00nSEC DELAY I A J - 2 5 3 . 59nSEC

4 5 OODCleg MARKER 7 7 7 3 5 O O O . OOOHz

PHASE l A )

- 3 " . 8 ;1 0 c:l e: Q

LOG

MAO

U N

MAG

---.......

'"

1'-...

�

"""

'--...-...

I

'--...-...

'

�

'"

I

I

I

, l

START

,

0 0 0 O O O . OOOHZ

AMPTD - 1 1 . 0 d9m

Selected for Aperature i

I

STOP 150 0 0 0 O O O . O O OHz

OELA

;

APER 7 4 5 0kHz

PHASE

POLAR

REAL

I MAG

DELAY

.... PERTURE

OFF

Figure 2-7. Phase and Group Delay

I

I

0

0

I

I

2-12

Making Measurements

Making Measurements

DELAY

APERATURE

1 %

OF SPAN

DISPLY

FCTN

POLAR

SCALE

AUTO SCALE

Softkey used to display the menu of user selectable values for the delay aperture. These value's units are frequency in percent-of-span. Data entries are not allowed for this parameter.

Softkey used to select a delay aperture that is

1 % of the total frequency span swept.


Softkey used to select POLAR as the display function for the active trace.

Since only one trace is allowed in POLAR display function, the inactive trace will be turned off.


Softkey described previously. See figure 2-8.

FULL SCALE

1 0 . 0 0 0mV

PHASE

R E � D . O d e g

R E F POSN O . O d e g

S�ART

1 0 0 0

OOO .

O OOH�

AMPTO

_ , 1

.

DeBm

MARKER

7 7 7 3 5 0 0 0 . DODHZ

MAG ( A I 1 5 6 . 8 7 � V

PHASE l A ) - 3 6 D 5 6 d e g ce 1

AUTO

S C A L E

FULL

SCALE

PHASE

REF

REI=

POSN

REF L I NE

ON OFF

SM I TH CH

ON OF�

PHASE

SLOPE

STOP

1 5 0 0 0 0

0 0 0

D O O H Z PI-! SLOPE

ON OFF

�D

I=====o=D

F====-=

:

D f====D f====D fo===D

D

Figure 2·8. Polar Display Function

Now the measurements are complete. Next, we will

STORE the trace data in one of four data storage registers.

2-13

Making Measurements

Store Trace Data

Store Trace Data

STORE

DATA

Hardkey in the DrSPLA Y FORMAT section used to display the store menu.

The menu should appear as shown in figure 2-9.

�ULL

S C A L E 1 0 . 0 0 0 m V

P�ASE R E F D . O d � g

REF PDSN O . D O @ Q

START l O C O OOO . O O O H z

AMPTO - 1 ' . OdBm

MARKER 77 735 O O O . O O OH=

HAG I A ) 1 5 7 .

6 7..,.V

F:>HASE C A I

-

3S

.

1

22d a g

STORE

REG 11 '

STORE

REG D Z

STOP 1 5 0 0 0 0 O O O . O O O H z

Figure 2-9. Store Data Menu

STORE

REG D3

STORE

REG D�

USER DEF

STORE

STORE &

D I SPLAY

/-===0

1===0

1-==-====-0 o

2-14

Making Measurements

Store

Trace Data

STORE

REG D1

INPUT

DATA REG

D1

OISPlY

FCTN

UN

MAG

Softkey used to store the trace data of the active trace as defined under the

INPUT key into data register D 1. Since the INPUT of both traces is defmed to be

A, it didn't matter which trace was active. The current display function has no effect on what is stored. Note the screen message "STORE completed."

Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section. We're going to display the data register we just stored data in.

Softkey used to specify that the INPUT defmition is a data register.

Softkey used to specify which data register is displayed. Note that a sweep dot still appears. Memory sweeps are still occurring but no new measurement is being displayed.

If new

START

and

STOP

frequencies are entered, this trace will not change.

Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMA T section. Trace data may be represented in any of the seven display functions.

Any softkey in this menu may be selected to redefine the display function for the trace showing data stored in the data registers.

2·15

2-16

Making Measurements



��

' ,,;n,;,; )),., r , :

SAVE

Hardkey in the INSlR

UMENT

STATE section used to display the menu used to save the instrument state into one of five state registers. This menu will appear as shown in figure 2-10.

SAVE REG 1

Softkey selection of instrument state register one. Note screen message

"INStRUMENT STATE SA YED." This state may be recalled by pressing the

RECALL hard key and then pressing the RECALL REG 1 softkey. Cycling power or presetting the instrument will not affect this memo!), register.

� U L L S C A L E 10 o a O m V

PHASE r:fEF O . O d e g

REF iC>OSN O . Odeg

START ' 000 OOO . ODOH%

AMPTO

· " . 0dBm

MARKER

H A G

O ( 1 )

7 7 7 ) 5

O O O . OOOHz

1 5 7 . 2

"' .... v

PHASE j X

1

I

-

3S . 3 36d_g

STOP 150 0 0 0 OOO . OOOH2

SAVE

REG 1

SAVE

REG

2

SAVe:

REG ;:,

SAvE

REG '"

SAvE

REG

S t=o

0

1 iO

�O

Figure 2-10. Save Instrument State Menu i' .. " .

,

" .:

��1

::j

Making Measurements

Bandpass Filter

8andpass Filter

Connect the filter to the HP 3577 A as shown in figure 2-1 1. The bandpass filter used in this example has a center frequency of 70 MHz but the process is the same for any bandpass filter.

I f==

D r-

"-

@

0 c=J

0

D O D O

OOOO

0000

IQl

DODO

0

0000

$ F===> =====0

Cl Cl

� c=Jc:JD

D O D O

[G"600] i

O

�

Fppl c

�

�

•

0

0

� t®

(j)

0

.�

I"

I

J

70 MHz

1

BPF

Figure 2-1 1.

The purpose of this measurement exercise is to demonstrate the use of the HP 3577 A Network

Aoalyzer to characterize a bandpass filter. The general organization is:

1. Set up the measurement

2. Measure the

-

60 dB and

-

3 dB bandwidths

3. Measure the passband ripple

4. Measure the passband insertion phase

5. Measure the passband group delay

( calculate the shape factor

)

2-17

Making Measurements

Band pass Filter

This measurement set up begins, after IN�TRUMENT PRESET, with the four hardkeys:

INPUT

DISPLY FCTN

FREQ

AMPTD

This set up will be

INPUT

=

B/R

DISPLAY FUNCTION

=

LOG MAG

CENTER FREQ

=

70 MHz

FREQ SPAN

=

100 kHz

(equivalent to setting

START FREQ

=

69.95 MHz

STOP FREQ

=

70.05 MHz)

AMPUTUDE

=

0 dBm.

2·18

Making Measurements

Measurement Set Up

Measurement Set Up

INSTR

PRESET

B/R

This green hardkey, in the INSTRUMENT STATE section, is used to preset the HP 3577 A parameters to their default values. These are listed under

INSlRUMENT PRESET in the REFERENCE section. Note that the

INPUT menu is displayed when the HP 3577A is PRESET. See figure 2-12 and the screen of the HP 3577 A If the INPUT hardkey is pressed the menu will not change.

Softkey used to change the INPUT definition to B/R.

DISPLY FCTN

Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section. Note the new menu. These softkeys are the seven (eight, counting OFF) ways that the measurement data will be interpreted by the HP 3577 A Note that the current (and default)

DISPLAY FUNCTION is Log Magnitude. Make no change in this menu.

Data Entry Block

REF

!..I!V!;L

O . O O O d B m

I D I V

1 0 .

' B

�

M

'RKE. ' D O 0 0 0 O O O . O O O M ?

A G I R I � : n . 1 4 1 0B m

'-,

T r e e:

.

,

I

I

I i

: i

I

I

-

I---

�

OATA

REG

USER DEF

I NPUT

I

START i

CI . O O O H z:

AHPTD . 1 0 . 0dBm

I

R

•

•

A I R

B I R

STOI='

2 0 0 0 0 0 O O O . OOOHZ

COpy n e z· ,

Figure 2-12. Default Menu

2-19

Making Measurements

Measurement Set Up

FREQ

CENTER FREQ

Softkey used to select center frequency as the parameter for modification.

Default value is lOO MHz.

7

0

Data entry

MHz Softkey used to select megahertz as t he units for the data entry. Note that the data entry is not complete until units are selected from the menu.

FREQ S PAN

Hardkey in the SOURCE section used to display the menu of softkeys shown in figure 2-13.

1 0 0

kHZ

AMPTD o

dBM

Softkey used to select frequency span as the parameter for modification. The data entry block (on the screen) shows the current value is 200

MHz.

Data entry

Softkey used to select kHz as units for entry.

Hardkey in the SOURCE section used to display the menu of softkeys shown in figure 2-14. Default value is

-

1 0 dBm without the test set and + 15 dBm with the test set.

Data entry

Softkey used to select the units for the data entry. The entry is complete when this key is pressed. r"-;

2-20

REF L.EVEL

0 . o a O a 6

I

,

\

' D ' V , �'RKE'

1 0 .

0 0 0 d S

, 0 0

0 0 0 O O O . C O O H Z

MA G t A / R ) - o S . t!l 9 7 dB i

,

,

'..

'

'0 . 00

'"z

START f"Re:a

STOP

FR:EO

CENTER

FREO

1

"'REO

'SPAN

��'l'I i'

Ill'

,

1

II 1'"

STOP 2 0 0 o c o a O C . OOOHz ST"ART

AMPTO

O . o a C H ?

- 1 0 OdB",

C

FREO

STEP

S�EP

RESOLUTN

�UL�

SWEEP

Figure 2-13. The Frequency Menu

.

Making Measurements

Measurement Set Up

I

I

J

I

J

I

I

J l O I V l O . D D OdS

AMPTD

REF LEVEL a . a O O d S

MARKER

1 0

MAG I A / R l

, . 7

_

1 .

250 . 0001-4%

8 S 1 d 8

�II

11

1

,

'

V

/

I

I \

.... T

1 0 pdBm

'\

\

I't

'ill

� l

(ENTER

1 0 1 6 7 5 0 0 . 0 0 OH z

AMPTD - 1 0 .

O dB m

SPAN

1

0

0 O O O . O O O � %

Figure 2-14. The Source Amplitude Menu

STEP

S I Z E

CLEAR

T

R

I

P

D

D

D

D

D

2-21

Making Measurements

Measurement Set Up

In this case, increasing the source amplitude

10 dB has decreased the noise level in the stopband by the same amount. Noise may be reduced further by using higher source amplitudes and/or selecting a receiver attenuation of 0 dB, as long as the input is not overdriven in the passband.

>

-

20 dBm on input B by pressing:

1. Hardkey INPUT

2. Softkey

B

3. Hardkey MKR -

4. Softkey

MKR-

max, read level in marker info block at top of screen

Change the input definition back to BIR by pressing:

1. Hardkey INPUT

2. Softkey B/R

Select

0 dB attenuation by pressing:

1. Hardkey

2. Softkey

ATTEN

A TTEN B

OdB 20 dB

These steps were taken and the results appear in figure 2-15 for comparison with figure 2-14.

D

D

REF LEvEL

O . D O O dS

I

I

�

1 /

I D I V

1 0 . 0 D O d 8

MARKER

' 0

MAG ( A J R J

-,

O O O . O O O H z

. 5 6 0 d 8

ATTEN R

O d B 2 0 d B

/

/

I \

A T T E N A.

OdB 2 0 dB

\

\

1\

'"

�

A T T E N e

OdB 2 0 dB t MPEO R

500

'MO

I MPED A

500 'MO

......,

.

I MPED B

5 00

1 MO

I

I

C:ENTER

AMPTD

1 0

1 8 7

O . OdBm

5 0 0 . o a O H :;:: SPAN

1 0 0 O O O . O O O H z

C L E A R

T R I P

D

D

D

D

Figure 2-15. Optlmizing Dynamic Range

2-22

Making Measurements

Measurement Set Up

RES SW

1 00 Hz

SWEEP TIME

5

SEC

MEASR CAL

Hardkey in the RECEIVER section used to display the four possible selections for resolution bandwidth. Note that the current selection is 1 kHz.

Softkey used to select a resolution bandwidth of 100 Hz.

Hardkey in the SOURCE section used to select a new sweep time. Any time the resolution bandwidth is reduced, an increase in sweep time may be required.

See OPTIMlZING SWEEP TIME in

Appendix A

Data entry.

Softkey used to select units for the data entry.

Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section used to display a menu listing the

HP 3577 A calibration features.

2-23

Making Measurements

Measurement

Set Up

USER ACTION

RepLace the Device Under Test with a BNC barrel (BNC(t) to BNC(t) adapter) and wait for a compJete sweep.

NORMLlZE Softkey command used to normalize the measurement. When pressed, this softkey stores the active trace in a data register (D 1 for trace one and D2 for trace two) and then redefines the INPUT to be the previous INPUT definition divided by the data register that was just used. Now the INPUT for trace one is

BIR/Dl (press the INPUT hardkey to see it in the ENTRY BLOCK). See figure 2-16.

USER ACTION Replace the BNCbarrel with the bandpass filter.

Now the setup is complete and measurements can be made. Most measurements are made using the

MARKER This small circle may be moved aLong the trace in a number of ways, some of which will be demonstrated in the following steps.

UDF

REF LEVEL

O . D O O d S

I D I V

1 0 . 0 0 0 d B

MARK�R

' 0

MAG ( UDF I

,

.

,

0 0 0 O O O H z

. ': S O d S

NORHL I ZE

I

\ I

NORML I ZE

( SHORT

I

A / R / D 1

,

/!

/

/

\

\

�

"-

�

'-

ONE

FlORT

PART CAL

ONE PORT

'= U l l

CAL l

CENTER ' 0 , . 7

AMPTD O . Od5m

I

5 0 0 . o a o H ;: SP .... N ' 0 0 O O O . O O OH:

Figure 2-16. Nonnalized Bandpass Filter Response

I':" �

2-24

Making Measurements

Bandwidth Measurements


KEY DESCRIPTION

RPG KNOB

Note that the marker dot appears at midscreen. The frequency in the Marker

Information Block should be

70 MHz.

If it is not, turn the knob until it is.

MKR Hardkey in the display format used to display the MARKER menu of softkeys.

ZERO MARKER

Softkey used to turn on the offset marker. This triangle shaped marker will turn on with the same values as the regular marker (in this case, magnitude

& frequency). Note that the marker information block above the graticule now shows OFFSET information. Note that the softkey MKR OFST ON/OFF shows the feature has been turned on. This toggle type softkey may be used to return the marker to normal operation (OFFSET

OFF) by pressing it once.

MARKER

OFFSET

Softkey used to display the magnitude value of the offset marker in the entry block. New values may be entered with the numeric key pad or the current value may be modified with the arrow keys or the knob in the ENTRY mode when this softkey label is active (bright). See figure 2-17.

R.'

·Mar ker·

LEVEL

O . O O D a B changes to ·Offset"

-,

10 1 11

"---

1 0 . 000d6

OI"'FSET O . OOOHz

MAG I UD F l o . a O O d S

M"RKER

PDSN

/

,

I

/

!/

!

/

/

,

I

If

"I

T r e ,

· 1

. 7 >08

\

\

"'''RKEFl

ON OFF

ZERO

,..A"i:I<ER

MKR O"'ST

ON OFF

"-

�'

MARKER

OFI=SET

�

,

FREe

OI'=FSET

MI(R CPl-

ON OFF

CENTER ' 0 " , 5 0 0 . 000H2

AMPTD ° Deem

SPAN ' 0 0 O O O . O O O H :r

Figure 2-17. The Marker Menu

C

D

D

C

C

C

D

C

2-25

2-26

Making Measurements


Description

: ; :to "'�' ; :: : : : : � : �

�

� : ;' :� :� i:: ;�::: :�� : ::�:� : ' :�:';:; : � !: \ : :: :

: t,' t': : :;

·::::::�:�:;:ii;:�i::::i�:�:;:�:�:::��::::�:i:::.�.:.:r::r;:;:�:;;::::::::�::;::::Y;�:��::::��:::�:::i::::::i::::::�:�:�::.::::;,;; :::::::::::�::;�;;:��:;:m:�:�:;;�:::;;:::;':;<)�·�:::m·

FREQ OFFSET Softkey used to display the frequency value of the offset marker in the entry block. New values may be entered with the numeric key pad or the current value may be modified with the arrow keys or the knob in the ENfRY mode when this softkey label is bright.

SAVE Hardkey in the INSTR

STATE menu.

UMENT

STATE section used to display the SA YE

SAVE REG 1

MKR ...

MARKER

SEARCH

- 6 0

Softkey used to save the current instrument state in the first of five registers.

This state

will

be recalled to begin another measurement later in this exercise.

Hardkey

in

the DISPLAY FORMAT section used to make data entries using the position of the marker. Also, '" MAX,

...

MIN and MARKER SEARCH will move the marker to points of interest on the active trace:

Softkey that displays a second-level menu of softkeys used to search for specific values. Note that MARKER TARGET is active.

Data entry

dB

MKR

...

L TARG

Softkey used to select units for MARKER TARGET.

Softkey used to search left for the user defined marker target value.

See figure 2-18.

Offset

Marker

Measur ement Marker

REF LEVEL a . aCOdB

,

1 0 1 '0'

1 0 . aOOdS

O�FSET . , 0 OOO . O O O H z

MAG I UD"' ) . 5 9 . e9SdB

1" 'I

T r e e:

OR><

- 6 0 .

,

,

0 0 .

\

\

L

�

/

L

I"'lKR ..

� T AIII:Ci

MKR ...

L TARG

MARKER

TARGET

"-

,

�

.........

"""

-

D I SCRETE i

I

�§

C�NTER 10 � 8 7 s a O . OOOH:

AMPTO O . OdS ...

SPAN 1 0 0 O O O . OOOHZ

RETURN

Figure 2-18. Marker Search

Making Measurements


MKR

ZERO

MARKER


Softkey: moves the offset marker to the new marker position. This is in preparation for another marker search for a magnitude equal to the level at this marker position. The result will be the offset frequency (between the two markers).


Softkey described previously

MKR ..

MARKER

SEARCH

Data entry for a new marker target value. o dB


MKR ..

R TARG

Softkey used to search right for the user defined marker target value. The offset reading in the marker block is the

60 dB bandwidth for this bandpass filter. See figure 2-19.

HKR �

R

TARG

REF

LEVEL

O . O O O d B

I D I V

1 0 .

D Q O d B

OFFSET

63 500 .

ODOH::

MAG I UOF= J

· 0 .

0 2 7 dB

/ \

T r o. c:

1

T . • 0."

0 , 0 0 d B

! i

I

,

//r

I

/

I

! i /

/

(ENTER

1 0

1 8 7 s a C . O O O H .;:

AHPTD O . OdSIT'. i

I

SPAN

\

\

I'-

'

""

�

"-..

1 0 0 O O O . O O O H ::

Figure 2-19. 60 dB Bandwidth

MKR ...

L T.ARG

MARKER

TARCiET

RETURN

�

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

2·27

Making Measurements


MKR ..

MARKER

SEARCH o dB

MKR ...

R TARG

RECALL

RECALL

REG 1

MKR ..

MARKER

SEARCH

MKR ..

L TARG

MKR

ZERO

MARKER

Hardkey in the INSTR UMENT STATE section used to display a new menu.

Softkey used to RECALL instrument state saved in register 1.


Hardkey described previously. Note that the target value has returned to

-

3.000 dB as shown in the data entry block.

Softkey used to search left for the marker target value.


Softkey used to move the offset marker to regular marker.


Softkey described previously.

Data entry.


Softkey: searches right for target value. The OFFSET information above the graticule contains the

-

3 dB bandwidth for this filter. See figure

2-20.

Shape factor may now be calculated.

.

,

2-28

Making Measurements


RE� L E V E L

O . DOOdS

I Q I V

1 0 . 00 0 0 &

OFFSET 1 3 7 S 0 . 0 0 0 M z

"1AG c UOI= I

- O . ' 90 d B

MKR ..

R TA.RG a , oordS

\

\

Mt<� ..

;". TARG

/

I

If t

MARKER

TARGET

�O f========-o.O

/

/

�

C E N T E � 1 0 1 6 7

A M P T D Q , O d B m

S O O . O O O M Z

SPAN 1 0 0

O O O . O O O H z

Figure 2-20. 3 dB Bandwidth

RETURN

-J o

F===-==O

Shape Factor

=

- 60 dB BW

3 dBBW

=

63.500

13,750

-

4.62

2-29

Making Measurements

Passband Ripple

Passband Ripple

The next measurement is pass band ripple. To make this measurement ALTERNATE SWEEP will be employed to retain the frequency span given to trace one while viewing a narrower span with trace two. When ALTERNATE SWEEP TYPE is selected, trace two starts out with preset values.

This means another measurement set up is required for trace two, as follows:

KEY DESCRIPTION

SWEEP TYPE

ALTERNTE

SWEEP

TRACE

INPUT

B/R

2

DISPLY FCTN

LOG MAG

AMPTD

Hardkey in the SOURCE section used to display the menu of softkeys which select the type of sweep.

Softkey used to select alternate sweep. This feature allows each trace to have different values for start

& stop or center

& span frequencies, amplitude, sweep time, and resolution bandwidth.

Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section used to select trace two as the active trace.


Softkey used to select

B/R as the input definition for the active trace. Note the warning message on the screen that this trace is off. Next we'll turn it on in the

DISPLAY FUNCTION menu.

Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section used to select the DISPLAY

FUNCTION of the active trace. Note that OFF is bright in the menu, indicating that trace two is off.

Softkey used to select

LOG MAGNITUDE as the display function for trace two, effectively turning the trace on. All parameters for trace two revert to default parameters including AMPTD

=

-

10 dBm. Since AMPTD

=

0 dBm for trace one, the HP 3577 A will change the amplitude OUTPUT level at the beginning of each sweep. Note clicking of attenuator relays. The HP 3577 A uses relays in the output attenuator circuit to set the output amplitude. If left running in a state that switches these relays regularly, the instrument will time out and switch to SINGLE SWEEP MODE after five minutes to reduce relay wear. See

SWEEP MODE, SINGLE in the REFERENCE section.

Hardkey in the SOURCE section. o

Data entry.

2·30

Making Measurements

Passband Ripple dBm

Softkey selection of units for the data entry. The clicking of the output attenuator relays will stop when the amplitudes of the two traces are set equal.

FREQ

Hardkey in the SOURCE section.

CENTER FREQ

Softkey used to select the center frequency parameter for data entry.

7 0

MHz

FREQ SPAN

Data entry.


7

•

3 2 5 kHz

SCALE

Softkey used to select the frequency span parameter for data entry.

Data entry that is the center portion of the

-

3 dB bandwidth.


Hardkey in the DrSPLA Y FORMAT section. Wait until trace two has completed a full sweep before pressing the AUTOSCALE softkey.

AUTO SCALE Softkey. AUTOSCALE will evaluate the values in all bins of the active trace to determine the new scale. When the SWEEP TYPE is ALTERNATE, these values are not updated until the next sweep of the trace.

If a change is made that requires rescaling (and you choose to AUTOSCALE again), wait for the sweep to finish before pressing the

AUTOSCALE softkey. The trace on the screen will be updated on the sweep following the AUTOSCALE command.

SWEEP TYPE


SWP DIR

UP DOWN

Softkey used to change the sweep direction for the active trace. This is a push-push toggle softkey. In this instance, selection of a different sweep direction is used only to demonstrate the use of the feature. See SWEEP

DIRECTION listed under SWEEP TYPE in the REFERENCE section.

Now the measurement set up for the second trace is complete. Note that this extra set up is required only when alternate sweep is used. The following key presses will make the bandpass ripple measurement.

2-31

2-32

Making Measurements

Passband Ripple

MKR ..

MKR .. MAX

MKR

ZERO

MARKER

MKR ..

Hardkey in the DISPLAY

FORMAT section.

Softkey used to move the marker to the point on the trace that has the largest value.


FORMAT section.

Softkey used to move the

OFFSET MARKER

(change the values of its position parameters) to tbe same position as the regular marker.


FORMAT

section.

MKR .. MIN

Trace 2 is Passband

,

Soft key used to move the marker to the point on the trace that has the smallest value. The magnitude information in the

MARKER

Block for trace two is now indicating the measured passband ripple for this filter.

REF LEVEL

O . O o o e e

- 1 . 5 0 0 d e

,

V

A

/"

/

/

ID I V

1 0 . 00 0 1;1 9

C . l 0 0 d S

'"

,

/

MARKER

MAG C UO F )

,

.

1 8 6 O O O . OOOHz I'1KR ...

- 1 . ' 1 1de REF L.VL

O,."'SET �

M A C H . / F O

" 6 1 . 06',",:1:

- O . J 7 'i1 eo B

MKR: ..

STA.R';

"

,

(

'\

1 \ V

,./'

......

X

"

"-.

"

'--..

MKR ...

STOP

(

MKR -

ENTER

MKR 01=5-:'"

... SPAN

MI<R:

MAX

�

, MKR ...

M , "

MARI(ER

SEARCH

!

I

D

I j

I rb

I

CENTER 1 0 l e ' 50C OOOH%

CENTER 1 0 1 & 7 5 0 0 O O O H Z

SPAN 1 0 0 D O O . DOOHz

S P A N 1 J 2 5 . 000Hz

Figure 2-21. Passband Ripple

Making Measurements

Passband Insenlon Phase


The next measurement will be phase in the passband. To do this the sweep type will be returned to linear (the default type) so that the frequency span of trace two is the same as that of trace one.

KEY

SWEEP TYPE

DESCRIPTION

Hardkey

in

the SOURCE section.

UN FREQ

SWEEP

Softkey used to select linear frequency sweep.

INPUT

COPY

Trc 1

..

2

M KR

MKR OFST

ON OFF

DISPLY FCTN

PHASE


Softkey used to copy the INPUT definition for trace one into trace two. This normalizes trace two.

Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section

Softkey used to toggle the MARKER OFFSET OFF for the active trace (which should be trace two). The same can be done for trace one after the TRACE 1 hardkey is pressed.

Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section which displays a menu of softkeys used to select the

DISPLAY FUNCTION

of the active trace (indicated by the

LED over the

TRACE

2 key).

Softkey used to select PHASE as the DISPLAY FUNCTION for the active trace. Selection of any softkey in this menu (other than off) turns trace

two on.

2-33

Making Measurements


Description

X:<?5: :;:,� ' ,: : ,;: : ;

:,:� �:::�

: ��· � ::S :: : .

�� :;;< :r :: : �

: : : ::::: : : : : :: ':< y:'

�

F : � ' :��: � : � : : :� : ':: � : : ;:; :� � : : :: : :

:;·:·:':;:: 1��::;.�·�·;/�::::::":::::::::·::�::::�:�.t��;;;.��:t�:1;;:.:=;�:� :::�?:r;::t�:;�:;:�@;.��:�::::;:gH;�';:�z:��;;;:�n�w

RPG KNOB

Moving the marker (with the knob) allows phase measurements to be made at any point on the trace. Data may be read from the marker block for trace

two.

The vertical parts of the trace represent

360"

phase wraps. Since the

HP

3577

A

stores data in complex form,

:!:

180" is

the range these values may have when interpreted as phase information. Note that trace

two will

be noisy in the same area as trace one, due to extremely low signal levels. See figure

2-22.

REF LEVEL

0

. D OOdS

0

. O d R ;

ID I

V

' 0

, 0 0 0 0 8

" . O O O c . �

MARKER 1 0 1 9 � S O O . O O O H �

MA(j I UD F l

MARKER

' 0

F'HASE I uQI= I

(

,

- ':' . 5 9 7 d 8

' 9 4

5 0 0 . 0 0 0 "'" 2:

1 7 " . b 8 L o e g

/'

I1

/

/ \,

\ l\

/

/ � . 1 \

\

\

"'"

�

"cOO

MAO c ' N

MAO

PMA.SE

POLAR

REAL

I MAO

DELAY

CENTER

' 0

1 6 7

AMPTO a . D d e m

5 0 0 . 0 0 01-1% SPAN

1 0 0

0 0 0 . 0 0 0 1-! %

OFF

Figure 2-22. Bandpass Filter Magnitude & Phase Response

2·34

Making Measurements

Group Delay

Group Delay

The next measurement is group delay. The DISPLAY FUNCTION menu should still be displayed.

!5�,x"",,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,·;,,,'};;,

DELAY Softkey used to select group delay as the display function. Note that the softkey labeled DELAY changes to DELAY APERTURE.

SCALE

AUTO SCALE

DISPLY FCTN

DELAY

APERTURE

2 %

OF SPAN

Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMA

T section.

Softkey used to set the SCALE parameters such that the trace appears as large as possible without clipping the upper and lower boundaries of the graticule.

Hardkey used to recall the menu containing DELAY APERTURE.

Softkey used to display the menu of selections for group delay aperture (the change in frequency over which the change in phase is measured).

Softkey used to select a different delay aperture. DELAY APERTURE information (shown below the graticule) changes when different percent-of-span selections are made. The DELAY APER information will appear only when the trace whose display function is DELAY is selected. See figure

2-23.

2-35

Making Measurements

Group Delay

REF

LEvEL a . D O O d B

4 0 . 0 0 0�SE[

/

I D I V

"' O . D O O d B

MARKER 7 0 o � � 0 0 0 D O Q H Z

MAG ( uOF )

- 3 . 1 4 3dB

2 0 . 0 0 0 � S E C MARKER 7 0 0 1 4 O O O . D O O H z

O E L A Y I U O F I 1 0 8

5 1 )..1SEC

/

I

/

/

I \

fI

\

\

/

I

fo,

\

\

/

V

./

"--

"-

""

�

� i

I

(ENTER

7 0 0 0 0 O O O . O D O H z

AMF"TO 0 OdBm

SPAN

1 0 0

O O O . O O OH z

D E L. A Y A P E R 2 O Q O k H z

. 5%

OF S P A N

1 %

OF S P A N

2 %

O F SPAN

,, %

O F SPAN

8%

OF SPAN

1 6%

OF SFiAN

RETURN

FIgure 2-23. Bendpasl Magnitude end Group Deley

Group Delay

Tg

=

11.<1>

360 x Xf where II.f

=

Delay

Apenure

2-36

Making Measurements

AmpiHier

Amplifier

Gain Compression

Connect the amplifier to the HP 3577 A Network Aoalyzer as shown in figure 2-24. The receiver inputs will begin to overload when the input signal level is

2:

=

0.0 dBm with receiver attenuation

20 dB (overload also occurs at input signal levels

2: -

20 dBm with receiver attenuation

=

0 dB).

The amplifier used in this example has a gain of approximately 30 dB so 30 dB of attenuation was added to the circuit between the amplifier and the receiver input.

(Ji) -

_a_ p=

[0] c-

'--

@

I

I

0

0

I 0 0 0 0

1 0 0 0 0

0000

0000

I F= ==-: .

IQl

0

I

0 0 0 0

)�O

0 0 0 0 ro:oo5Jl

ICJ�CJ.o11

«�

0

�

0 0

�

�

�

�

AMP

Figure 2-24.

J

30 dB

ATEN

2-37

Making Measurements

Amplifier

�;:¥ ::::: : ; % }� , � : �% .

�: �:: :: :::.: .

: .

�::��g��;��e��::�-::�:�:�:�$:;:;r::tt::*i:::::�;�:;}��t�:;;f:�:�:m�Z::F%N:;:+:::::��:�:;�:WM:V��:%�:::�:�(::�:;:�:�rn:;:m;��:�:,:::::;:��:�::r;:::::::

::;::";::;,.':�r::

INSTR

PRESET

Hardkey in the INSTRUMENT STATE section that resets parameters to their initial values.

SWEEP TYPE Hardkey in the SOURCE section.

AMPTD SWEEP

under the graticule. The start amplitude is

-

40 dBm, the stop amplitude is

0.0 dBm, and the source frequency is 100

MHz.

Note

"

This feature will time out (change to

SINGLE

in the

SWEEP MODE menu) after five minutes of continuous sweeping to extend the life of the switching relays in the output of the

HP 3577 A

Single sweeps may be triggered with the

TRIG/RESET hardkey or

CONTINUOUS

sweep may be selected for another five minutes.

The plot shown in figure 2-25 is output level versus input level. Note that gain compression causes the trace to level out. To display gain compression (input versus gain) we will nonnalize.

Normalization stores a measurement taken with a BNC barrel in place of the amplifier and then redefines the INPUT to be the old input definition divided by the stored trace. This makes the trace gain versus input.

MEASR CAL Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section.

USER ACTION

' Replace .the amplifier with a BNCbarrel, lInd �itfor a fullsweep.

NORMLlZE

Softkey used to nonnalize the measurement.

USER ACTION

SCALE

USER ACTION

AUTO SCALE

ReplacetheBNC barrel with the amplifi.er.


Wait for Sweep to complete


2-38

REF L E V E L

- 5 . 0 D OdBm

Input

=

R i D I II

'�MARKER

1 5 . O I:! B m

5 0 0 0 d8

MAG I R I

_ ' 3 . 2 2 4 d B m

,

'- I N

FREQ

SWEEP

ALTERNTE

S .... EEP

�

LOG FREO

SWEEP

,

!

V

!

----

---

I------

,

AMPTD

SWEEP

.�

C w

I

I

ST ART - 1 0 . Od6",

F R E a

1 0 0 0 0 0

OOO . OODHz

STOP 1 5 . 0 d B m

SWP D I R

UP DOWN

Figure 2-25. Amplitude Sweep of an Amplifier

Making Measurements

Amplifier

I i

2·39

Making Measurements

Amplifier

Now the trace is amplifier input vs gain. The gain is constant where the trace is level and is in compression where the trace rolls off. Next we'll use the marker to search for the

3 dB compression point.

MKR ...

Description

:�?;:i(',��::A�t"ll�:��:i�,�0':;::'{::�:i:>':�::<:':�1:V.w��::�::%"1'i�<:Z:;::;:��;(:i��':::�:::�::::::::;::%%;.z��tW�:;W:'\�:��i�:i-:n��<*:;;�:�:::��:z:::��:::n<::��;;;:�:�:�·.::�:�'�:


MKR ... MAX Softkey used to move the marker to the point on the trace with the largest gain value.

MKR

ZERO

MARKER

Hardkey in the OrSPLA Y FORMAT section.

Softkey used to turn the offset marker on at the position of the regular marker.

MKR ...

MARKER

SEARCH

MKR ...

R TARG

MKR

MKR OFST

ON OFF


Softkey used to display the target value is

-

3 dB.

MARKER SEARCH

menu. Note that the marker

Softkey used to search right for target. The marker information block now contains the span over which the amplifier has a gain compression of

-

See figure

2-26.

3

dB.


Softkey used to turn the offset marker off. The marker information block will change from

OFFSET to

MARKER information. The

MARKER magnitude is the input level at which the amplifier has a gain compression of

3

dB. See figure

2-27.

2-40

Making Measurements

AmplHier

Compression Range

UJF

=

R/D1

-

0

.

5 0 0

06 I D I V

1 D O D a B

OFFSET

1 2 . 3 d B

MAG I UDF ) - 3 005e8

T

D e i!

M

�

I

. 000 •

;�

T

;

'"

T

'

",

I

MKR ...

R TARG

MKR ...

L TARG

MARKER

T.6,RGET

I

START - 1 0 . 0d8m

FREO 1 0 0 0 0 0 O O O . O O O H Z

STOP l S . 0dBm

RETURN

Figure 2·26. Gain Compression of an Amplifier

REF LEVEL

- 6 . 5 0 0 d 8

I D l Y

1 . D O D d B

,

I

I i

MARKER 6 . 8dBI'II

MAC> ( UDF )

- 6 . 20ScB

;

MARKER

POSN

,

T:�C:

[Co ' "

F:::::

�

MARKER

ON OFF

ZERO

MARKER

�

�

MKR OFST

ON OFF

MARKER

OFFSET

1

,

AMF"TO

OFFSET

MKR cpe

ON OFF

START - 1 0 . DC8m

FREO 1 0 0 000 000 O O Q H Z

5,OP 1 5 . 0 0Brn

Figure 2·27. 3 dB Compression Level

This test may be run again at other frequencies for more thorough testing of the amplifier.

I

Ii

2-41

Making Measurements

Low Pass

Filter

Low Pass Filter

Connect the HP 35677 NB S-Parameter Test Set to the HP 3577 A Network Analyzer and connect the low pass filter to be tested to the HP 35677 NB as shown in figure 2-28. The low pass filter used in this example has a

-

3 dB frequency of 50 MHz, but the methods used to measure its characteristics are the same for any low pass filter.

The HP 35677 NB is a convenient accessory for making ratio measurements of transmission and reflection scattering parameters. The test set has two configurations: FORWARD and

REVERSE, indicated by two LEDs on the upper left corner of the front panel. This configuration is controlled through the HP 3577 A Network Analyzer by defming the INPUT. Figure

2-29 shows the test set block diagram for each configuration.

.. -

r

D

""

:r::r:

=f:

L.

(0

�

Fronl Po".. CO/'J'lIIClIIIf'IS 141 rg

�

•

1Ql

•

.

[OoOCjJ

•

1661

I oo0

000

0000

�

'

)

00� 0000

�

8

0000

Q � o . .

.

.

)

I

-

-

Figure 2-28. HP 3577A to HP 35677A/B Connections

®

•

-

0

-

2-42

FORWARD

PORT

1

91A$

2 i

, ...,� .rr:

I

I i

I

11

[iJr

,r;: f-----c-

L tiJ

U

I�T i;' �

PORT 2 PORT

1

8 i

I

I

Making Measurements

Low Pass

Filter

PORT

1

!

91AS

2

I

I

I

,

I

I

I

'"

1"'1 rv:-'�

1

I

! i

[[J [

�

.

,r;::

U

PORT 1 PORT 2

INP u T

U

R

I

�

B

I

!

S11-A/R

S21-B/R

REVERSE

Figure 2-29. HP 356nA\B COnfigurations

S12·A/R

S 2 2·8/R

The purpose of this measurement exercise is to demonstrate the use of the HP 35677

A/B

S-Parameter Test Set and the HP 3577 A Network Analyzer to characterize a low pass filter. The general organization is:

I.

Set up the measurement

2. Measure the insertion loss

3.

Measure the insertion phase

4.

Measure the passband ripple

5. Measure the stop band rejection

2-43

2-44

Making Measurements

Measurement Set-up

Measurement Set-up

,��,I";f!'i'ii"'i'" "";;';'"

INSTR

PRESET

Hardkey in the INSTR UMENT STATE that presets the HP 3577 A parameters to their default values. When the HP 35677 A/B S-Parameter Test Set is connected to the

HP 3577

A via the rear panel cable,

INSTR PRESET parameters differ as follows:

START FREO

SOURCE AMPLITUDE

INPUT

(both traces)

LENGTH B

100 kHz

+15 dBm

S21

(same as

B/R)

1 .3 meters

INSTRUMENT PRESET always displays the INPUT menu. Note that S21 is bright in the menu. This indicates that it is the active INPUT definition of the selected trace. Also note the entry block showing that the input is B/R. This indicates that SZl is the same as B/R with the test set in the FORWARD configuration. See figure 2-30.

SWEEP TYPE

Hardkey in the SOURCE section

LOG FREQ

SWEEP

Softkey that selects a logarithmic frequency sweep. Note that the screen includes frequency annotation shown across the bottom of the graticule. See figure 2-31.

\

_

REF L E V E L

O . D O O d S

I

I

I

, i

I D I V

1 0 . 0 0 0 d B

S 1 1

M A R K E R 1 0 0 0 5 0 O O O . O O O H z

MAG ( S 2 1 ) - 2 0 3 9 9 d S h __

'.

I�

T r ee

,

; l NP

" S I R

'----

-

�

\ /

I�

1\

! i

5 2 2

DATA

R E O

U S E R D E F

I NP U T

i

I

O P

2 0 __

__ 0_

I

0 0 ,

__

C O p y

2

5 2 '

5 1 2

, f---O

�O

, 0

0

I

r--o

0

Figure 2-30. S-Parameter Input Menu

Note

"

Making Measurements

Measurement Set-up

If you need to change the

FREQ or

AMPTD parameters to get the correct measurement set up, do so at this point. Only two data entry parameters exist in the

FREQUENCY menu when the

SWEEP TYPE is

LOG FREQ: START

and

STOP

FREQ. (FULL

SWEEP is an immediate execution command; not data entry).

MEASR CAL

USER ACTION

Hardkey in the

DISPLAY

FORMAT section used to display the

MEASUREMENT CAUBRATlON menu, which includes the softkey,

NORMUZE.

Replace the de.nce under test with a BNC "barrel" (BNC(f) to BNC(f) adapter). Be.sure to wait until the . next sweep is complete before executing the next step.

NORMUZE

I

I

I

!

I

REF LEv£L

0 . 0 0 0 0 8 l O O K

START

,

1 0 0

,

!

Soft key used to normalize the measurement.

The HP 3577 A does this by storing the trace with the barrel and redefining the

INPUT to be the previous defmition divided by the stored trace (in this case B!R/Dl).

I O I V

1 0 . 0 0 0 d B

MARKER

MAG ( $2 ' )

,

472

1 3 6 . 0 0 0 H Z

- 3 . 7 !:o 5 0 B

L I N FREO

SWEEP

I

I1

,

, l M

O O O . O O O H Z

I

' O M

STOP

2 0 0

I

I

I

,

I

1\

L O G

FREe

SWEEP

/

AMPTO

SWEEP

1 0 0M

0 0 0 O O O . O O O "' z

ALTERNTE

SwEEP c w

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

Figure

2-31. Log Frequency Sweep Type

2-45

Making Measurements

Insertion Loss

Insertion Loss

USER ACTION Replace the BNC barrel with the filter to be tested.

RPG KNOB

!

,

The marker may be moved to any part of the trace with the knob (must be in

MARKER mode) to measure insertion loss. See figure 2-32.

R E F L E V E L a . O O O dB

I D I V

1 0 D O O d S

MARKER

,

MAG ( UDF )

9 4 6

S 1 2 , 7 3 b1-lZ

- 3 . S 0 3 d B

I

,

!

I i

I

;

NQRM L I ZE

NORML I ZE

( SHORT 1

!

ONE PORT

PART C A L \

/

ONE PORT

FULL CAL

D

D

D

D

1 0 0K

START ' 0 0 i ;

' M

0 0 0 . o a O H ::

' OM

STOP 2 0 0

1 0 01'1

0 0 0 O O O . O O O H z

Figure 2-32. Measurement CalibratiOn Menu

D

D

2-46

Making Measurements

Insertion Phase

Insertion Phase

DISPLY FCTN

TRACE 2

PHASE

Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section

Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section that redefines the menu displayed to operate on trace two. Note that the trace is off.

Softkey used to turn on trace two and define it to be phase information.

Note that the trace appears immediately. No new data need be collected (no sweep is required) for trace two to be displayed as

PHASE.

Note the vertical parts of the phase trace. This jump of 360", from

-

180' to

+

180", is called a phase wrap.

SCALE Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section. Note that REF LEVEL is bright in the menu. Reference level is the measured signal level represented by the dashed line. For PHASE, this line will appear at midscreen. (It may be moved up or down by changing the value of REF POSN). Next, the knob will be used to redefine the value of REF

LEVEL

- 0

""'"

. o

Press the unlabeled key above the knob. This key press should put the knob in

ENTRY mode, so that it may be used to modify the value of the active data entry softkey in the menu.

Turn the knob counterclockwise. The trace moves toward the top of the graticule and the value of REF LEVEL in the ENTRY BLOCK and above the upper left corner of the graticule changes.

Mognltude Response

Phose Re sponse

I'tEF I...EVe,-

. i

I

I D I V

1 i

(I. (lOOdS

I i

,

00

,

' M

START I Q C 000 (lOOHZ

I

I

I

H"R�eR I 9�6 5

HAGIVOF)

1 2 .

7)6":

- :!I . S09d8

MARKER 1 9'6 5 1 2 7J6H

P'"1 "' S E I S 2 1 I 1 0 . J79C1.g

,

_

,

, ..

_

'7 1

"

. .

0

\

,

I

;

!

,

OM l O O M

STOP 200 000 O O O . OOOHt

"UTQ

SC"LE

•••

L.EVEL

I 01 V

REF POSN

Ae� L I NE

ON QF<=

f---O f==-O o f---O

o

, 0

Figure 2·33. Low PaBs Filter Log Magnitude and Phase Response hO o

247

M a king Measurements

Pass band Ripple

Passband Ripple

DISPLY FCTN

OFF

TRACE

MKR ..

1

MARKER

SEARCH

MKR ..

R TARG

RETURN

MKR .. STOP

INPUT

S21

SCALE


Softkey in the

DSPLY FCTN menu used to turn the active trace (which should still be trace two) off.



Softkey that displays a second menu used to make marker searches. Note that

MARKER TARGET is active and that its default value shown in the ENTRY

BLOCK is

-

3 dB.

Softkey used to search right for the MARKER TARGET value. Note the new value of magnitude for the marker. If no such value had been found the marker would not have moved and the screen message "TARGET VALUE NOT

FOUND" would appear.

Softkey used to move back to the primary menu. Note that the

MKR

.. hardkey could have been used to display the same menu.

Softkey used to redefine the STOP FREQ as the present marker position

(frequency). Note that the graticule is redrawn and that the frequency annotation changes to match the new sweep. Note: this change

in

frequency requires renormalization or changing the INPUT definition back to BIR.


Softkey used to define S-parameter. This step changes the INPUT definition from B/R/Dl to BIR. Since the frequency span has been changed, D l should not be used in the definition until the measurement is re-normalized.


2-48

AUTO SCALE

ENTRY OFF

_ e

o

Making Measurements

Passband Ripple

Softkey. The trace displayed is of the pass band. Note the change in the

/DIY value in the upper left-hand corner of the screen. See figure 2-34.

Hardkey in the DATA ENTRY section that clears the screen of the ENTRY

BLOCK and the menu. This key may be used to disable data entry so that unintentional rotation of the knob

(in

ENTRY mode) does not modify a parameter.

The marker may be used to measure the passband ripple. The knob must be in

MARKER mode for it to be used to move the marker (see the LEDs above the knob). Note that the "up" and "down" arrow keys may also be used to move the marker (if you press

MKR hardkey and MARKER POSN softkey).

REF LEVEL

- 3 . 5 0 DdB

I D I V o . S O O dB

MARKER 4 0 8 5 0 B 2 9 . 0 D O H %

MAG ( S 2 1 ) · 5 . 6 8 S d B

, .

AUTO

S C A L E

"-

\

REF

L.EVEL

I D I V

\

REF POSN

REF L I NE

ON OFF

I

COpy

SCL 2- 1

,

1 0 0 K

START 1 0 0

! i

1 M

0 0 0 o a O H ,

1 0 M

STOP 4 0 8 5 0 6 2 9 . 000Hz

Figure 2-34. Low Pass Filter Pass Band Ripple

D

D

D

D

2-49

Making Measurements

Amplifier S-Parameters

Stopband Rejection

FREQ

STOP FREQ

2 0 0

MHz

MKR -

MARKER

SEARCH


Softkey used to select stop frequency as the parameter for data entry.

Data entry_

Softkey used to select units for data entry.


Softkey. Note that the target value is - 3 dB.

MKR

L TARG

RETURN

MKR

START

SCALE

AUTO SCALE

MKR -

MKR - MIN

RPG KNOB

Softkey used to move the marker left to the - 3 dB point. This point will be used as the start frequency for sweeping the stopband.

Softkey used to return to the primary menu.

Softkey used to redefine the start frequency as the frequency of the present marker position. Note that the graticule frequency scale changed from log to linear. This will occur any time STOP FREQ divided by START FREQ is

:$

4.


Softkey used to let the HP 3577 A select the SCALE parameters for the graticule.



The trace on the screen in figure 2-35 is the stop band. Rejection may be measured at any point by moving the marker to the point of interest and reading the value in the marker information block.

2-50

Making Measurements


RE::: LEVEL

O . OOO.:JB

I D I V

1 0 .

0 0 U d B

START 5 1 056 5 7 S . aOOHz

MARKER ' 1 " 7

MAG I S 2 1 1 l e t. 75a

SOOH;:

· S 7 .

B 7 S a S

T r a e

1

PC,SN

I---�

I

..

" .

i\

/

MKR

REF L V

-'0

L

MKR

-;!>

START

MKR -+

STOP

MKR QFST

-+

SPAN

MKR -

MAX

MKR ....,

M I N

MARKER

SEARCH i i

1

1

F=

F= p,=

.

r

I

0

O o i

I

STOP 2 0 0 0 0 0 O O O . OOOHz

Figure 2-35. Low Pass Filter Stop Band Rejection

2-51

2-52

Making Measurements



Connect the amplifier to the

HP

35677A!B as shown in figure

2-36_

·Fifteen volt power to the amplifier is supplied by an external power supply_ The amplifier used in this example has a gain rating of +

15 dBfrom

0.5

MHz to

100 MRz- The methods used here may be used to test amplifiers with different specifications_

The purpose of this measurement exercise is to demonstrate the use of the HP

Analyzer and the HP

3577

A Network

35677A!B

S-Parameter Test Set to characterize the scattering parameters of an RF amplifier. The organization of the exercise is:

1.

Initial measurement set up

2.

Measure S21 ' forward gain and phase

3.

Measure S12 ' reverse loss

4. Measure Sl1 ' input return loss

5.

Measure S22 ' output reflection coefficient

6.

Conversion of reflection coef. to complex impedance

= -

[]

«�

I:I

J

1

AMP c::

I

L

(6 c:=J

D O D O

� � c:=J D O

0 c:=J D O D O

D O D O

F=

OOOOIQl

0000

==;

0

/0600]

D D r:J D

0000

0 0

0

@

�

�

�

0

0

•

• 4) 4) l

« �

�� «

0

=

I

Figure

2-36

-.. �

Making Measurements


Measurement Setup

INSTR

PRESET

Note

Hardkey in the INSTR

UMENT

STATE section used to reset all parameters to their default values. The menu displayed on the screen is the INPUT menu.

Note that the default INPUT definition is S21 (B/R & test set FOR

W

ARD) when the HP 35677 NB S-Parameter Test Set is connected to the HP 3577 A

Network Analyzer.

If the amplifier was on when INSTR PRESET was pressed, one or more of the receiver inputs may have tripped or been overloaded. A receiver "trip" is when the receiver input switches to lMO to protect itself from high input signal leveIs. This switch occurs for signals

�

1.1 Vpt .

The screen message:

INPUT X TRPPEP (X=R,A, or B)

Clear trip on

ATIEN

menu_ appears, listing the input(s) tripped and directing the user to the ATTEN hardkey to clear the condition. Note that the impedance softkeys in the ATTEN menu will not reflect the tripped condition. Clear the trip with the

CLEAR TRIP

softkey after the value of AMPTD is changed.

FREQ

5 0

MHz

AMPTD o dBm

ATTEN

CLEAR TRIP

Hardkey in the SOURCE section. Note that START FREQ is selected (ready for data entry).

Data entry.

Softkey selection of units for the data entry.


Data entry.


Hardkey in the RECEIVER section.

Softkey used to reset a tripped receiver input.

If no inputs were tripped, display message = NO INPlITS ARE TRIPPED.

2-53

Making Measurements


MEASR CAL

USER ACTION

Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section used to display the

MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION menu.

Replace the amplifier with a BNC barrel and wait for one complete sweep.

NORMLlZE

USER ACTION

Softkey used to normalize the measurement. This stores a trace in data register D l and redefines the INPUT to be the old definition divided by the stored trace. If trace two had been active, the store would have been to D2 If you press the INPUT hardkey you can see in the entry block that the INPUT definition is BlRJDl. Also note that the marker block has changed from MAG(S21) to MAG(UDF); UDF is the abbreviation for "user defmed function."

Replace the BNC barrel with the amplifier.

SCALE

REF POSN

8 0

%

REF LEVEL

1 5 dB

/DIV

5 dB

Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section so change in reference position, reference level, and scale resolution (/DIY) can be made.

Softkey used to select REFERENCE POSITION for data entry.

Data entry with the numeric key pad.

Softkey selection of units. Note that the dashed line moved from the top of the graticule down to the eighth division from the bottom.

Softkey used to select REFERENCE LEVEL for data entry.

Data entry.


Softkey used to prefIX a data entry for the graticule scale.

Data entry.


2-54

Making Measurements

Amp l ifi e r S

-

Pa ra m e te rs

Key

,-;---,,-,;,:,,:;:::;::-:::;:::::::-:,:::,::

:

,

�

:

;

:

;

... : . ..

..

Now trace one is completely set up. Next, trace two will be turned and setup for phase information and set it up.

DISPLY FeTN Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section.

TRACE 2

PHASE


Softkey used to turn trace two on and make it phase information.

INPUT

COPY

Trc 1

-

2

SCALE

AUTO SCALE


Softkey used to copy the INPUT definition for trace one into trace two. Note that the ENTRY BLOCK shows trace two INPUT to be

B/RJDl.

This equation was created when trace one was normalized. This copying of INPUT defmition normalizes trace two.


FORMAT section.

Softkey previously described. See figure 2-37.

M a g n i t u d e

P h a s e

REF L E V E L l S . 0 0 0 d B

- 6 0 . 0 0 0 d e �

I D l Y

5 . 0 0 0 d B

' 0 O O O d '! 9

MARKER

MAG ( UDF r :

'

HARK !::R

;? 3 3 d B

1 25 0 0 0 0 0 0 O O O H z

PHASE I UDF I - 6 1 . 3 54deg i

,

"

,

I

,

,

� i

�

�

�

'-

,

S

TAR

7

5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O O O H z

AMPTD O . O d B m

"

!

STOP 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 . O DOHz

AUTO

S C A L E

REF

LEVEL

I D I V

R E F

PQSN

REF L I NE

ON OFF

COI"Y

SCL '-2

PHASE

SLOPE

P H SL OPE

ON OFF

Figure 2-37. RF Amplifier Magnitude and Phase of S21

2-55

Making Measurements


521 '

Forward Gain and Phase

The display as shown in figure

2-37 is the forward gain and phase of the amplifier under test.

The markers may be used to make exact measurements at points along the traces and to make offset measurements.

MKR

MKR CPL

ON OFF

RPG KNOB

TRACE 1

MKR ....

MKR .... MIN

MKR

ZERO

MARKER

MKR ....

MKR .... MAX


Softkey that toggles marker coupling between the ON and OFF conditions.

This key press should leave OFF brighL

Turning the knob with marker coupling off will move only the marker on the active trace.



Softkey used to move the marker to the point on the active trace with the lowest value.


Softkey used to initialize the offset marker at the position of the regular marker. Note that the information in the marker block for trace one has changed from MARKER to OFFSET.

Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMA T section.

Softkey used to move the marker to the point on the active trace with the largest value. The information in the marker block is now total amplifier ripple.

See figure

2-38.

•

1 1

2-56

Making Measurements


�EF L E � E L

1 5 DOOaB

- 6 C . O O O d Q g

�

,

,

, i i

'-.

'

-

'-.

I C I V

5 . 0 0 0 dB

1 0 � O O c e g

"

,

I

I

'

,,-

!

CF;SET � 9 7

' 2 � 0 0 0 OOOHZ

�AG / UDF J Q , 9 9 6 d 9

� A R � E Q

' , 5

0 0 0 0 0 0 OOQHz

P�ASE I VO� :

- 6 1

,

I

!

,

MKR -

REF LVL

MKR ...

S T A R T

M K R ...

STOP

MKR ..

CENTER i i

1

L LJ

�

I

I

0 r-O

I i

I

'-.

,

,

1'",

�I

I

,

I

,

M K R O F S T

... SPAN

MKR ...

MAX

""

.

"'-

"

HKR ...

M ' N

,

LJ

START S O 0 0 0 O O O . OQOH2

ANPTD

O . OdSm

STOP 2 0 0 0 0 0 a O Q . Q O Q H z

MARKER

SEARCH

�----------------------------------�

Figure 2-38. Measuring Amplifier Ripple

2-57

Making Measurements


S12 Reverse Loss

INPUT

5 1 2


Softkey selection of a new

INPUT

definition. This causes the test set to change to the REVERSE configuration. See figure 2-39.

The screen message:

INCOM}'. TESTSET POSmONS

Trc2 chgd to agree with # 1 will appear. This message (incompatible test set positions; trace two changed to agree with number one) is caused by the change of INPUT for trace one. The old trace two INPUT definition had the test set configured FORWARD. Since the test set can't be configured both ways at the same time, the HP 3577A has changed the HP 35677 NB configuration to REVERSE and displayed a screen message to let the user know that the trace two INPUT definition has changed.

INPUT

OUTPUT r-l t!)

Ar!)

OUTPUT

"

POWER

SPclTTER

@)B

RIDGE

S@)

INPUT

S12-A/R

S22 ..

B/R

R E V E R S E

PORT

1 PORT 2

Figure 2-39.


Reverse Configuration

2-58

Making Measurements


�:¥

,

.. , }} } " ,: " ,.,

MKR

MKR OFsT

ON OFF


Softkey used here to turn off the offset marker.

MEASR CAL

USER ACTION

NORMLlZE

USER ACTION

SCALE

USER ACTION

AUTO SCALE

TRACE 2

INPUT

COPY

Trc 1

-

SCALE

2

AUTO SCALE


Replace the amplifier with a BNC barrel.

Wait for complete sweep.

Softkey used to normalize the measurement as described previously.

Replace the BNCbarrel with the amplifier.




Hardkey used to select trace two as the active trace.

Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section. Note that the current INPUT definition (listed in the entry block) is BiR/Dl.

Softkey used to copy the INPUT definition for trace one into trace two. Note that the INPUT definition in the entry block has changed to AJRiDl.

This normalizes trace two.



2-59

2-60

Making Measurements

Amplffler S-Parameters

MKR

MKR CPL

ON OFF

TRACE 1


Softkey used here to turn marker coupling back on. Note that both markers are now at the same frequency and will move together when the knob is turned.

Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT used to select trace one as the active trace, making it and

its

alphanumeric information above the screen bright.

The markers may be used to measure reverse loss and reverse phase angle. See figure 2-40.

··!.J g n

I

; u d e

P h o s e

MARKER

POSN

REF LEVEL

- 1 S . 000dB

7 0 . a O O d _ g i

ID I V

S . QO O d B

MARKER 1 2 5 000 OOO . DOOH%

M A G ( U O FI _ 2 S . Z S 9 d S

..wrr.

,.,J' t'"

,.--

�

1 0 . a O O d e g MARKER 1 25 0 0 0 0 0 0 OaOH%

L".r

....

----

V

F'HAS E ( UOF )

T r ee

"""

,

1 0 0 6 2 5 d e g

"" E<

,sN

"-

L

/

/

\

----

.-/

/ \

MARKER

ON

OFF

ZERO

MARKER

FREO

OFFseT l

MKR CPL

ON OFF

-

I

�TART 50 000 OOO . OOOH:

AMPTO a . OaB'"

STOP zoo 000 OOO . OOOM:

----

J

.

R

I i

D

I

D

I

I n

Figure 2-40. Normalized Reverse Loss and Phase

';,,0:.

.,' .�

Making Measurements

Ampiffier S-Parameters

51 1 ' Input Return Loss

Next, input reflection will be examined. This is possible through the use of the directional bridges of the HP 35677 A/B S-Parameter Test Set. In this example, full one-port calibration using three term error correction is employed for maximum measurement accuracy.

INPUT Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section.

S 1 1 Softkey selection of S-parameter Sl1 as the INPUT.

MEASR CAL


ONE PORT

FULL CAL

Softkey. Note the screen message LEAVE PORT

1

OPEN. See figure 2-41.

USER ACTION Disconnect

the devite

un d e r test from its input cable

(port 1).

,

R E F L E V E L I D I V MARKER 1 2 5 0 0 0 O O O . O O O H z CONT I NUE

C A L - 1 S . 0 0 0 d B

70

D D D d e g

S . O D O d B

1 D . O O O d l!'! g

MAG ( S 1 1 )

MARKER 1 2 5 0 0 0 O D O . O O O H z

L-------f1

E �:�

/

7 PHASE ( UDF ) bNE

IT��

P O

1

In

PE'

- 1 3 . 1 0 1 dB

- 1 6 6 o e O o e g

-i

7

START

/

7

"""" l'/U.

R E ' 5T R S A 0 U E R

K 1 .

-

F I N

D 1

� I" cu·

S O 0 0 0 O O O . O O O H z

D

STOP 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O O O H z

OdBm

AMPTD o

ABORT

C A L n

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

Figufe 2-41. Screen Messages fOf One-Port Full Calibration

2-61

Making Measurements


CONTINUE

CAL

Description

::;:'�:;�::::::::':::':::,=::::::::::::::�:::i:�:i:�:::i:\{tW;::;:�::;;:�:::� :'::':::::::::'::�1�:�:i:�::tw:m�:n;:r;;::�::;:::�::::{::�:::�::::::�::n:::i:{::j::::::i:�:fj}:�;e:::��:::::::::�,"::::�,:::r;:::�:::;:��:g�:�:�::::::i:::\:��:�:::;;�":�

Softkey. After a sweep, note the screen message INSTALL SHORT ON

PORT

1.

USER ACTiON

CONTINUE

CAL

Install a shorted termination on ,the ioput cahle where the device under test was connected.

Softkey. After a complete sweep and some calculation time, note the screen message INSTALL REFERENCE LOAD ON PORT

1.

USER ACTiON

CONTINUE

CAL

Replace the short termination with a reference load. (500 for HP 35677A or

750

for HP 35677B);

Softkey. After a complete sweep and some more calculation time, note the screen message

CALIBRATION COMPLETE

INPUT= uFl" :

CALIBRATED REFLECTION

This

message to the user says that the INPUT definition has been changed to the user defined function

Fl.

See MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION in the

REFERENCE section for more details.

USER ACTION

SCALE

USER ACTIO N

AUTO SCALE

TRACE 2

INPUT

COpy

Trc

1

...

2

Connect the cable back to the ioput of the device.




Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section. Note that the SCALE menu is still displayed and selections made from it will affect trace two.



SCALE

AUTO SCALE



" ,

, ,

'.,,)

2-62

Making Measurements


TRACE 1

MKR -

MKR - MIN



Softkey used to search for the minimum magnitude (in this case, maximum

RE

TIJRN

LOSS or

best

impedance match).

The display is now input return loss magnitude (trace one) and phase (trace two). Measurements may be made with the markers by turning the knob to move them along the trace. Marker data appears in the marker information block above the graticule. See figure

2-42.

REF

LEVEL

· 2 0 . a O O d B

1 8 0 . O O O Cl e g

I D I V

1 0 . 0 0 0 d B

3 0 . 0 0 0 a e g

MARKER

' 5 '

MAG C U O F )

MARKER

"

FHASE C UOF )

,

625

O O D . O OOHz

-6 9 , 96.3d6

6" O O D , OOOHZ

1 J 7 . 9 6 .4 d e !;,

MKR ...

REF

LVL

MKR ...

START

'---

I

� r--..

�

----

----

'"

\

I

-----r---..

I

/'

----

----

�

-

MKR ...

STOP

MKR ...

CENT ER

MKR O F S T

�

SPAN

MKR ...

MAX

MKR -to

M I N l

START

AMPTO

SO 0 0 0

0 . 0 dBm

O O a . ODOHz

STOP

Z O O 0 0 0 O O O . O O O H z

MARKER

SEAR C H

D

D

D

D

2-63

Making Measurements

Amplifier S·Parameters

522' Output Re flection Coefficient

Next, the setup to measure S22' will be made the output reflection coefficient, using the

HP

35677

NB in the REVERSE configuration.

'�:'�'FF'),"";;;V;""'''''

INPUT

522

MEASR CAL

U5ER ACTION

NORMLlZE

U5ER AcnON


Softkey used to select BIR as the INPUT with the test set in the REVERSE configuration.


Disconnectthe cable from the amplifier output andleave the end of the cable open� ..

Softkey used to normalize the measurement as described previously. This feature may be used with an "open" termination for reflection measurements as well as with a BNC barrel for transmission measurements.

Reconnect the output of the am

p

lifier to the PORT 2 cable.

DISPLY FCTN

POLAR


Softkey used to display trace information in a polar format. Note that only one trace may be on when using the POLAR display function. Trace two is turned off when POLAR is selected for trace one. See figure

2-43.

2-64

FULL S C A L E 1 . 0 0 0 0

PHASE REF O . O d e g

R E F PO$N 0 J d e g

MARKER 1 5 4 6 2 5 O O O . O O O H Z

MAG ( UD F )

PHASE I UOF I

7 8 2 4 4 E - 3

1 3 1 . 0 0 3 � e g

Making Measurements


I MAG

S T A R T 5 0 0 0 0 o O O . a O OH z

ANPTD O . OdBm

STOP 2 0 0 0 0 0 O O O . O O O H z

DELAY

OFF

Figure 2-43. Polar Display Function of Normalized RF Amplifier Output Reflection

Now the display shows the trace of the reflection coefficient of the amplifier output from 50 MHz to

200 MHz.

Note that the marker magnitude units are in linear units. The marker may be moved as described previously to make measurements on the trace.

2-65

Making Measurements


Complex Output Impedance .

Next, the Smith chart graticule will be used to convert reflection coefficient to complex impedance and change the marker units from magnitude and phase to real and imaginary.

SCALE

SMITH CH

ON

OFF

MKR

MARKER

M,P R,l


Softkey which appears in the SCALE menu when the display function is

POLAR.

This softkey toggles the Smith chart on and off. Note that the marker units change from MAG and PHASE to

Z

MAG and

Z

PHASE, or impedance magnitude and phase. This may be changed to read directly in real and imaginary units as shown next.


Softkey that appears

in

the marker menu when the display function is POLAR.

This softkey toggles the marker units between Magnitude

&

Phase and Real

&

Imaginary units. Note the correspondence between the Smith chart graticule and the marker units. See figure

2-44.

2-66

Making Measurements


Ma r k e r r ea d a u l

I n c a m p I e x i m p e d a n c e

�ULL SCALE

1 . 0000

.......... SE �E .. O . Odeg

REF .

PDSN O . OdaQ o

START 50

AHPTO

000 O O O . OOOM�

O . OdlSm

MARKE� ' 9 � e z s

Z RE { UO � I

Z I M ( UO � )

O O O . OOOMz

Z . 9 7 6 6

199 . 69E_J

STOP 2 0 0 000 O O O . OOOM%

MKR OFST

ON O .. F

!�eAL

OFFSET

I=:=J r--r---:

LJ o

O

1---

:

0

' ''' ... G

OFI=SET

FREO

OFFSET

MARKER

M , P R .

I

�O o

Figure 2-44. The Smith Chart

Note

The Smith chart graticule should be used with a

FULL SCALE value of

1.000 units. If this scale is changed the graticule may not be used for conversion to complex impedance, but the data in the marker information block will continue to be accurate.

2-67

Chapter 3

Remote Operation

Remote Operation

The Hewlett-Packard Interface Bus

What Is the HP-IB?

The Hewlett-Packard Interface Bus (HP-ID) is an easy to use, high performance bus structure that links the HP

3577 A,

desktop computers, minicomputers and other instruments into automated

488-1978,

ANSn Standard MC

1.1

and IEC Recommendation 625-1.

How does the HP-IB Operate?

NI of the active interface circuits are contained within the various HP-m controlled devices. The cable's role is limited to connecting all of the devices in parallel so that data can be transferred from one device to another.

Every participating device must be able to perform at least one of the following roles: TALKER,

USTENER, or CONTROLLER.

A talker transmits data to other devices called listeners. Most devices can perform both roles, but not at the same time.

A controller manages the operation of the bus system by designating which device is to talk and which device(s) are to listen at any given time.

The HP

3577A can be a talker or a listener. It has no controller capabilities.

The minimum HP-ID system consists of one talker and one listener without a controller. In this configuration, data transfer is limited to one direction because one device must be manually set to

"TALl( ONLY" and the other device must be manually set to "USTEN ONLY." The HP

3577 A

can be set to talk only; it cannot be set to listen only.

The full flexibility and power of the HP-ID bus is realized when a controller is added to the system.

An HP-m controller participates in the measurement by being programmed to:

•

•

•

•

Schedule measurement tasks

Set up instruments

Monitor the measurement

Interpret and operate upon the results

3

3-1

Remote Operation

HP·IS Specification Summary

Number of Interconnected Devices:

A maximum of fifteen on one bus.

Interconnection Path/maximum Cable Length:

Total cable length equal to two meters times number of devices or twenty meters, whichever is less, with a maximum of three meters separating any two devices.

Message Transfer Scheme:

Byte-seria� eight bit-parallel asynchronous data transfer using a three wire handshake.

Data Rate:

One megabyte per second (maximum) over limited distances, actual data rate depends upon the capability of the slowest device involved in the transmission.

Address Capability:

Primary addresses: at one time.

31

talk,

3 1

listen. A maximum of one talker and fourteen listeners

Multiple Controller Capability:

In systems with more than one controller. only one can be active at a time. The active controller can pass control to another controller, but only the system controller can assume unconditional control. Only one system controller is allowed. The system controller is hard-wired to assume bus control after a power failure.

3-2

Remote Operation

Bus Structure

Bus Structure

I

I

DEVICE

A

Able to

J talk,

l .1

control

==

11I1I IU

, j

,

I

0010

Bus

18 slgnel hnll!sJ

DEVICE

B

Aot!!' 10

10\k

& IIslen

==!..

,

HANDSHAKE LI NES

Dolo Byte Transfer

Control

(� 51gnol [Inest

DEVICE

C

Able to lisl.n

"'y f=Wllj

DEVICE

Abl@ talk only la

0 dJlt1 !

�

,

CONTROL LINE s

Generol Interface

Managnent

<S

Signal lines)

-l

010 1

DAV

NRFD

NOM

IFe

ATN

SRO

REN

EOI

Figure 3-1. Bus Structure

8

Management (CONTROL) Lines.

ATN

- Attention. This line is used by the active controller to define how information on the data lines (DIO 1...8) will be interpreted by the other devices on the bus. When ATN is low (true) the

HP-m is in Command Mode and the data lines carry bus commands. When ATN is false the HP-IB is in Data Mode and the data lines carry device dependent commands. In the command mode the controller is active and all other devices are waiting for instructions.

SRQ - Service Request. This line is set low (true) by any instrument requesting service.

REN - Remote Enable. The system controller sets REN low and then addresses the devices to listen before they will operate under remote control.

IFC - Interface Clear. Only the system controller can activate this line. When IFC is set (true) all talkers, listeners, and active controllers go to their inactive states.

EO!

-

End Or Identify. This line is used to indicate the end of a multiple byte transfer sequence or, in conjunction with A TN, to execute a parallel polling sequence.

3-3

Remote Operation

The HP

3577A and the

HP-IS

The HP 3577A and the HP-IB

H P 3577A HP-IB Capability

As defined by IEEE

Standard 488-1978. tbe

HP 3577 A has tbese characteristics:

LEO

SR1

RL1

PP1

DC1

DT1

CO

E1

SH1

AH1

T5

TEO

L4

Complete Source Handshake capability

Complete Acceptor Handshake capability

Basic Talker; serial poll; unaddress ij

MLA; Talk-Only

No Extended Talker capability

Basic Listener; unaddress ij

MTA; no Listen Only

No Extended Listener capability

Complete Service Request capability

Complete RemoteII.ocal capability

Parallel Poll; remote configuration capability

Complete Device Clear capability

Complete Device Trigger capability

No Controller capability

Drivers are open-collector

This list of capabilities is printed on tbe rear panel near the

HP-lB connector as foUows:

SRI

ARl

T

5

TEO L4 LEO SRI RLl PPl DCl DTt CO El

" .

, .

�

�", ,

. . ,,�

� . .

, "

; . ,

3-4

The

Remote Operation

HP

3577A and the

HP-IS

Data Format

Vs

Transfer Rate

The

HP

3577 A offers three data formats for transferring certain types of data on the bus. Data format may be selected for the following 110: trace dumps, register dumps and loads, marker data dumps, and marker position dumps. A trace is made up of real numbers and is defined by the

INPUT key. Trace one or trace two may be dumped (output) in any of the three data formats. A register is made up of real and imaginary numbers. There will be twice as many numbers in a register

I/O as there are for a trace dump with the same sweep resolution. Registers R, A, B, D1, D2, D3, or

D4 may be dumped or loaded in any of the three data formats.

As described in the previous paragraph, not all HP 3577 A dump and load commands may be done in more than one type data formaL It is recommended that the ASCII format

(FM!)

be active unless one of these transfers is required. Each data format has a different data transfer rate. The figures listed for transfer rate are average times, shown here for comparison. They were taken such that the controller was not a limiting factor.

FMI - Data format one is the default data format. When FMl is active the

HP 3577A transfers data using the ASCII format. Using this format the HP 3577 A can dump a trace of 401 points in approximately 1.6 seconds. This format has the slowest data transfer rate of the three.

FM2 - Data format two is the 64 bit floating point binary specified in the IEEE draft standard

P754. The data rate for this format is faster than that of FM1 but slower than that of

FM3

. FM2 has the advantage of being the same format used by HP 9000 Series 300 computers. Using this format the

HP

3577A can dump a trace of 401 points in approximately 0.16 seconds.

FM3

-

Data format three is the 32 bit floating point binary used by the HP 3577 A fast processor.

FM3 has the fastest data transfer rate of the three data formats. Using FM3 the HP 3577 A can dump a trace of 401 points in approximately 0.04 seconds. When this format is active the HP 3577 A does not have to convert data formats and requires half as many transfers per data value as FM2.

This format may be used for data that is not processed outside the HP

3577 A

3-5

Remote Operation

The HP 3577A and

the

HP-IB

Direct Plotting

The HP 3577A can provide a hardcopy of the CRT screen without using a computer. It does this by directly controlling a digital plotter connected to the HP 3577 A's HP-IB port located on the rear panel. The plotter (such as the HP 7475A) must accept Hewlett-Packard Graphic Language

(HP-GL) commands. The HP 3577A must be configured in a Talk Only mode and the plotter must be configured as a

Listen Only device. Refer to SPECIAL FUNCTIONS in the

REFERENCE section.

HP-IB Verification

Refer to the computer operating manual and find the section describing the HP-IB REMOTE

Message. When this message is sent to the HP 3577 A., the REMOTE annunciator LED on the front panel will lighL If this does not occur, recheck the cabling, the HP 3577 A address, and the syntax of the computer statement. Here is an example of the REMOTE message as implemented by the HP 9000 Series 300 computer:

REMOTE 7 1 1

HP 9000

Series

300

Computer

3-6

Remote Operation

The HP 3577A and the HP-IS

Hp·IB

Diagnostic Mode

The Bus Diagnostic Modes (BD1 & BD2) may be used to find HP-IB program problems. When active, these modes cause the HP 3577 A to display menus as though being operated from the front panel. In BD2 the programming code received by the HP 3577 A over the bus will be left-shifted through the screen error block in a "ticker tape" fashion.

BOO is the default mode. Bus diagnostics are off; no menus appear and bus codes are not displayed. Sweep dot does not appear unless sweep time is 1 second or more. This is the fastest programming mode.

BOt displays all menus and updates the front panel as though the HP 3577 A were being operated from the front panel. The HP-IB programming codes appear only when an error is encountered.

When this occurs, processing of all bus commands will halt for three seconds to allow the programmer to read the code that caused the error before processing continues and secondary errors are generated.

BD2 is the same as BD1 except that the HP 3577 A processes bus code at a reduced rate (one command per second) and all programming code received on the bus is left-shifted through the screen error block.

Note

"

The HP 3577A will interpret the carriage return (CR) as .- , linefeed as

�, and EOI as

� .

Binary loads (including the #1) and ASCII register loads are not shown on the screen.

Note

The HP 3577 A's HP-IB buffer will hold a maximum of 100 characters . If the controller tries to send more than 100, it will have to wait for the HP 3577 A to process some of the code before sending more. If the computer is waiting as just described, and the HP 3577 A processes a dump command, it will wait to be addressed to talk. It is possible that both controller and HP 3577 A could end up waiting for each other, halting all bus activity. Care should be taken in programming such that this does not occur.

3-7

Remote

The

Operation

HP 3577A's HP-IB Address

The HP 3S77A's HP-IB Add ress

Talk/listen Addresses

Every HP-m device has at least one address unless it's totally transparent or a Talk-Only or

Listen-Only device. Device addresses are used by the active controller in the COMMAND MODE

(ATN true) to specify who talks (via a Talk Address) and who listens (via Listen Addresses). There may be only one talker addressed (by the controller) to talk at any time. Talk and Listen addresses are the same on the HP 3577

A

Viewing the HP 3577A's HP-IB Address

The HP 3577A's HP-m address is set to eleven (11) at the factory. To display the address of the HP 3577 A:

1.

Press the "SPCL FCTN" hardkey

2. Press the "HP-IS ADDRESS" softkey (top item in the display menu). The address will appear in the entry block. See figure 3-2.

REF LEVEL

0.00006

/�v

10.000a8

MARKER 100 050 000

"'''GtSZ11

" a.o�o

.OOOM� de

I-IP-IB

ADORESS

TALKONLY

ON OFF

1---

: 0

CONF

TEST

BEEPER

ON OFF

AMPTD 1'5.0aBm

SEFtVICE

'".0

S "ARMS

ON OFF

�O

1--o

FIgure 3-2.

., . ,

3-8

Remote Operation

The HP 3577A's HP-IS Address

Setting the HP 3577A 's HP-IB Address

Every device on the HP-IB must have a unique address. The HP 3577A address can be set to any address from zero (0) to thirty (30), inclusive. When choosing an address, remember that the controller also has an address (typically 21). To change the HP-IB address:

I. Press the "SPCl FCTN" hardkey

2.

Press the "HP-IS ADDRESS" softkey to display the current HP-IB address.

3. Press the appropriate keys in the numeric keypad for the new address. Note the change in the entry block.

4. Press the "ENTER" softkey.

The HP 3577 A's HP-IB address is stored in a non-volatile memory; there are no address switches. If the contents of this memory are destroyed, the HP-IB address defaults to eleven (1 1). Under normal circumstances, the non-volatile memory should retain its data for up to five years. This time is not specified and no warranty is stated or implied.

Use the following table if you are using a controller that requires the talk and listen addresses.

3-9

Remote Op era t i o n

The HP 3SnA's HP-IS Address

HP-IS ADDRESSES

DEVICE

ADDRESSES

TALK LISTEN

1 1 **

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

7

8

5

6

9

1 0

2

3

4

0

1

1 7

1 8

1 9

20

21 *:j::j:

22

23

24

25

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

K

L

M

N

0

P

Q

R

I

J

G

H

0

E

F

@

A

B

C

SPACE *

!

"

/

0

#

$

%

&

(

)

*

+

-

7

8

9

5

6

3

4

1

2

26

27

Z

[

1/2 28

<

29

1

=

30

"

>

:j: (ASCII character) :j::j: (HP 35778 factory setting) :j::j::j: (usually the controller)

The Talk and Listen addresses are ASCII characters. When a device receives one of these characters while A

TN is true, it will become addressed. The ASCII character

? will unaddress all devices. The Device address (set from the HP 3577A front panel) is used by most newer

HP-ill computers which automatically send the Talk and Listen address characters.

3-10

Remote Operation

Bus Messages

Bus Messages

The interface system operates in either of two modes: COMMAND MODE (ATN true) or DATA

MODE (ATN false). Ifan

HP computer is used, the bus management lines will be configured automatically and all necessary command strings will be issued.

Bus Commands

In the Command Mode special codes known as "bus commands" may be placed on the HP-IB.

These commands have the same meaning in all HP-m systems. Each device is designed to respond to those commands that have a useful meaning to the device and ignore other bus commands. The

HP 3577 A will respond to the following commands as described. The three-letter command abbreviations refer to IEEE 488 nomenclature.

Abort 1/0

Abort Input/Output (IFC; interface clear) is an unconditional assumption of control of the bus by the system controller. All bus activity halts and the

HP 3577 A becomes unaddressed. This does not clear the HP 3577A HP-m command buffer.

Example for HP

9000

Series 300 computers, in BASIC:

ABORT 7

Clear Lockout/Set Local

This command removes all devices from the local lockout mode and returns them to local (front panel) control. The only difference between this bus message and the LOCAL message is how it is addressed.

Example for HP 9000 Series 300 computers, in BASIC:

LOCAL 7

(Clears LOCAL LOCKOUT and enables front panel keys)

3-1 1

Remote Operation

Bus

Messages

Device Clear

The CLEAR command may be addressed (SDC, selected device clear) or unaddressed (DCL; device clear). When this command is received by theHP 3577 A it will clear the HP-IB command buffer, reset the SRQ line (if pulled low by the HP 3577 A), and abort any data input or output This interrupts bus activity and gains control of the analyzer, no maller what it may be doing. It does Got

It is good practice to begin programs with this command. See the exampies that follow.

Examples for HP 9000 Series 300 computers, in BASIC:

CLEAR 7

(UDC; clears all devices on computer port seven)

CLEAR 71 1

(SDC; clears device addressed eleven on port seven)

Local

LOCAL (GTL; go to local) returns control of the listening device to the local (front panel) state.

The REMOTE LED on the front panel extinguishes if the instrument was in remote prior to the

LOCAL command. The HP-IB buffer is not cleared on the HP 3577

A

Also, any dump or load in progress will not be aborted.

Example for HP

9000

Series 300 computers, in BASIC:

LOCAL 71 1

(Local lockout still active if returned to REMOTE).

Note

"

This command is not identical to pressing the LCL front panel key on the

HP 3577

A

Pressing the key

will

clear the HP-IB buffer of all pending commands.

Local Lockout

LOCAL LOCKOUT (LLO) disables the LOCAL key of all devices on the bus to secure the system from operator interference when in remote control. After this command is issued the only way

10 return to front panel operation from remote control is with a LOCAL command from the controller.

Local lockout will not change the 10caVremote status of the instrument. Local lockout is disabled by a universal (unaddressed) LOCAL command on the bus.

Example for HP 9000 Series 300 computers, in BASIC:

LOCAL LOCKOUT 7

3-12

..

:

.

Remote

Operation

Bus Messages

Parallel Poll

PARALLEL POLL is a command issued by the controller in response to the SRQ (service request) management line being pulled low (true). Since any instrument could have pulled SRQ the controller must poll them all to find which requested service. The parallel poll commands each device to send its Request Service bit (RQS; part of the Status Byte) on one of the eight data lines.

The Parallel Poll Configure (PPC) command determines data line and logical sense used.

Example for HP

9000

Series

300 computers, in

BASIC:

Var=PPOLL(7)

Parallel Poll Configure

The PARALLEL POLL CONHGURE command (PPC) programs the logical sense and data line used by a specified device to respond to a parallel poll. The configure word is coded as shown in figure

3-3.

The three least significant bits determine the data bus line for the response. The fourth bit determines the logical sense of the response.

Decimal

2

9

Binary o 010

1 001

T T data line number sense bit

Figure

3-3

Example for

HP 9000

Series

300 computers, in

BASIC:

PPOLL CON FIGURE 71 1 ;2

(put

RQS bit on

010 line

2

Sense:

0

=

RQS true)

PPOLL CONFIGURE 71 1 ;9

(put

RQS bit on

010 line

1

Sense:

1

=

RQS true)

Pass Control

Pass Control (TCf; take control) shifts system control from one controller to another. Since the

HP

3577

A has no controller capability, it cannot respond.

3-13

Remote Operation

Bus Messages

Remote

REMOTE may be used to address the HP 3577A to listen. When this command is issued, the

REMOTE front panel LED illuminates and the front panel is disabled except for the LCL key. If

LOCAL LOCKOUT is active the LCL front panel key is also disabled.

Examples for HP 9000 Series 300 computers, in BASIC;

REMOTE 7

(switches all devices on port seven from local to remote)

REMOTE 71 1

(switches device addressed eleven from local to remote)

Serial Poll

SERIAL POLL is a command to dump the status byte on the bus. Encoded in the eight bits of the status byte are the states of several

HP

3577A operating conditions. See "THE STATUS BYTE."

Examples for

HP 9000

Series 300 computers, in

BASIC;

Var=SPOLL(71 1 )

IF Var THEN ... (Checks for the zero state)

Another example:

I F BINAND(SPOLL(71 1 ) , 1 6) THEN ...

(Checks state of bit five)

Service Request

The Service Request (SRQ) line is one of the five bus management lines that go to every device on the bus, along with eight data lines and three handshake lines. It may be used by one or more devices to indicate the need for attention from the controller and can act as an interruption of the current sequence of events. Typically, SRQ indicates information is ready to transmit and/or an error condition exists. When the

Bit

HP 3577 A issues an SRQ it also sets bit

#6 of the Status Byte.

6 is the RQS (Require Service) bit, sometimes referred to as the "status bit" in connection with a poll.

If properly configured, the controller will stop and poll when it senses the SRQ. A serial poll returns each device's status byte, one device at a time. A parallel poll returns all (up to eight) device's status bits simultaneously; each instrument responding on one of the eight data lines. When the HP 3577A is polled it will clear the RQS bit and the SRQ line.

Any of the bits in the Status Byte may initiate an SRQ. The Status Byte may be masked such the user may select which bits cause the

HP

3577A to set the SRQ line (see the Status Byte).

3·14

Remote Operation

Bus Messages

Trigger

The HP 3577 A responds to the TRIGGER bus command (GET; group execute trigger) as it would to any other external trigger; by beginning a sweep or, in the case of CW sweep type or manual sweep mode, taking a measurement. TRIGGER may be sent to a selected device or all devices addressed to listen on the HP-m. The HP 3577A must be addressed to listen and in the "WAIT

TRIG" state before the trigger message is sent. If the last statement left the HP 3577 A addressed to listen and settling is complete, it's ready for a trigger. If not, or if several devices are to be triggered simultaneously, use a SEND command to address the listeners. See Bit B4 of The Status Byte.

Examples for HP 9000 Series 300 computers, in BASIC:

SEND 7;UNL MTA USTEN 1 1 , 1 7, 22

TRIGGER 7

UNL

=

UNUSTEN; unaddresses all listeners

MTA

=

MY TALK ADDRESS; the controller addresses itself to talk

USTEN 1 1 , 1 7,

22; addresses devices whose addresses are 1 1 , 1 7 , and 22 to listen

Another example:

ASSIGN @Usteners TO 702, 707, 71 1

TRIGGER @Usteners

Device Dependent Commands

In the Data Mode special codes known as "device dependent commands" may be placed on the

HP-IB. These commands have meaning for a specific instrument. They can configure the instrument, tell it to take a measurement, dump or load data, or define error reporting conditions, and are meaningless for other instruments.

Device dependent commands and front panel key functions have a one-to-one relationship for all but the HP-rn-only commands. For example, DF5 is the remote equivalent of pressing the PHASE softkey in local. Exceptions to this rule are:

•

Front panel functions not allowed in remote operation: HP-m Address Viewing and Selection

TALK ONLY mode ON/OFF

•

•

•

•

•

•

Remote functions not allowed from the front panel:

•

Data Dumps

Load Data

User defmed graphics

User defined annotation

User defined menus

Bus code diagnostics

Control of Settling Time value

3-15

3-1 6

Remote Operation

Bus Messages

Device dependent commands may be sent to the HP 3577A by using the BASIC command

"OUTPUT' as shown in the following examples for HP

9000

Series 300 computers:

OUTPUT 711:FSW:

OUTPUT 711,'DFS:

OUTPUT 711,'FRA

OUTPUT 711:DRA:

2 MHZ,'

!Full

Sweep)

(Display Function 5 is PHASE)

(Start Frequency

!Dump Register A)

-

2 11Hz)

OUTPUT 711,:l)F7,FRA 1 HHZ,FRB 10 start

Scu<:.

Fn!q

- 1 _

�

-

_

10 _

0 _

_

TakI! __

_

HHZ,SAM

0 DBH,TKM,DRA,'

��-��mTI

..J

� � A

A delimiter should be used after all commands when there are multiple commands per line.

Delimiters are semicolons (;), linefeeds (LF), and <EOI> (pulling the EO! bus management line).

Separators, such as spaces and commas, may be used instead of delimiters, but using semicolons or

LF characters between commands enables the HP 3577A to do a better job of error reporting. A delimiter is required to terminate a numeric entry. The HP 3577 A accepts upper or lower case letters over the bus.

Remote Operation

Bus Messages

Definitions

A

SELECf COMMAND is a two-letter prefix followed by a qualifier digit that selects a particular state of that function.

Example:

The HP-IB code for PHASE (display function 5) is DF5

IMMEDIATE EXECUTION COMMANDS execute a given operation when issued. They require no other data.

Example: Instrument Preset is IPA.

DATA ENTRY COMMAND is a three part command that enters a value for one of the parameters.

The three parts are: prefIX (the parameter to be changed by the data entry), data (numbers), and suffIX (units for the new value). Source amplitude (SAM) is an example of a data entry command.

Example:

OUTPUT 71 1 ;"SAM 0 DBM;"

•

•

•

•

•

HP 3577 A Program Codes have been categorized into five distinct groups to help explain them.

These are:

S

O UR

CE

RECEIVER

DISPLAY FORMAT

INSTRUMENT STATE

HP-lB ONLY

3-1 7

Remote Operation

Display Format

Display Format

Function

TRACE 1

TRACE 2

DISPLAY FUHcnON

Log Magnitude

Linear Magn�ude

Phase

Polar

Real

ImaginalY

Delay

Trace Off

Delay Aperture menu

Aperture .5% of span

Aperture 1 % of span

Aperture

2% of span

Aperture 4% of span

Aperture B% of span

Aperture 1 6% of span

Return

INPUT

Input

=

R

Input

=

A

Input

=

B

Input

=

AIR

Input

=

B/R

Input

=

01

Input

=

02

Input

=

03

Input

=

D4

Return

INp ·

IHR

IHA

IHB tAR

IBR

101

102

103

104

AP2

AP3

AP4

AP5

AP6

REI

•

OF4

OF3

OF2

OF1

OFO

OAp ·

APl

RET *

HP-IB code

TRl

TR2

OSF *

0F7

OF6

OF5

•

Use not required. The only function of this code Is to display a menu (ff bus diagnostics are on).

Function

User Defined Input

Input

=

Sl1

Input

=

S21

Input

=

S12

Input

=

S22

Copy Input

Test Set Forward

Test Set Reverse

SCALE

Autoscale

Reference Level (entry)

ScaletDIV (entry)

Reference Position (en1l)')

. .

Reference Line Off

Reference Line On

Copy Scale

Phase Slope (entry)

Phase Slope Off

Phase Slope On

Polar Full Scale (entlY)

Polar Phase Rei (entry)

Smith Chart Off

Sm�h Chart On

MARKER

Marker Pos�ion (entlY)

Marker Off

Marker On

Zero Marker

Marker Offset Off

Marker Offset On

Gn

MKR *

MKP

MRO

MRl

ZMK

MOO

MOl

Set *

ASl

REF

DIV

RPS

RLO

Rl1

CPS

PSl

PSO

PSI

PFS

PPR

GTO

HP-IB code

UOI

111

121

112

122

CP'

TSF

TSR

3·18

Function

Marker Offset (entry)

Marker Offset Freq (entry)

Marker Offset Amp (entry)

Marker Coupling Off

Marker Coupling On

Polar Mag Offset (entry)

Polar Phase Offset (entJy)

Polar Real Offset (entJy)

Polar Imag Offset (entry)

Polar Marker Un�s (Re/lm)

Polar Marker Un� (MglPh)

MARKER

-+

MKR - Reference Level

MKR

-+

Start Frequency

MKR - Stop Frequency

MKR - Center Frequency

MKR Offset - Span

MKR - Max

MKR - Min

MKR Target value (entry)

MKR - Right for Target

MKR

-+

Left for Target

Return

MKR - Full Scale

MKR - Polar Phase Ref

STORE DATA

Store in register Dl

Store in register D2



Store and Display

User Delined Slore

HP-IB code

RET -

MTP

MPF

STD -

SOl

MOS

MTX

MTN

MTV

MRT

MLT

SD2

SD3

SD4

STD

UDS

MKO

MOF

MOA

COO

COl

PMO

PPO

PRO

PlO

MRI

MMP

MKG-

MTR

MTA

MTB

MTC

Funclion

Slore to Dl

Store to D2

Store to D3

Store to D4

MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

Normalize

Normalize (Short)

Calibrate, Paltial

Calibrate, Full

Contnue Calibration

DEFINE MATH

Constant Kt Real(entJy)

Constant K1, Imaginary(entJy)

Constant

K2, Real(entry)

Constant

K2, Imaginary(entry)

Constant K3, Real(entry)

Constant K3, Imaginary(entJy)

Define function

Function Fl

Function F2

Function F3

Function F4

Function f5

Math term for input R

Math term for input A

Math term for input B

Math term for storage rag

Math term for constant

Math term for function

Math bracket

Math function plus

Math function minus

Remote Operation

Display Format

HP-IB code

TOl

T02

KR2

KI2

KR3

KI3

DfC *

TD3

TD4

CAL -

NRM

NRS

CPR

CFL

CGO

DFN -

KRl

KI1

(

+

-

UF5

R

A

B

D

K

F

UFl

UF2

UF3

UF4

•

Use not required. The only function of this code is to display a menu (� bus diagnostiCS are on).

3-1 9

Remote Operation

Display Format

Function

Math function mu�iply

Math function divide

HP-I.B code

•

Math bracket

Return

DATA ENTRY SECTION COMMANDS

Increment (up arrow)

Decrement (down arrow)

Continuous Entry (knob)

Off

Continuous Entry (knob) On

Entry Off

DISPLAY FORMAT SUFFIX UNITS dBm dBv (rms) dB relative

/

)

RET ·

IUP

ION

CEa

CE1

HLD

DBM

DBY

DBR

Vott (rms) milli-Vott (rms) micro-Vo� (rms) nano-Vott degrees

(rms) degrees/span radians radianS/span seconds milliseconds microseconds nanoseconds percent degreeS/span radianS/span

MHZ kHz

Hz exponent

DSP

RAD

RSP

SEC

MSC use

NSe

Y

MY

Uv

NY

DEG

%

DSP

RAP

MHZ

KHZ

HZ

E

•

Use not required. The only function of thiS code is to display a menu (n bus diagnostics are on).

3-20

Remote Operation

Bus Messages

USER DEFINED INPUT (UDI)

uses the same terms and math functions as UDF (user defined function).

Example:

1 0 OUTPUT 71 1 ; "UDI (B/R)/(K1 -B/R)"

COPY INPUT (CPI) will copy the INPUT defmition of the inactive trace into that of the active trace as follows:

1. Trace one active

2. Output CPI

3. INPUT definition of trace one is now the same as trace two

TEST SET FORWARD AND REVERSE (TSF

&

TSR)

are used to configure the

HP

35677 AIB

S-Parameter Test Set connected to the

HP

3577

A The INPUT definition should be user defmed

(to avoid an error message).

If you wish to control the test set while using one of the standard input definitions, enter it under VDI.

Example: 10 OUTPUT 711;"UDI R;TSR;"

COPY SCALE (CPS) will copy reference level and /DIY parameters of the inactive trace into those of the active trace if the DISPLAY FUNCTION units of both traces are compatible.

MARKER POSITION (MKP) is a prefix for a data entry. The data will be a bin number. The number of bins in a sweep depends on the sweep resolution (in a frequency sweep) or number of steps (in an amplitude sweep). The default numbers of bins in a sweep are 401 (0 through

400) for frequency sweeps and 101 (0 through 100) for amplitude sweeps.

MKP is the prefix used to position the marker at a specific bin. This bin number may be calculated using the following formula:

=

!bIn

-

Istsrt span x

Where: fbin is the frequency of the new marker position fstan is the start frequency span is the frequency span points per sweep is the sweep resolution

This number should be an integer s

401.

If the result is not an integer you probably picked a frequency for fbin that is not one of the sampled frequencies for the sweep. The

HP

3577

A will round any fraction received with MKP. If the number is

>

401 a error message will be generated.

"NUMBER OUT OF RANGE"

3·21

Remote Operation

Bus Messages

USER DEFINED STORE (UDS)

and

TD1,-TD4

are used together to define and store data (traces).

Example:

1 0 OUTPUT 71 1 , "UDS D3-AJR*D4 TD3,"

Note that a register name may appear as part of the defmition and as the destination register. A destination register must appear after the definition

USER DEFINED FUNCTIONS 1 THROUGH 5 (UF1 -UFS) are used to enter definitions as shown in the following:

Example:

1 0 OUTPUT

71 1

; "UF3 D4*AJR+ 03;"

20 OUTPUT 71 1 ; "UF4 (AJR-D2)/F3;"

Note that functions may be defined in terms of lower numbered functions. Thus

FI

cannot be a function of another user defmed function but

F5

could be a function of any of the first four.

CONTINUOUS ENTRY OFF/ON (CEO

&

CE1)

corresponds to the MARKER and EN1RY modes of the knob where CEO

=

MARKER and

CEI

=

ENTRY.

3-22

Remote Opera t i on

Bus Messages

Source

Function

Hp·IB code

Function Hp·IB code

SWEEP TYPE

Linear Sweep

Mernate Sweep

Log Sweep

Amplttude Sweep

CW

Discrete Sweep

Sweep Direction Up

Sweep Direction Down

SWEEP MODE

Continuous

Single Sweep

Manual Sweep

Manual Frequency (entry)

Manual Amplitude (entry)

Marker ... Manual

SWEEP TlME

Sweep

Time

(entry)

Step Time (entry)

Sample Time (entry)

FREQUENCY

Source Frequency (entry)

Start Frequency (entry)

Stop Frequency (entry)

SM2

SM3

MFR

MAM

MTM

STM '"

SWT

SMT

MSR

STY "

ST1

S12

ST3

ST4

STS

ST6

SUP

SDN

SMD*

SM1

FRO ..

SFR

FRA

FRB

Freq Swp Res 401 ptS/span

Return

Full Sweep

Freq Step SiZe (entry)

AMPLITUDE

Source Amplttude (entry)

Amp Step SiZe (entry)

Clear Trip, Source

Start Amplitude (entry)

Stop Amplttude (entry)

StepS/Sweep menu

Number of steps

Number of steps

Number of steps

Number of steps

Full Sweep

TRIGGER MODE

Free Run

=

=

=

=

6

1 1

21

51

Number of steps

=

1 01

Number of steps

=

201

Number of steps

=

401

Return

Line Trigger

External Trigger

Center Frequency (entry) FRC Immediate

TG4

Frequency Span (entry) FRS

SWEEP TRIGGER TRG/

SWEEP RESET RESET

TRG

RST

FRC Step siZe (entry) CFS

Sweep Resolution menu SRL "

SOURCE SUFFIX UNITS

Freq Swp Res 51 ptsispan RS1 dBm DaM

Freq Swp Res 101 ptsispan RS2 dBV (nns) DaV

Freq Swp Res 201 ptsispan RS3

Vo� (rms) v milli-Vott (rms) MV

•

Use not required. The only function of thiS code IS to display a menu (n bus diagnostics are on).

NS1

NS2

NS3

NS4

NS5

CTS

AMA

AMB

NST "

RS4

RET "

FSW

FST

AMP"

SAM

AST

NS6

NS7

RET

•

FSW

TRM "

TG1

TG2

TG3

3-23

Remote Operation

Bus Messages

Function micro-Vott (rms) nano-Vott (rms) seconds milliseconds

MHz kHz

Hz exponent

HP-IB code

UV

NV

SEC

MSC

MHZ

KHZ

HZ

E

• Use not required. The only function of this code is to display a menu (n bus diagnostics are on).

3-24

Remote Operation

Bus Messages

STEP TIME (SMT) is a data entry prefix for sample time used for amplitude sweeps. The default value for this parameter is 0.05 seconds per step:

Example:

1 0 OUTPUT 71 1 ;"ST 4;SMT .1 SEC;" ! ST 4 is amptd sweep

SAMPLE TIME (MSR) is a data entry prefix for sample time for the manual sweep mode and

CW sweep type. The default value for this parameter is 0.05 seconds per sample.

Example:

1 0 OUTPUT 71 1 ; "SM3;MSR .l SEC;" ! SM3

=

Manual sweep mode

FREQUENCY STEP SIZE (FST) is a data entry prefix used only when the source is operated at a single frequencies as with CW or amplitude sweep types or the manual frequency sweep mode.

TRIGGER AND RESET (TAG & RST) Where the front panel has one key, labeled functioning as both trigger (for single sweeps) and reset, the

TRIG/RESET,

HP-m has separate commands for each function. Sweep control is done the same in remote as local. RST resets the sweep in all sweep modes, and TRG may be used to trigger single sweeps. RST also initiates settling even if more commands are waiting in the

HP-m buffer. Other commands do not initiate settling until the command buffer is empty. RST is useful for decreasing the time required to prepare for a sweep by overlapping settling and other

HP-m operations.

3-25

Remote Operation

Bus Messages

Example:

1 0

2 0

30

40

50

60

70

150

160

1 7 0

1 8 0

1 9 0

200

210

220

8 0

90

100

110

120

130

140

230

240

250

260

270

2 8 0

2 9 0

300

310

320

330

340

350

' RST ' , ' TRG' U s e of Reset and Trigger commands

This examp le program will take measurements at 1 , 2 , 3 , 4 , and

5 MHz and dump the data to the compute r .

First , set up the instrument state and take a measurement

OUTPUT 7 11 ; " PR ; ST5 ; SM2 ; S FR 1 MHZ ; TKM ; "

FOR I -2 TO 5

LOOP

EXIT IF BINANO ( SPOLL ( 7 1 1 ) , 4)

END

LOOP

OUTPUT 7 1 1 ; " S FR ; "

; 1 ;

"MHZ ; RST ; OM1 ; TRG ; "

NEXT

I

Set up 1 s t freq

4-

B2 of S tatus Byte

Loop until Meas is

Complete

S tart settling for next meas and dump data for previous meas . This allows settling to occur during the data dump

PRINT "MARKER MAGNITUDE AT" ; 1 - 1 ; "MHz -" ; Mkr_Mag ;

LOOP

EXIT I F BINANO ( S POLL ( 7 11 ) , 4 )

END LOOP

OUTPUT 7 1 1 ; " OMl ; "

ENTER 7 l l ; Mkr_Mag

PRINT "MARKER MAGNITUDE AT" ; 1 - 1 ; "MHz -"

END

"dB"

When this FOR/NEXT loop is done 5 MHz has been set up but no data dumped .

Wait for Meas

Complete , again

Dump 5 MHz data

3-26

Remote Operation

Bus Messages

Receiver

Fu n ctio n

RESOLUTION BW

Aesolution BW

1

Hz

Aesolution BW 1 0 Hz

Aesolution BW 1 00 Hz

Aesolution BW 1 kHz

Auto Bandwidth

Off

Auto Bandwidth On

AVERAGE

Averaging

Off

N=4

N=8

N = 1 6

N=32

N=64

N = 1 28

N=2S6

ATTENUATION

Attenuation A = 0 dB

Attenuation R = 20 dB



Attenuation B = 0 dB

Attenuation B = 20 dB

Impedance R = SOQ

Impedance R

=

1 MQ

Impedance A = SOQ

Impedance A = 1 MQ

Impedance B = SOQ

Impedance B = 1 M Q

Clear Trip, Receiver

Hp·IB Code

AB2

IR1

IRZ

IA1

IAZ

IB1

AV7

ATT *

AR1

AR2

AA1

AA2

AB1

AV1

AV2

AV3

AV4

AV5

AV6

RBW ·

BW1

BWZ

BW3

BW4

AUO

AU1

AVE "

AVO

IB2

CTR

Function

LENGTH

Length R (entry)

Length R

Off

Length R On

Length A (entry)

Length A

Off

Length A On

Length B (entry)

Length B

Off

Length B On

Length Step Size (entry)

RECEIVER SUFFIX UNITS meters centimeters seconds milliseconds microseconds nanoseconds exponent

•

Use not required. The only function of tIlis code is to display a menu (ff bus diagnostics are on).

MET

CM

SEC

MSC

USC

NSC

E

Hp·IB Code

LNB

LBD

LB1

LNS

LEN *

LNR

LRO

LR1

LNA

LAO

LA1

3-27

Remote Operation

Bus Messages

Instrument State

Function

HP·IB Code

Function

SPECIAL FUNCTIONS

Confidence test menu

Contidence test channel R

Contidence test channel A

Contidence test channel B

Return

Beeper off

Beeper on

Service Diagnostics menu

Source Leveling off

Source Leveling on

Settling TIme off

Settling TIme on

SynthesiZer Diag off

Synthesizer Diag on

Display Test Pattern

Trace Memory Test

Fast Processor Test

VO Test

More Serv Diag menu

Display Memory Test

Software Revision message

Return

S·Parameters

Off

S·Parameters On

SEO

SE1

SYO

SY1

BP1

SDG *

SLO

SL1

SPC *

SLP

STR

STA

STB

RET *

BPO

DTP

TMT

FPl

PRT

MOR *

DST

SRV

RET *

SPO

SP1

RECALL INSTRUMENT STATE

Recall old (last) state

Recall register

1

Recall register 2

Recall register

3

Recall register 4

Recall register 5

INSTRUMENT PRESET

. PLOT MENU . . ..

Plot all

Plot trace 1

Plot trace 2

Plot graticule

Plot characters

Plot trace 1 marker

Plot trace 2 marker

Contigure Plot menu

Trace 1 linetype (entry)

Trace 2 1inetype (entry)

Trace 1 pen number (entry)


Graticule pen no. (entry)

Pen speed fast (max)

Pen speed slow

Set plot contig. to defau�

. SAVE INSTRUMENT STATE

Save state in register 1



SAY *

SV1

SV2

Plotter address (entry)

Return

SV3

Save state in register

4

SV4

Save state in register 5 SV5

•

Use not reqUired. The only function of thiS code i s to display a menu (� bus diagnostics are on).

IPR

PLM'"

PLA

Pl1

Pl2

PlG

PLC

PM1

PM2

CPl *

T1 l

T2L

T1 P

T2P

PGP

PNM

PNS

PlD

HBP

RET *

Hp·ID Code

RCL ·

RLS

RC1

RC2

RC3

RC4

RC5

3·28

Plotting Via HP-IB

HP-ill PLOT commands are a special programming case. To control a plotter directly, the

HP 3577 A must become a talker. Only one talker is allowed on the bus at a time so the controller must be programmed to release the bus. The HP 3577 A must be manually configured with TALK

ONLY OFF, as with any remote control operation. The following examples execute a PLOT ALL command. They assume that the analyzer's address is eleven and the plotter's address is thirty.

Example for the HP

9000

Series 300 computers:

Remote Operation

Bus Messages

1 0 SEND 7; UNL MTA LISTEN 1 1 DATA "PLA" UNL MTA TALK 1 1

LISTEN 30 DATA

SEND 7 selects the HP-IB interface at address seven

UNLunlisten, unaddresses all listeners

MT A

my talk address, controller addresses itself to talk, this command will also unaddress all talkers

USTEN 1 1

addresses device at address eleven to listen

DATA "PLA" outputs the characters in quotes on the HP-IB

UNLunlisten

MTAmy talk address

TALK 1 1 - addresses device at address eleven to talk

LISTEN 30- addresses device at address thirty to listen

DATA releases the bus for the data transfer (Series 300)

If the HP 3577 A is unaddressed as the talker by the bus controller during a plot, the plotting process can be resumed if the HP 3577A is readdressed to talk and was NOT addressed to listen (with a byte transmitted) in the interim. It is the responsibility of the bus controller to transmit its UNT ALK command so that the handshake in progress is completed and data is not lost. Actions that will terminate a PLOT are: addressing the HP 3577 A to USTEN (and sending a data byte), sending a

Universal Clear, sending a Selective Device Clear, or an invalid handshake.

If the plot is aborted via the HP-ill, the plotter pen is left in the carriage at its most recent position.

If the plot is aborted from the front panel, the pen is returned to its stall and the carriage moved to the PI position, allowing full view of the plot on plotters that roll the paper in and out for one axis of movement.

PEN SPEED.

The bus code PNM (pen speed fast) allows the plotter to run at its maximum

(default) velocity. This speed is dependent on the plotter used. The bus code PNS (pen speed slow) causes the plotter pen velocity to be ten centimeters per second.

3-29

Remote Operation

Bus Messages

HP-IB Only Commands

Function NP·IB code Function

Settling TIme Entry

Dump register A

Dump register B

Dump register R

Dump register 01

Dump register 02

Dump register 03

Dump register 04

DDl

DD2

DD3

DD4

STE

DRA

DRB

DRR

Characters on

Annotation off

Annotation on

Annotation Clear

Menu off

Menu on

Menu clear

ASCII data format

Dump (race 1

Dump trace 2

Dump mari<er 1

Dump marker 2

Dump marker 1 position


Dump state (learn mode out)

Dump status

Dump average number

Dump key or knob

Dump characters

Dump Instrument

ID

Load register A

Load register B

Load register R

Load register 01

LRA

LRB

LRR

LDl

DAN

DKY

DCN

ID?

DTl

DTZ

DMl

DM2

MPl

MP2 lMO

DMS

64 bit

IEEE data format

32 bit HP 3577B binary

Bus diagnostics mode ell

Bus diagnostics on, fast

Bus diagnostics on, slow

Enter Menu (user defined)

Enter Annotation

Enter Graphics

Clear Keyboard Buffer

Take Measurement

Set SRO Mask (entry)

Error Reporting mode 0




Send SRO

Load register 02

Load register 03

LD2

LD3

Load register 04

Load state (Ieam mode in)

Graticule

Off

Graticule On

Characters ell

LD4

LMI

GRD

GRl

CND

•

Use not required. The only function of this code is to display a menu (H bus diagnostics are on).

NP·IB code

FMl

FM2

FM3

BDO

BDl

BD2

ENM

ENA

ENG

CHl

AND

ANl

ANC

MNO

MNl

MNC

ERl

ER2

ER3

SRQ

CKB

TKM

SOM

ERD

3·30

-� -:

Remote Operation

Bus Messages

The following two example programs demonstrate methods used to recognize the end of a plot process. Either of two bits in the Status Byte are used to trigger SRQ; BO (End Of Transfer) or

B4

(Ready).

100

110

120

130

140

3 5 0

360

370

380

390

400

Controller responds to plot completion by polling the bus

CONTROL lines (SRQ-1024) pulled by the ins trument ' s EOT b i t .

150

160

1 7 0

180

1 9 0

200

210

Adrs-71 1

Plotter-70S

Done_b it-1

OUTPUT Adrs ; " SQM" ; Done_b i t

HP 3 5 7 7A address

Plotter address

End of Transfer b i t (BO) - 1

Unmask EOT b it

2 2 0

2 3 0

240

REPEAT

X- SPOLL(Adrs)

UNTIL NOT BINAND (X, Done_b i t )

SPOLL to clear previous EOT bit

2 5 0

260

270

Next , start the plot .

S END 7 ; UNL MTA LISTEN Adrs MOD 100 DATA " PLA" LISTEN Plotter MOD 100

TALK Adrs MOD 100 DATA

280

290 DISP ·WAITING FOR PLOT COMPLETION"

300

310

320

330

340

LOOP

STATUS 7 , 7 ; X

EXIT I F BINAND ( X , 1024)

END LOOP

Read bus control and data lines

Check for SRQ asserted

P l o t _done : DISP " PLOT IS COMPLETE . "

BEEP

X- SPOLL (Adrs )

OUTPUT Adrs ; " SQM 0 "

Clear SRQ

Reset mask to default

END

3-31

Remote Operation

Bus Messages

370

380

390

400

410

420

430

440

450

460

470

100

110

120

Controller responds to plo't completion using interrupts and the ins trument ' s ' Ready ' bit

130

140 lSO

160

Adrs-71l

Plotter-70S

HP 3 5 77A address plotter addres s

' Ready ' -1 6

Done_b i t-16

170

180 OUTPUT Adrs ; "SQM" ; Done_bit

Unmask Ready b i t

190

200

210

220

230

240

OUTPUT Adrs ; uPLA"

REPEAT

X- S POLL(Adrs)

UNTIL NOT BINAND ( X , Doneb it)

Get ready t o plot . Plot won ' t start until the HP 3 S77A is addressed to talk

SPOLL to get rid of previous Ready

250

260

270

280

290

Next , enable the SRQ interrupt and s tart the plot .

ENABLE INTR 7 ; 2

300 ON INTR 7 GOTO Plot_done

310 plotting

SEND 7 ; UNL MTA LISTEN Plotter

Allow Service Request to interrup t

Turn interrupt ' ON '

MOD 100 TALK Adrs MOD 100 DATA ! Start

320

330

340

350

360

DISP "WAITING FOR PLOT COMPLETION"

LOOP

Wait indefinitely for plot completion

END LOOP

Plot done : DISP " PLOT IS COMPLETE . "

BEEP

X-SPOLL(Adrs )

OUTPUT Adrs ; " SQM 0 "

END

Clear the interrupt condition

Resets mask to default condition

3-32

Remote Operation

Bus Messages

SETTLING TIME ENTRY (STE). Settling time may be entered over the

HP-lB.

Each bandwidth has a settling time associated with it. When a new bandwidth is selected its associated settling time will be active. These new values for settling time are not saved with instrument state and will be cleared by a PRESET or turning off power. The default values for settling time are shown in the following table:

Res BW

=

1 kHz

Res BW = 1 00 Hz

Res BW = 1 0 Hz

Res BW = 1 Hz

22 ms

55 ms

370 ms

3.707 s

To enter a new value for the settling time parameter, select the resolution bandwidth before entering the new settling time. Settling time values may range from one millisecond to 16.383 seconds. For zero settling time, turn settling time off (SED). The current value of the settling time parameter will appear in the data entry block if bus diagnostics mode one is used as follows:

Example: OUTPUT 71 1 ; "BW3;BD1 ;STE 3 SEC;"

DUMP/LOAD REGISTER. The receiver input registers R,

A, and

B, and the storage registers

Dl,

D2, D3, and

D4 contain twice as many numbers as there are points in the active sweep resolution.

Each point on the trace is derived from a register bin containing a complex number (represented by two real numbers). In the default sweep resolution of

401 points per sweep there will be

401 complex numbers. The HP 3577 A will dump 401 real and 401 imaginary numbers in the form real

(bin one), imaginary (bin one), real (bin two), imaginary (bin two),... The same methods apply for the "number of steps" sweep resolution used in amplitude sweeps. Register I/O may use any of the three data formats FMl, FM2, or FM3. The example that follows shows how register data may be dumped to the computer/controller and loaded into the HP 3577 A in each of the three data formats.

3-33

Remote Operation

Bus Messages

Example:

10

20

30

40

5 0

60

7 0

7 5

80

85

9 0

100

110

120

130

140

Dump and Load Registers using all 3 data transfer formats

REAL Real_arrayl ( 0 : 80 l ) , Real_array2 ( 0 : 10 1 )

INTEGER Integer_array ( 0 : 3 , 0 : 400)

ASSIGN @Na TO 7ll ; FORMAT ON

OUTPUT @Na ; " IPR ; SM2 ; TKM ; " array of 401 x 4 elements

Na - Ne twork Analyzer

TKM - take measurement

**********************************************************

FMl - the ASCII data format

Next , Dump Register R using FMl

OUTPUT @Na ; " FMl ; DRR ; "

ENTER @Na ; Real_arrayl (*)

DRR - Dump Register R

2 5 0

2 5 5

260

270

280

2 9 0

300

310

320

330

340

350

360

370

380

3 9 0

400

410

420

430

1 5 0

160

1 7 0

Real_arrayl now contains the real and imaginary parts of

401 complex numbers . Next , load the data into s torage register Dl .

1 8 0

1 9 0 OUTPUT @ Na ; " LDl ; " , Real_arrayl(*) !

LDl - Load Register Dl

200

210

!

Register Dl now contains the data held in Real_arrayl

2 2 0

2 3 0

240

245

OUTPUT @Na ; "TR2 ; DF7 ; ID1 ; "

PAUSE

!

Display register Dl

*******************************************************************

FM2 - 64 bit floating point binary (HP Series 200 computer real number) data format . Next , dump register

A using FM2 . Note the use of reduced sweep resolution.

OUTPUT @Na ; "RS 1 ; !KM ; FM2 ; DRA ; "

Enter the leading bytes (#1 ) into an unus ed s tring

ENTER @Na USING "# , 2A" ; Junk$

Enter the register data in data format FM2 :

ASSIGN @Na ; FORMAT OFF

ENTER @Na; Real_array 2 ( * )

ASSIGN @Na ; FORMAT ON

Changing sweep res c lears registers , so new

TKM is required

FORMAT mus t b e OFF to use data format FM2

440

!

Real_array2 now contains the real and imaginary parts o f

3-34

Remote Operation

Bus Messages

450 ! 5 1 complex numbers . Load .t:his dat:a int:o regist:er 02 :

460

470

480

490

500

510

OUTPUT @ Na ; "LD2 ;

Ill ; "


;

OUTPUT @Na ; Real_array2 C * )


Last: " ; " prevents CR/LF

Binary data must be preceded by

"Ill "

Register 02 now contains t:he data from Real_array2

520

530

540

5 5 0

OUTPUT @Na ; "TR2 ; ID2 ; ASL ; "

PAUSE

! Display data in D2

670

680

6 9 0

700

710

720

5 5 5

5 6 0

**********************************************************************

5 6 5

5 7 0

FM3 - 3 2 b i t float:ing point b inary used b y t:he H P 3 5 77A

580

590 internal processor . There are 4 bytes per real number in data format: 3 . Next , take a measurement and store to

Dl :

600

610

620

OUTPUT @Na ; "RS4 ; TRl ; IBR ; TKM ; SDl ; ASL ; "

630 ! Now Dump Dl in data format: FM3 :

640

6 5 0

6 60

OUTPUT @Na ; " FM3 ; 00 ; "

Enter the leading bytes then enter the data .

C" Ill " ) into an unused s tr ing

ENTER

@Na US ING "1I , 2A" ; J unk$

ENTER

@Na USING

" % , W"

; Integer_array (*)

!

401 x 2x 4 bytes

7 30

740

750

7 6 0

770

780

7 9 0

Integer_array now contains the real and imaginary parts

If 401 complex numbers , each part filling a pair o f

Series 200 Integers .

OUTPUT @ Na ; "LDI ;

OUTPUT @ Na USING

Load this data into register D2 :

#1 ; "

"if , W"

; Integer_array

Binary dat:a mus t be preceded by

"/}l

"

800 ! Register Dl now contains the data from Integer_array

810

820

830

OUTPUT @Na ; "TR2 ; IOl ; DF5 ; ASL ; " ! Display Dl as phase (DFS)

840 END

3-35

Remote Operation

Bus Messages

DUMP TRACE. Traces may be dumped but not loaded.

A trace is made up of real numbers as defined under the INPUT and DISPLAY FUNCTION keys and will have the same number of data points as defined in the current sweep resolution. This data is dumped using any of the three data formats with the following units:

Display Function

Log Mag

Un Mag

Phase

Polar

Delay

Real,lmag

Absolute Units

(e.g

.•

INPUT

=

R) dBV

Volts

Degrees

Volts

Seconds

Volts

Relative Units

(e.g., INPUT

=

B

/R

) dB

Units

Degrees

Units

Seconds

Units

Phase trace data will be offset by the active Phase Reference Level. Delay data will be meaningless in some of the beginning and end bins due to the nature of the measurement. The number of bins affected will depend on the aperture and sweep resolution. When the

HP 3577 A dumps a delay trace, it will output large negative numbers in those bins whose data is thus affected. The example that follows shows how a trace may be dumped to the computer/controller.

Example:

10

150

160

170

180

190

200

210

220

2 30

240

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

85

9 0

9 5

100

110

120

130

140

Dump Trace example demons trating use of all three data transfer formats .

REAL Real_arrayl ( 0 : 400 ) , Real_array2 ( 0 : 50 )

INTEGER Integer_array ( 0 : l , 0 : 400)

ASSIGN @Na TO 7l1 ; FORMAT ON

OUTPUT @Na ; IPR; SM2 ; TKM ; " array o f 401 x 2 elements

Na - Network Analyzer

TKM - take measurement

***********************************************************************

FMl - the ASClI data forma t .

Next , dump trace one

OUTPUT @ Na ; " FMl ; DTl ; "

ENTER @Na ; Real_arrayl (*)

PAUSE

Real

DTl

dump trace one arrayl now contains 40 1 real numbers from trace one

************************************************************************

FM2 - 64 bit floating point binary (HP 9000 Series 300 computer real number) data format . Next , dump trace two using FM2 Note the use of reduced sweep res .

3-36

Remote Operation

Bus Messages

250

260

OUTPUT @Na ; "RS 1 ; TKM; FM2 ; DT2 ; " !

RSl - 5 1 pts/span

270

!

Enter the leading bytes (

"

280

290

300

310

320

330

# 1 " ) into array elements 0

ENTER @Na USING "fl , 2 ( B ) " ; Real_array2 (0) , Real_array2 ( 1 )

Prepare for a Series 300 internal real number format data transfer and perform the entry .

&

1

340

350

360

370

380

400

410

420

430

440

450

460

470


ENTER @ Na ; Real_array2 ( * )


PAUSE

FORMAT must be OFF to use data format FM2

Note that array e lements

************************************************************************

FM3 - 32 bit floating point binary used by the HP 3 5 77A internal proce s s o r . There are 4 bytes per real number data format 3 . Next , take a measurement and dump trace 1

550

560

570

OUTPUT @Na ; "RS4 ; TKM ; FM3 ; DIl ; "

480

490

!

Enter the

500

510

5 20

#1 as before , then the data.

ENTER @Na USING "fl , 2A" ; J unk$

ENTER @Na USING

" % , W"

;

Integer_array (*)

5 3 0

540 Integer_array now contains 401 real numbers from trace one ; each real number ( 32 bits) filling a pair of Series

200 Integers ( 1 6 bits ) .

580

END

3-37

Remote Operation

Bus Messages

Dump Marker, (DM1 8. DM2) Except for the polar display function, this is Y-axis information for one bin. The units will match those of the trace dumps shown in the table on page 3-39. If the display function is two, numbers will be output when a marker is dumped. These two numbers will be real and imaginary or magnitude and phase, respectively, depending on units selected for the marker. Any of the three data formats FM!,

FM2, or FM3 may be used. The example that follows shows how a marker may be dumped and displayed.

Example: Non-polar display function

10

20

30

40

OUTPUT 7 1 1 ; " I PR ; TKM ; FMl ; DM1 ; "

ENTER 7 11 ; Marker_amp

DISP "Magnitude -" ; Marker_amp

END

DM1 - Dump Marker one

10

20

30

40

5 0

Example: Polar display function

OUTPUT 7 1 1 ; " I PR ; DF4 ; TKM ; FM1 ; DM1 ; "

ENTER 7 1 1 ; Marker_amp , Marker_phase

DISP "Magnitude -" ; Marker_amp

DISP " Phase - " ; Marker_phase

END

DF4 - polar

Marker Position (MP1

8.

MP2) dumps

X-axis

information for the appropriate trace marker. Any of the three data formats FMl,

FM2,

or FM3 may be used. The information units are:

UN SWP

LOC Swp

ALTSWP

AMP SWP

CW

Frequency

Frequency

Frequency

Source amplitude

Frequency

3·38

Remote Operation

Bus Messages

Example:

10

20

30

40

OUTPUT 7 1 1 ; " IPR ; TKM ; MP 1 ; "

ENTER 711 ; Mkr_freq

DISP IIMarker frequency

END

-

11

;

Mkr_freq ,

"

HZ "

Note

"

If the frequency span is 0 Hz and the sweep time is less than 1000 seconds, the marker position is in units of time.

Dump and Load Instrument State.

LMO (learn mode out) dumps the instrument state out in binary to be stored by the computer.

1 100 bytes will always be dumped including the first two bytes which are always #1. #1 is used to indicate that binary data is to follow.

LMI

(learn mode in) loads instrument state in binary. It is used to configure the

HP 3577A to a specific instrument state. This state should be configured on the

HP 3577 A and dumped to the controller using

LMO.

Data dumped with

LMO should not be changed outside the HP

3577 A

It is not possible to configure the instrument state with a computer.

LMI can be used to speed up reconfiguration if a large status change is necessary between tests.

It is recommended that the entire

1 1 00 bytes (including the #1) be kept together after the dump as the same information needs to be returned to the

HP 3577 A when the

LMI is used. The example that follows shows how to dump instrument state to a computer/controller and load instrument state back to the

HP 3577 A

3·39

Remote Operation

Bus Messages

Example:

10

20

30

40

5 0

60

70

80

90

100

110

120

130

140

150

160

170

180

190

200

210

' LMO ' , Learn Mode Out ( dump instrument state)

' LMI ' , Learn Mode In ( load instrument state)

INTEGER Integer array ( 0 : 54 9 )

ASSIGN @Na T O 7 1 1 ; FORMAT ON

ENTER @Na USING

PAUSE

"

%

,

W"

' ; Integer_array ( * )

Array of 5 5 0 1 6 b i t words

1100 bytes will be dumped, 2 bytes per element of

Integer array . Next , configure state and dump i t .

OUTPUT @Na ; " I PR ; TR2 ; DF5 ; FRA 1 MHZ ; SAM 15 DBM ; ST3 ; LMO ; "

Integer array now c ontains 1100 bytes of instrument s tate data . This data may be reloaded as follows :

OUTPUT @Na ; " IPR ; LMI ; "

OUTPUT @ Na USING

END

" fI , W"

; Integer_array (*)

Dump Status (DMS) This command dumps the Status Byte and two more bytes of instrument status information plus a screen message (the Serial Poll dumps only the Status Byte). In the following table, B7 is the most significant bit and BO is the least significant bit. All data is in the

ASCII format.

3-40

Remote Operation

Bus Messages

DUMP STATUS (DMS)

This command dumps the Status Byte and two more bytes of instrument status information plus a screen message (the Serial Poll dumps only the Status Byte). In the following table, B7 is the most significant bit and BO is the least significant bit. All data is in the

ASCII format.

BYrE I -The STATUS BYrE

B7 - Not used

B6 - RQS (require service)

B5 - Error bit

B4 - Ready for HP-IB command

B3 - Key pressed

B2 - Measurement complete

BI - Data available

BO - Data transfer complete

BYrE 2

B7 - Power on

B6 - Source tripped

B5 - Reference unlocked

B4 - No external reference

B3 - Input A overload

B2 - Input B overload

BI - Input R overload

BO - Input tripped

BYrE 3

B7 - Settling

B6 - Waiting for trigger (TRG)

B5 - Waiting for external trigger or line sync

B4 - Sweeping

B3 - End of sweep has occurred

B2 - Not used

B l - Not used

BO - Not used

3-41

Remote Operation

Bus Messages

ASCII STRING

A 26-character string containing an error, warning, or general information screen message. The error reporting mode selected will determine the level of message (none, error only, warning and error, or all) that will appear here. Refer to MASKING THE STATUS BYTE for more on error reporting modes, and to Appendix D for a complete listing of these messages.

Bits 0, I, 2,

3, 5,

and 6 of byte two will cause error messages when they become set. If the error bit is unmasked and more than one of these conditions exist, the first to occur

will

be the only message dumped. If the error bit is masked, DMS will dump the most recent message. The following example program was run immediately after having preset the

HP 3577

A and pressed a numeric key in the DATA ENTRY section:

Example:

10 DIM A$ [ 10 0 ]

2 0 OUTPUT 7 1 1 ; " DMS "

30

40

50

ENTER 7 1 1 ; A$

DISP "Response to DHS command i s " '

;

A$ ; " , "

END

Response to DMS command is

, 16 , 0 , 16 , ENTRY UNDEFINED '

Dumping status will clear the error string to all blanks. It also clears the Power on, RQS, and (if no permanent hardware errors remain set) the error bit. Its effect on the Status Byte is the same as a serial poll.

DUMP AVERAGE NUMBER (DAN) dumps the number of sweeps or samples taken since averaging was turned on. This number is not the user selection, N. The ASCII equivalent of the average number is returned terminated by <CRJLF> and <EOI>. The data format for DAN is a/ways ASCII. The maximum value returned is 9999.

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

Example:

OUTPUT 7 1 1 ; " IPR ; AV5 ; "

WAIT 5

OUTPUT 7 1 1 ; "DAN ; "

ENTER 7 1 1 ; Avg_no

DISP Avg_no

GOTO 2 0

END

AV5 - averaging on eN - 64)

"

,

3-42

Remote Operation

Bus

Messages

CLEAR KEYBOARD BUFFER & DUMP KEY (CKB & DKY) These allow the controller to clear the keyboard buffer (which will hold as many as ten keypresses) and monitor key presses and/or knob rotation. Note that an SRQ may be generated by front panel keys (see STATUS BYrE).

CKB clears the key buffer of key presses and the knob counter to zero. The key buffer holds a maximum of six key presses. The knob counter contains the first count, other than zero, taken by the counter since the last CKB command.

DKY dumps two numbers in ASCll format. The first number corresponds to a front panel hardkey and will range from 0 to 51 inclusive. The following table shows the keys and their corresponding number. If there has been no key pressed since the last CKB command, a - I will be returned. The second number is the knob counter which contains a number between - 15 and + 15; negative numbers indicate counter-clockwise rotation and positive numbers indicate clockwise rotation. Zero indicates no rotation. The following example shows how the CKB and the

DKY commands are used. Also, refer to the example for ENTER MENU and ENTER ANNOTATION.

Example:

10

20

30

40

50

60

7 0

80

OUTPUT 711 ; " CKB ; "

OUTPUT 711 ; " DKY , "

ENTER 7 1 1 ; Key , Knob

IF Key- - 1 AND Knob-O

THEN

20

DISP "Key-" ; Key ; " and Knob - " ; Knob

OUTPUT 7 1 1 ; " CKB ; "

GOTO 20

END

Enter two numbers

3-43

Remote Operation

Bus Messages

Number

0

1

2

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

1 7

1 8

6

7

3

4

5

B

9

1 0

23

24

25

26

1 9

20

21

22

DKY Command Correlation between key pressed and number returned.

Key Name zero one two three four five six seven eight nine decimal minus backspace softkey 1 (top) sottkey 2

Sottkey 3 softkey 4 softkey 5 softkey 6 softkey 7 softkey B

TRIG/RESET

ENTRY OFF

LOCAL

MARKER/ENTRY KEY

INCREMENT

DECREMENT

46

47

48

49

50

51

3B

39

40

4 1

42

43

44

45

32

33

34

35

36

37

Number

27

28

29

30

31

Key Name

TRACE 1

TRACE 2

FREQ

AMPTD

TRIG MODE

SWEEP lYPE

Swp MODE

Swp TIME

DEFINE MATH

STORE DATA

DISPLAY FCTN

INPUT

SCALE

MKR

MEASR CAL

(not used)

SAVE

RECALL

SPCL FCTN

RES BW

AVG

ATIEN

LENGTH

PLOT

MKR ...

3-44

Remote Operation

Bus Messages

DUMP CHARACTERS (DC H)

Dumps the alphanumeric characters on the screen to determine values of certain parameters. Only inforniation presently on the screen is returned on the bus. As soon as the instrument is addressed to talk the following ASCII information will be returned if the display is NOT in polar format:

I . Reference level for trace 1

2. Amplitude level for trace 1

3. Reference level for trace 2

4.

Amplitude level for trace 2

5.

Marker frequency for trace 1

6. Marker amplitude for trace 1

7. Marker frequency for trace 2

8. Marker amplitude for trace 2

9.

Start frequency for trace 1

10. Stop frequency for trace 1

1 1 . Start frequency for trace 2


13. Source amplitude (if not in alternate sweep)

14. Delay aperture (if DSPLY FCTN is DELAY) for the active trace

15. Entry block information (if bus diagnostics are enabled)

If the display format is POLAR, then the following ASCII information is returned:

1 . Full scale level

2. Phase reference

3. Reference position

4. <null>

5.

Marker frequency

6. Marker amplitude

7. Marker phase

8.

<null>

9.

Start frequency for trace 1


1 1. Start frequency for trace 2


13.

Source amplitude

(if

not in alternate sweep)

14.

<null>

15. Entry block information

Each field will be separated by a comma; the last field will be delimited by a carriage returnJIinefeed.

If the field is not defined currently on the CRT, an empty field will be returned.

3-45

Remote Operation

Bus Messages

Example

400

410

420

430

440

450

10

20

30

160

170

180

190

200

210

220

100

110

120

130

140

150

230

240

250

2 60

40

50

60

70

80

90

270

280

290

300

310

3 20

3 30

340

350

360

370

380

390

' DCH ' , Dump Characters program

DIM Bfr$ ( 1 : 15 ) [ 4 0 ] , U$ [ 300 ] , E$ [ 2 6 ]

Adrs-711

ASSIGN @Adrs TO 7 1 1

-POLAR DISPLAY FUNCTION

OUTPUT @Adrs ; " l PR ; STl ; TRl ; DF4 ; TKM ; DMS ; "

ENTER @Adrs ; X , Y , Z , E$

OUTPUT @Adrs ; "ASL ; "

WAIT . 1

GOSUB Get characters

PRINT "Full scale : " ; Bfr$ ( 1 )

PRINT "Phase Reference : " ; Bfr$ ( 2 )

PRINT "Reference pos ition: " ; Bfr$ ( 3 )

PRINT

PRINT "Marker frequency : " ; Bfr$ ( 5 )

PRINT "Marker ampli tude : " ; Bfr$ ( 6 )

PRINT "Marker phase : " ; Bfr$ ( 7 )

PRINT

PRINT " S tart frequency : " ; Bfr$ ( 9 )

PRINT " S top frequency : " ; Bfr$ (lO)

PRINT " S ource amplitude : " ; Bfr$ ( 1 3 )

STOP

END

Status read to make sure all c ommands have been processed

Auto scale the screen display

Allow time to update picture

Get characters :

OUTPUT @Adrs ; "DCH ; "

ENTER @Adrs ; U$

FOR 1-1 TO 15

I F POS (U$ , " , " ) THEN

Bfr$ ( l ) - U$ [ 1 , POS (U$ , " , " ) - 1 ]

U$- U$ [ POS (U$ , " , " ) +l ]

ELSE

Bfr$ ( I ) -U$

END I F

NEXT I

RETURN

& sweep is done

3-46

Remote Operation

Bus Messages

Result:

Full scale: FULL SCALE 2.5000

Phase reference: PHASE REF 0.0 deg.

Reference position: REF POSN 0.0 deg.

Marker frequency: MARKER 100 050 000.000 Hz

Marker amplitude: MAG(S21) 646.58E-3

Marker phase: PHASE(S21) - 45.208 deg.

Start frequency: START 100 000.000

Hz

Stop frequency: STOP 200 000 000.000 Hz

Source amplitude: AMPlD 15.0 dBm

DUMP PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION (ID?)

The HP 3577A responds with the following ASCII character string:

HP 3577A, TESTSET (or <NULL» < Software revision>

The "TESTS ET" string is present if the HP 35677 A or HP 35677B S-Parameter Test Sets are connected to the HP 3577 A

BUS DIAGNOSTIC MODES There are three bus diagnostic modes. They are:

I .

BDO

=

Bus Diagnostics Off, used for best programming speed.

2. BDI

=

Bus Diagnostics On, Fast; menus appear, bus codes appear on screen for three seconds after an error

is

detected.

3. BD2

=

Bus Diagnostics On, Slow; menus appear, bus codes appear and are decoded at the rate of one per second.

BD] and BD2 are useful for debugging programs written to control the HP 3577

A

When on, this mode will sequence through all menus and update the display as if the HP 3577 A were being operated from the front panel.

DATA FORMATS. The HP 3577 A offers three data formats used to transfer certain types of data on the bus. The data types that make use of all three formats are trace data, register data, marker data, and marker position.

FM1 is the ASCII data format. The ASCII floating point format will always transfer fifteen characters in the form - 12.3456789E +03 for each number (i.e., leading spaces or zeros are not suppressed). In FMI data dumps, the HP 3577A outputs ASCII data points separated by commas and carriage return line feed (CRJLF) indicates the end of record. When transferring data, the complete set of data is referred to as a record. A record is composed of data and an end of record terminator. When loading data the HP 3577 A accepts commas, CR and LF as delimiters between data points. No end of record symbol is required; the instrument will respond to EOr. No more than one delimiter is allowed between numbers; CR/LF is considered a single delimiter. Spaces between and within numbers will be ignored.

3-47

Remote Operation

Bus Messages

FM2 is the 64 bit floating point binary specified by IEEE draft standard P754. This is the same data format used by the HP 9000 Series 300 computers. This format appears as follows:

SEEEEEEEEEEEMFFF FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF

FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF

FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFL where: and:

M is the most signfficant btt of the fractional part

F is an intermediate fractional btt

L is the least significant fractional btt

S is the sign btt of the fractional part

E is the exponent part

M is a "1 "

The exponent is offset by 1 27 (Le.1 27=0). This format represents

1 .m ... All ones for I's represents

�

2.0 (Le., normalized to 2).

FM3 is the 32 bit floating point binary used by the HP 3577 A fast processor. This format appears as follows:

MFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF SFFFFFFLEEEEEEEE where: and:

M is the most significant btt of the fractional part

F is an intermediate fractional btt

L is the least significant fractional btt

S is the sign of the fractional part

E is the exponent part

M should always be a "1 "

The exponent is offset by 1 28 (Le., 1 28=0). This format represents .1 fffff ... All ones represents

�

1 .0 (Le., normalized to 1).

In either of the binary data formats the header #I must precede a binary load so that the

HP 3577 A can recognize the bytes following the header as binary data.

ABORTING A DUMP OR LOAD. A dump or load will be aborted by any one of the following events:

1. End (EOI) sent by talker

(FM2 or FM3 load only)

2. Sending non-numeric data (ASCII loads only)

3. Device Clear

4. Pressing the LOCAL front panel key

5. Addressing the HP 3577 A to Listen and sending one or more bytes (dumps only).

Note that an Interface Clear (IFC) does not abort a dump or load over the bus. For unconditional control of the bus, it is recommended that Device Clear followed by Interface Clear be issued at the beginning of your program. The BASIC commands that correspond to these are CLEAR

7 and

ABORT

7, respectively.

:,--'

348

Remote Operation

Bus Messages

LENGTH OF RECORD

The length of the data record (number of points transferred) will depend on the sweep type currently active. This is'true for both register data and trace data. Note that in trace dumps of delay, the aperture/2 first and last bins will be undefined: the

HP 3577 A

will output a large negative number in an attempt to protect the user from bad data. Examples of record length:

CW: 1

UN: Sweep Resolution

LOG: 401

ALT: 401

AMP:

Number of steps/sweep plus

1

END OF INFORMATION

The bus management line EOI (end or identify) will be pulled by the

HP

3577 A

on the last byte of any data dump whether it is a binary or ASCll dump. Once the

HP

3577 A

has pulled its Ear line it will not transmit any more data until receiving another message.

When using ENG (enter graphics) to load graphics commands, <Ear> must be pulled on the handshake of the last byte. Using BASrc on

HP

computers, such as the

HP

9000 Series

300,

pulling the Ear line is done by putting; END at the end of the data string as shown in the following example:

Example:

1 0

OUTPUT 71 1 ;"ENG #1';

20 OUTPUT

71 1

USING

'#,W"

;Cmnd_array(*); END

3-49

Remote Operation

Bus Messages

ENTER MENU (ENM) allows the user to label the eight softkeys. This feature may be used with commands that read the keyboard. It does riot allow the user to redefine the key label corresponding to a

HP 3577

A softkey function. The user defined menu shares the same display memory with system menus. It is recommended that the bus diagnostic mode be kept off to avoid overwriting menus.

To label the softkeys use the following sequence:

ENM

..

1 -8 text

"

< delim>

Enter menu bus mnemonic.

Opening QUote indicates that text follows .

The sottkey number on which to display the message. number,

1 is assumed.

I1 the first character is not a

Up to

1 6 characters

01

ASCII text.

If the text is key-label will appear centered on the key. be divided into

8

'I the characters or less a single line text is

9 to

1 6 characters the text will

2 lines with 8 characters on the lirst line and the remainder on the second line; the 2 lines will be centered on the key. A carriage acceptable and will be translated retum character is not to a left arrow. Double QUote marks (') may be included as characters by sending a pair

01 double Quotes (") to the HP 3577 A. Note that the computer may require four Quote marks be entered to get two in �s program line (resulting in one on the HP 3577A screen).

Closing Quote mark.

This delim�er may be the characters; <CR/LF> space or the act

01 pulling

<EO!> on the handshake

01 the last byte transferred.

Whenever the instrument returns to

LOCAL mode and the front panel is enabled, the user defined menu will be overwritten with the present system definition of the softkeys. For an example program using

ENM, refer to Enter Annotation. Additional functions to control the menu display memory:

Menu off

Menu on

Menu clear

MNO

MNl

MNC

3-50

Remote Operation

Bus Messages

ENTER ANNOTATION (ENA) This command allows the user to provide text strings and to specify on which of twelve li n es it will appear. These lines are located in the graticule area; four near the top, four in the middle, and four near the bottom. They are located such that there is no interference with the message block in which errors and warnings are displayed.

The format to be used is as follows:

ENA

..

1-12 text

..

<delim>

Enter annotation bus mnemonic.

Opening quote indicates that text follows .

The display line number on which the annotation is to be displayed. If the first character is not numeric. line 1 will be assumed.

Up to 40 characters of ASCII text.

The carriage return character code is unacceptable and will be translated to a left arrow n used.

Closing quote marks .

This delim�er may be the characters: <CR/Lf> space or the act of pulling

< EOI > on the handshake of the last byte transferred.

3-51

Remote Operation

Bus Messages

Example:

200

2 10

220

230

240

2 5 0

260

2 7 0

2 8 0

2 9 0

140

150

160

170

180

190

80

9 0

100

110

120

130

1 0

20

30

40

50

60

7 0

3 7 0

380

3 9 0

400

410

420

430

440

450

460

300

3 1 0

320

330

340

350

360

470

480

' ENA ' " ENM ' Use of Enter Annotation and Enter Menu

' CKB ' , ' DKY' Use of Clear Keyboard and Dump Key

Adrs-7 1 1

ASS IGN @Adrs TO Adrs

OUTPUT @Adrs ; "ANC ; HNC ; "

Next , define the anno tation and menu

OUTPUT @Adrs ; "ENA ; " " 2

OUTPUT @Adrs ; " ENA , " " 4

OUTPUT

OUTPUT

OUTPUT

Note that a pair o f double quotes must b e used t o send one doub le quote mark ( " ) at execution time . To get a double quote to appear in the HP 3577A screen annotation,

4 double quotes ( " .. .. .. ) mus t be written into the program.

LOOP

OUTPUT @Adrs ; "MN1 ;ANl ; "

OUTPUT @Adrs ; "CKB ; "

Turn annotation

& menu on

Clear the keyboard buffer

LOOP

OUTPUT @Adrs ; " DKY ; "

&�ER

@Adrs ; Key , Knob

! Read the keyboard

EXIT I F Key-13 OR Key-16 OR Key-20

IF Key

< >

-

1 THEN BEEP

END LOOP

-

1

- no key pressed

OUTPUT @Adrs ; "HNO ; "

S ELECT Key

Turn menu off

CASE 1 3

OUTPUT @Adrs ; " ENA ; " " 5

CASE 16

OUTPUT @Adrs ; .. ENA ;

.

. ..

S

CASE 2 0

OUTPUT @Adrs ; " ENA ; " " S

END SELECT

CONTINUE key pressed" '' ''

TEST FAILED key pressed .. .. ..

ABORT key pressed" "

END

Special Test" " "

Se lect appropriate

MENU

KEY . " "' ''

@Adrs ; " ENM ; " " l CONTINUE " " "

@adrs ; " ENM; " '4 TEST FAILED " " '

@Adrs ; " ENM ; " " 8 ABORT " " "

WAIT 2

OUTPUT @Adrs ; " ENA ;

" "

5

" " "

OUTPUT @Adrs ; "MN1 ; "

END LOOP

Clear annotation and menu

Clears the message

Turn the menu back on

3-52

Remote Operation

Bus Messages

ENTER GRAPHICS (ENG) The graphics mode allows the user to place alphanumeric information anywhere on the screen in different sizes, intensities and rotational positions, as well as draw vectors.

Although this offers more Oexibility than EN A, knowledge of the Digital Display Module command set is required. This information uses the same display memory as the ENA function, therefore the two functions cannot be used together.

The format to be used is as follows:

ENG Enter Graphics bus mnemonic.

#1

< 0-923>

Indicates binary words to follow.

Starting address within annotation block where Digital Display commands are to be placed. Sent as a 1 6 bit binary number, MSB first.

Digital Display Sent as 1 6 bit binalY words, MSB first. commands

<EOI>

The commands for the command is used the

Digital Display are binalY commands. When the ENG

HP

3577 A will pass these commands to the display section.

Appendix B is a quick reference programming guide jar the

Digital Display. The

JUMP command is not allowed. The carriage return character will be translated into a left arrow. Memory capacity is 924 commands.

End Or Identify will be sent w�h the last data byte to indicate the end of the sequence.

3-53

Remote Operation

Bus Messages

Example:

1000

1390

1400

1410

1420

1430

1440

1450

1460

1470

1 3 10

1 3 20

1 3 30

1340

1350

1360

1370

1 3 80

1 160

1170

1 1 80

1 1 90

1200

1 2 10

1220

1 2 30

1240

1250

1 260

1 2 7 0

1 2 80

1 2 90

1300

1010

1020

1030

Use of Enter Graphics

COM INTEGER Cmnd_array ( 0 : 20 ) , Array_indx , Disp_adrs , Array_ length , @ Adrs

1040

1050

INTEGER Plotx , Movey , Ploty , S et_cmnd , Text ( 1 : 5 ) , Es

INTEGER I , J , K

1060 Array_length - 2 0

1070

1080

1090

Array_indx-l

Disp_adrs-O

Adrs-7 1 1

ASSIGN @Adrs TO Adrs 1 100

1 7 10

1120

1130

1 140

1 1 50

OUTPUT @Adrs ; " I PR ; ANC ; "

OUTPUT @Adrs ;

"

AN

I

; "

OUTPUT @Adrs ; "TR1 ; DFO ; GRO ; CHO ; "

Clear s tate and anno tation

Turn the display ON

Define the annotation commands

The PLOT command for the display : OOOy pddd dddd dddd

Where : y - 0 for x defini tion ; 1 for y definition p - 0 for ' pen up ' ; 1 for ' pen down ' d - location in range 0 t o 2047

P1otx-0

Ploty-6144

Movey-4096

The SET CONDITIONS command for the display :

0 1 1 i i - - I IO-w w- - -

Where : i defines the line intensity

00 - blank

0 1 dim

10 .- half bright

1 1 full bright

1 defines line type

00 - solid line

01

10 intens ified end long dashes

1 1 short dashes w defines writing speed points

00 - 0 . 20 inches per microsecond

01 - 0 . 15 " " "

10 - 0 . 10" .. ..

1 1 - 0 . 05 " It If

3-54

Remote Operation

Bus Messages

1480 Set cmnd -30744 ! full bright , solid line,

&

.05 in/us

1490

1500

1510

1520

1530

1540

1550

1560

1570

1580

1590

1600

1610

1620

1630

1640

1650

The TEXT command: 010s srre c c c c cccc

Where: s defines character size

00 - 1. OX

01

10

11

1. 5X

2. 0X

2.5X r defines rotation

00 0 degrees

01 - 90 degrees

10 - 180 degrees

11 270 degrees e - establish size of character o

- Use previous size and rotation

1 - Use new size and rotation c - character code (see table in appendix)

1660

1670

1680

1690

1700

1710

1720

1730

1780

1790

1800

Text(l)

Text(2)

Text(3)

16384

18944

21504

Text(4)- 24064

Text(5)-22528

Es-256 size is IX and rotation is size is 1. 5X and rotation size is 2.0X and rotation

0 is is size is 2.5X and rotation size is 2.5X and rotation is is

"establish size and rotation" deg

90 deg

180 deg

- 90 deg o deg flag

1740

1750

Plot a square on the HP 3577A screen:

1760 Sqr: DATA 100,100

1770

DATA 100, 1000

X,Y coordinate for lower left corner upper left

DATA 1000, 1000

DATA 1000, 100 upper right lower right

1810 Since the display units are not equal (i.e. , Y-axis

1820 units are 3/4 the size of the X-axis units on the

1830 display), the Y-axis units should be divided by .75

1840 to get a true square.

1850

1860 Y axis sca1e- .75

1870

1880

READ

XO , YO

CALL Add_cmnd(Set_cmnd) read the first point initialize SET CONDITION

1890

CALL Add_cmnd(XO + P1otx) move to starting point

1900 CALL Add_cmnd(YO/Y_axis_sca1e + Movey)

1910 FOR I-I TO 3

1920

READ X , Y

1930

CALL Add_cmnd(X+ P1otx)

1940

CALL Add_cmnd(Y/y_axis_scale+ P1oty)

1950

NEXT I

3-55

Remote Operation

Bus Messages

1960 CALL Add_cmnd(X+ Plotx)

1970 CALL Add_cmnd(YO/Y_axis_scale

+

Ploty)

1980

1990

! plot to starting pt

Now display the following message in the four different

2000

2010 sizes and rotations

2020 Message$- "HP3577"

2030

2040 CALL Add_cmnd(550 + Plotx) define the start of characters

2050

2060

CALL Add_cmnd(500+ Movey)

FOR 1-1 TO 4

2070

2080

2090

2100

CALL Add_cmnd(Text(I) + Es + NUM(Message$»

FOR

J

- 2 TO LEN(Message$)

CALL Add_cmnd(Text(I)+ NUM(Message$[J))

NEXT

J

1st c haracter w/ Es asserted

2110

2120

2130

NEXT I

2140 IF Array_indx <>1 THEN GALL Transfer_cmnd

2150

2160

2170

2180

2190

2200

2210

2220

Array_indx-l

Cmnd_array(O)-lOO

CALL Add_cmnd(1500+ Plotx)

CALL Add_cmnd(1500 + Movey)

CALL Add_cmnd(Text(5)+ Es +1)

OUTPUT @Adrs; "ENG fiI"

OUTPUT @Adrs USING "W" ;Gmnd_array(*);END reinitialize buffer use address 100 for this buffer define starting position for loop

! transfer if necessary character

"

I

"

1s HP logo

2230

2240

2250

2260

2270

2280 LOOP

The following steps will update the two c ommands which define the starting location of the HP logo. It demonstrates changing selected c ommands "on che fly."

2290

2300

2310

2320

Cmnd_array(l)- INT(1500*RND)+ Plotx

Cmnd_array(2) - INT(1900* RN D)

+

Movey

OUTPUT @Adrs; "ENG

1/1";

Update new starting position for logo.

Update new x,y

OUTPUT @Adrs USING "11, W, W, W" ; Cmnd_array(O) Cmnd_array(l) ,

Cmnd _array(2);END

2330

WAIT . l

2340 END LOOP

2350

2360

STOP

2370

2380 END

2390

2400

The following subroutine adds Digital Display commands to

2410

Cmnd_array until it contains 20 (Array_length) elements.

2420

2430 SUB Add_Cmnd(INTEGER Value)

.

�

"

.

.;

3-56

Remote Operation

Bus Messages

2440

2450

COM INTEGER Cmnd_array(*),Array_indx, X,Array_length, @ Adrs

Cmnd_array(Array_indx

)

-Value

Array_indx- Array_indx+l

2460

2470 IF Array_indx> Array_length THEN

2480 CALL Transfer_cmnd

2490

2500

Array_indx-l

END IF

2510

SUBEND

2520

2530 Send Cmnd array to HP 3577A

2540

2550

2560

SUB Transfer_cmnd

COM INTEGER_Cmnd_array(*),

2570

2580

2590

Cmnd_array(O)- Disp_adrs

OUTPUT @Adrs; "ENG

/11" ;

OUTPUT @Adrs USING "/J, W" ;Cmnd array(*);END

2600

2610

2620

2630

2640

2650

FOR K - 0 TO Array_length

Cmnd_array(K)- 0

NEXT K

SUB END

Send ENG and

/11 send array

Clear out Cmnd_array

Redefine display memory address for next transfer.

3-57

Remote Operation

Bus Messages

ANNOTATION OFF (AND)

Turns off the Annotation/Graphics modes by disabling the display memory.

ANNOTATION ON (AN1) Enables the commands in display memory.

ANNOTATION CLEAR (ANC)

Clear display memory back to NOP instructions.

Additional functions to control the screen are:

Graticule On

Graticule Off

Characters On

Characters Off

GR1

GRO

CH1

CHO

(screen messages will not be tumed off)

The character fields controlled by the CH commands are:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Information at the bottom of the screen.

The REF and /DIV

The entry block

The marker data messages and their values

The following screen features have their own on/off commands:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Trace data (the traces themselves;

Trace reference lines

TRl DFO and TR2

DFO)

(TRl RLO and

TR2

RLO)

Annotation

Menu

TAKE MEASUREMENT (TKM)

When this command is received the HP 3577 A settles and takes a measurement before processing the next bus command. TKM (followed by a dump command) guarantees that the measurement will be completed before data transfer begins. For faster measurements RST and TRG may be used as shown previously.

3-58

Remote Operation

Bus Messages

Instrument Preset (default) Parameter Values

The HP 3577 A responds to the instrument preset (IPR) command configuring its parameters as defined in the following table:

FUNCTION

TRACE

1

TRACE

2

DISPLAY FUNCTION

INPUT del.

(both

traces) user defined input

SCALE (log mag)

Reference level

/OW

Reference position

Reference line

SCALE (linear mag )

Reference level

/DIV

Reference position

Reference line

SCALE (phase)

Reference level

/DIV

Reference position

Reference line

Phase slope (Trc 1&2)

SCALE (polar)

Full scale

Phase reference

Reference position

Reference line

Phase slope

(T rc 1 &2)

SCALE (real & imaginalY)

Reference level

/DIV

Reference position

Reference line

Phase slope

(T rc

1 &2)

WithDut test set

Active

Off

Log magnitude

PRESET CONDmON

With test set same same same

R

F3

S21 (B/R. test set

FWO) same

0.0 dBm

10.0 dB

100%

On

0.0 Volts

100 mV

0.0%

On o.er

45 de5lIeeS

50%

On

On, O.OD/span

1.0 Volts

O DD

0.0'

On

On, O.er/span

0,0 Volts

200mV

50%

On

On, O.OD/span

0.0 dB same same same

- -

0.0 units lODE - 3 units same same o.er same same same same

1.0 units same same same same

0.0 units

200E-3 units same same same

3-59

Remote Operation

Bus Messages

Function

Without test set

Preset Condition

With test set

SCALE (delay)

Reference level

/DIV

Reference position

Reference line

Phase slope (Trc 1 &2)

MARKER (Both traces)

Marker

Position

Offset (Mag, freq swp)

Freq

Offset (X-axis)

Offset (Mag, amptd swp) Off

Amptd Offset (X-axis)

Target

STORE

User def equation

DEFt NE MATH

Fl

F2

F3

Kl real

Kl imaginary

K2 real

K2 imaginary

K3 real

K3 imaginary

F4

F5

SWEEP TYPE

Sweep direction

SWEEP MODE

SWEEP TIME (linear swp)

(amplitude swp)

(manual swp mode or CW)

FREQUENCY

Start freq (linear swp)

Start freq (log sweep)

Stop frequency

Center frequency

Frequency span

Center freq step size

0.0 s

1 00 ns

50%

On

On, O.Oo/span

.

On

Bin 200

Off, 1 3.01 dBm

0.0 Hz

13.01 dBm

13.0 dBm

1 0.01 dBm

R

. .

1

0

50

0

75

0

(BlR)/(Kl - BlR)

AIR

(Kl + F2)/(Kl

-

K2*F3

K3*F3

Linear (freq)

Up (left to right)

Continuous

1 000 s

0.050 S/step

0.050 S/step

F2)

0.000 Hz

50.000 Hz

200 MHz

1 00 MHz

200 MHz

1.0 MHz same same same same same same same

Off, 0.0 dB

0.0 Hz

Off,

0.0 dB

1 3.0 dBm

- 3.0 dB same same same same same same same same same same same same same same same same same same

100 kHz

1 00 kHz same

1 00.05 MHz

199.9 MHz same

3-60

Function

FREQUENCY (continued)

Freq sweep resolutio n

AMPLITUDE

Source amplITude

AmplITude s tep s ize

Start amplITude

Stop amplITude

StepS/sweep

TRIGGER MODE

RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH

Setting time for:

Res BW

=

1 kHz

Res BW

=

100 Hz

AesBW= 10Hz

ResBW = 1 Hz

AVERAGING

INPUT ATTENUATION

Input R

Input A

Input B

INPUT IMPEDANCE

Input

A

Input A

Input B

' INPUT LENGTH

Input R

Inpu t A

Input B

Step s ize

.

40t points/span

-10,0 dBm

1.0 dBm

-4 0,O dBm

0,0 dBm

100

Free nun

1 kHz

22 ms

55 ms

370 ms

3.707 s

Off

20 dB

20 dB

20 dB

500

500

500

On. 0,0 meters

O n. 0,0 meters

On. 0,0 meters

1,0 meter

Without test set

Preset

CondHion

With test set same

+15,0 dBm same same

+15,0 dBm same same same same · same same same same

. same same same same same same

O n. 1 ,3 me ters same same same

Remote

Operation

Bus Messages

3-61

Remote Operation

Bus Messages

The Status Byte

The Status Byte is an 8 bit word that the HP 3577 A will dump on the HP-IB when it

is

serially polled. The state of each bit indicates the status of an internal

HP

3577 A function.

BASIC example:

Var= SPOLL(711)

HPL example: rds

(711)-S

Status Byte Bit Numbers

B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 82 B1 BD

87:

86:

B5:

B4:

B3:

82:

B

1:

BD:

Not used

REQUIRE SERVICE, RQS, Set when the HP 3577A pulls the SRC line. Cleared along with the SRC line when a serial poll is performed.

ERROR This bit reflects the logical OR of all error conditions in the instrument. An SRC is generated on the rising edge of any of these error conditions. The error conditions include all HP-IS errors and all hardware error conditions. The hardware errors include input overloads, input tripped, source triPped, and reference unlocked. The error bit is cleared when the hardware error conditions have cleared and a serial poll is performed, if the error bit is unmasked. If the bit is masked it will clear whenever the error conditions clear

(I.e., it won't stay set until the poll occurs). It is also cleared by a dump status command (DMS) when the user receives the error information

STATUS BYTE.

(if all hardware error bits are clear). Four levels of masking are provided for the user to select what type of programming errors will be reported by the error bit. See MASKING THE

READY (for HP-IB commands) Set when the HP-IB input buffer is completely empty, all commands have been completely processed, and

(if the last command was RSn settling is complete. If a command is issued during a sweep, the ready bit will clear until command processing is complete.

KEY PRESSED/SRQ "unmasked, this bit will be set when a key is pressed or the knob is turned. Also, this bit is set when the HP 3577 A receives the 'SRC' command on the bus. The set condition is cleared by a serial poll.

MEASUREMENT COMPLETE Set when sweep completes Cleared by the start of a new sweep

DATA AVAILABLE Instrument will output data when addressed to talk. Cleared by the handshake of the last byte.

DATA TRANSFER COMPLffi Set after the HP 3577A handshakes the last data byte in a dump. Primarily designed for plotting. Cleared by a serial poll if it is unmasked, or upon B1 being set.

Any status bit that is unmasked will cause an SRQ (and set RQS) when the condition it represents is true. As long as the condition is true, the bit will stay set. The bit will reset when the condition has cleared and the instrument is serially polled.

Any status bit that is masked will follow the condition it represents, resetting without a serial poll whenever the condition clears.

3-62

Remote Operation

Bus Messages

Masking The Status Byte

A service request will be generated when any unmasked bit in the status byte becomes set. The SRQ mask may be loaded by sending SQM followed by the mask byte in ASCII. The mask byte definition is as follows:

B3

B2

B 1

BD

B7

B6

B5

B4

SQM

(not used)

(RQS)

(Error)

(Ready)

(Key/SRQ)

(MEAS DONE)

(DATA AVAIL)

(XFER DONE)

0 mask B5 mask B4 mask B3 mask 82 maskB1 mask BD

1 not maskable enable B5 SRQ enable B4 SRQ enable B3 SRO enable 82 SRO enable B1 SRQ enable BD SRO

In the default instrument state SQM

=

0 (all bits masked). Pressing INSTR PRESET or sending

IPR over the bus will set SQM

= o.

The user may choose the level of screen message that sets the SRQ line (and which level of message appears with DMS) by selecting one of the following four modes:

ERO

ER1

ER2

ER3

Nothing will be reported

Only errors will be reported

Errors and warnings will be reported

Errors warnings and messages will be reported

The default selection is ERl. If the error bit is unmasked, the following conditions will pull SRQ regardless of the error reporting mode selected:

Input(s) tripped

Input(s) overloaded

Reference unlocked

Source tripped

3-63

Remote Opera t i o n

Bus Messages

"How To Go Fast" Example Programs

These two example programs are written for the HP 9000 Series 300 computers. The first program demonstrates the fastest measurement technique for any display function except group delay (with the appropriate changes in line 300 to change from DF7 (default) to DF

_, and line 610 to print the correct units after the value of the data dumped). The second program is an example demonstrating the fastest way to make group delay measurements.

Example:

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

110

This program demonstrates the fastest possible singlepoint

(OW) measurements that the HP 3577A is capable of.

ASSIGN @Na TO 711

ASSIGN @ Na_nofmt TO 711;FORMAT OFF

Meas_complete -4

Pass-O

CLEAR @Na

OUTPUT @ Na ; "IPR;"

Initialize the bus

Preset the instrument

Turn characters and bus diagnostics off to improve speed

120

130

140

150

160

170

180

190

200

OUTPUT @Na;"CHO;BDO;''''

Set the data transfer format to 64 bit binary (IEEE)

OUTPUT @Na;"FM2;"

Select single sweep mode to improve speed

210

220

230

OUTPUT @Na;"SM2;"

240

250

Select CW sweep type (fastest method for making single point measurements)

260 OUTPUT @Na;"ST5;"

270

280

290

Set up measurement c onditions

300 OUTPUT @ Na; "SAM - 6 DBM; TR1 ; BW4 ;UDI B/R; TSF;"

310 Freq - RND*2.00E

+

8

320

OUTPUT @Na;"SFR";Freq;"HZ;"

330

OUTPUT @Na; "TKM;"

340 LOOP

350

Starttime- TIMEDATE

360

370

Oldfreq - Freq

Freq - RND*2 . 00E

+

8

380

390

!

!

Select a random frequency

1st meas is done with TKM

Select next. random frequency

Next, go to the new frequency and begin settling,

3-64

Remote Operation

Bus Messages

400

410

420

430

440

450

460

470

480

490

500 then dump the marker data from the last measurement.

OUTPUT @ Na;"SFR";Freq;"HZ;RST;DMl;TRG;"

Note that TRG (trigger the new measurement) will not occur until settling is complete.

ENTER @Na USING "%, 2A" ;Junk$

ENTER @ Na_nofmt;Y

Start meas - TIMEDATE gets "fII" characters gets marker data for Oldfreq

510

520

530

540

550

560

570

Next , wait for the data to be taken. Data analysis may be performed here, while waiting.

REPEAT

Stat- SPOLL(711)

UNTIL BINAND(Stat , Meas_complete)

Stoptime - TlMEDATE

580

590

Measure_time - INT«Stop_time-Start_meas)*lOOO +.5

Time - INT«Stoptime-Start_time)*lOOO +.5

600

DISP "PASS "; Pass; ". TOTAL TIME - "; Time;" msec Measurement u;Measure_time;" msec"

610

620

PRINT

"FREQ:"

;Oldfreq/l . E +6; "MHz, Y: ";Y;" dB"

Pass - Pass +1

630 END LOOP

640 END

3-65

Remote Operation

Bus Messages

Example:

270

280

290

300

310

320

330

340

350

360

370

380

390

210

220

230

240

250

260

400

410

420

430

10

110

120

130

140

150

160

170

180

190

200

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

440

450

460

This program demonstrates the fastest possible 5-point group delay measurements possible on the HP 3S77A.

Data can be dumped by moving the marker or dumping the trace.

OPTION BASE 0

DIM Mkr(5)

DIM Trace(lOO)

ASSIGN @Na TO 711

ASSIGN @Na_nofmt TO 711 ; FORMAT OFF

Ready_bit-16

Meas_complete-4

Dump_trace-1

ELSE

PRINT "Will use Marker Dump"

Dump_trace-O

END IF

Startuptime-TIMEDATE

CLEAR @Na

OUTPUT @ Na; "IPR; "

!

Array holding the fi1 ter to

Array holding the 5 marker values for be tested the 100 trace data points.

Pass-O

Answer$-"M"

INPUT "Dump TraC/l (T) or Dump Marker (M): ", Answer$

IF (Answer$[l, l]-"T") OR (Answer$[l , l] - "to) THEN

PRINT "Will use Dump Trace"

Preset the instrument

Turn off characters and bus diagnostics for greater speed

OUTPUT @Na;"CHO ; BDO ; "

IF Dump_trace THEN

OUTPUT @Na ; "FM2 ; "

ELSE

OUTPUT @Na; "FM1 ; "

END IF

Select single, linear sweep and delay (display fctn. 1)

OUTPUT @Na ; "5M2 ; 5Tl ; TRl ; DFl ;

"

Use 64 bit binary data format

The marker will be dumped in ASCII

OUTPUT @Na;"SAM 0 DBM ; TR1 ; BW4 ; UDI B/R"

!

Measurement set up

OUTPUT @ Na; "RS 2; "

Reduced sweep res improves speed.

HP 3577A will change its delay aperature to 2% of span and beep .

Set up the freq definition for a 10. 7 MHz bandpass filter

3-66

Remote Operation

Bus Messages

470

480

490

500

510

520

530

540

550

560

570

870

880

890

900

910

920

930

940

720

730

740

750

760

770

780

790

800

810

820

830

840

DM1;MKP

850

860

580

590

600

610

620

630

640

650

660

670

680

690

700

710

OUTPUT @Na; "FRC 10 . 7

MHZ;

FRS 45 KHZ; 5TM 0 . 1 SEC;"

OUTPUT @ Na; "TKM;ASL;"

REPEAT

!

Sweep and autoscale for onlookers

Wait for end of measurement

Stat-SPOLL(711)

UNTIL BINAND(Stat, Ready_bit)

OUTPUT @Na; "TKM;"

Starttime-TIMEDATE

PRINT "Initialization time: "INT«TIMEDATE-Startuptime)* 1000); "msec"

LOOP

REPEAT

!

Wait for end of measurement

Stat-SPOLL(711)

UNTIL BINAND(Stat,Ready_bit)

Swptime-TIMEDATE

IF

Now the data is taken and a new filter may be selected for testing . This selection may occur while this data is being dumped

Dump

OUTPUT @Na; "DTl;TKM;"

ENTER @Na USING "%,2A" ;Junk$

ENTER @Na_nofmt;Trace(*)

ELSE trace THEN

Dump the entire trac e. Assume that the program proc esses the data during the Donemkr interval that c urrently displays how long this took. dump trace

& take new meas

Gets the

"Ill"

Gets the trace data

The "Take Measurement" command in l ine 720 is executed as soon as the "Dump Trace" is complete

(when the computer has entered it; i.e . , now).

Send the commands to dump data at 5 marker positions. Then enter them one at a time .

OUTPUT @ Na;

77;DMl;TKM;"

"MKP

ENTER @Na;Mkr(l)

ENTER @Na;Mkr(2)

ENTER @Na;Mkr(3)

ENTER @Na;Mkr(4)

ENTER @Na;Mkr(S)

END IF

Donemkr:

Stoptime-TIMEDATE

23;DMl;MKP 33;DMl;MKP SO;DM1;MKP 67;

Time_to_sweep - INT«Swptime-Starttime)*lOOO)

Time_to_dump - INT«Stoptime-Swptime)*lOOO)

3-67

Remote Operation

Bus Messages

950

960

Time_total - INT«Stoptime-Starttime)*lOOO)

DISP "PASS ";Pass;", SWEEP TIME - ";Time_to_sweep;" msec

Dump-n;Time_to_dump;1I msec To.TAL - ";Time_cotal;" msec"

970

Pass-Pass+l

980

990

Starttime-Stoptime

END LOOP

995 END

3-68

"''''\'

;".

'

Chapter

4

Reference

Reference

This section of the manual is an alphabetical listing of the hardkeys and their menus, the front panel sections and some of the terms used throughout this manual. It is assumed that the operator is an experienced user and is referring to this section for details.

Amplitude

Amplitude is a hard key in the SOURCE section of the front panel used to display either menu of softkey labels shown below. These softkeys may be used to change the signal level of the source output. The HP 3577 A source amplitude range from

-

49 dBm to + 15 dBm in .1 dBm steps; the default value at power-on is

-

10 dBm without a test set and + 15 dBm with a test set.

1IIl_=-

I�

AMPTO

')TEP

SIZE

CLEAR

TRP

r---

:

D

r--- D: r---:D

�D

�

D

:

[J

SWEEP", M1PTD

TYP"

SWEEP

=�

=E

0

90000 c::::J

0000

�-

..

.

[Ql

0

•

0

Ict-}Jo

0000

00

.

•

.

•

0

•

•

•

0

•

I

START'

:�:� t3 l[Jt

!swEEp

'�w

SWEEP

_

AMPTD

TYPE

-

SWEEP

Figure

4-1.

4

4·1

Reference

AMPUTUDE is also a softkey in the AMPLITUDE menu used to change the value of source amplitude. After power turn-on or

INSTRUMENT PRESET, the menu indicates softkey selection. this softkey is active. A bright label in

To change the value of AMPLITUDE:

I.

Press the

AMPTD

hardkey to display the menu

2.

Press the AMPTD softkey (if label is not bright)

3. Modify the value with the knob or arrow keys

OR

4. Enter a new value with the numeric key pad.

Select units from the menu (press softkey)

When the

SWEEP TYPE

is ALTERNATE, each trace may be given separate amplitude values. For more information see SWEEP TYPE, ALTERNATE SWEEP.

Step Size is a softkey used to change the value that the arrow keys (in the DATA ENTRY section) increase or decrease the output amplitude. STEP SIZE is adjustable from .1 dB to 64 dB in .1 dB steps. The default value for STEP SIZE is 1.0 dB.

To change the value of STEP SIZE:

I. Press the

AMPTD


2. Press the

STEP SIZE

softkey

(if

label is not bright)


OR

4. Enter a new value with the numeric key pad


CLEAR TRIP (Source) is a softkey in the AMPTD menu used to reset the SOURCE TRIP. The source is protected against large external signals applied to it by a relay in the output circuit which opens when the voltage is

<::

4V pk.

If the source TRIPs, the user is directed by a screen message to press the

AMPTD hardkey in the SOURCE section of the front panel. This displays the menu containing the soft key label "CLEAR TRIP." Pressing CLEAR TRIP resets (closes) the relay in the source output.

If the condition causing the trip still exists the source trips again.

4·2

Reference

START AMPUTUDE

is

a softkey in the AMPTD menu (when the SWEEP TYPE is

AMPLITUDE

SWEEP)

used to change the value of the 'sweep parameter

START AMPLITUDE.

The default value for start amplitude is - 4OdBm. The allowable range is the same as the range of the source output amplitude,

-

49

dBm to

+

15

dBm. The value of start amplitude may

be

larger than the stop amplitude. Units used for data entry of new values for start and stop amplitude may be linear (volts) but the sweep

is

always logarithmic.

To view the menu shown in figure

4-1:

1.

Press the SWEEP TYPE hardkey

2.

Press the

AMPTD SWEEP

softkey

3.

Press the AMPTD hardkey

To change the value of

START AMPLITUDE:

1.

Press the

START AMPTD softkey (if the label is not bright)

2.

Modify the value with the knob or arrow keys

OR



STOP AMPUTUDE

is

a softkey label in the AMPTD menu (when the SWEEP TYPE

is

AMPLITUDE SWEEP)

used to change the value of the sweep parameter STOP AMPLlroDE.

The default value for stop amplitude

is 0.0

dBm if no test set is connected to the

HP 3577

A and

+ 15

dBm with a test set. The allowable range

is

the same as that of the source output amplitUde,

- 49 dBm to

+

15 dBm. The value of stop amplitude value may be smaller than the start amplitude.

To change the value of STOP AMPLITUDE:

1.

Press the

STOP AMPTD

softkey

2.


OR

3.

Enter a new value with the numeric key pad


STEPS/SWEEP is a softkey used to change the number of amplitude data point measurements taken and plotted on the screen. The value may only be changed by softkey selection, only. When

STEPS/SWEEP softkey is pressed, a menu appears that contains all possible selections. They are 5,

10, 20, 50, 100,200, and 400. The default number is 100. A large number of STEP/SWEEP makes the trace smooth while a small number lowers the required SWEEP

TIME.

4·3

4-4

Reference

Attenuation

Attenuation

... i

-

I[]

-

�-

f----'::

@

oooo ��

0000

0

0000

�o . .

'

0

-

•

.

"

•

.

•

.

"

0

I

ATTEN R

OdB lOoB

AlTEN

A-

DdB

20dS

A HEN

B

OdS 20dB t1PEOR

50n 1MO

!MPED

A

5001HO t1PED e

SOO 110

CLEAR

TRIP

Figure

4-2.

Attenuation is a hardkey in the RECEIVER section of the front panel used to display the menu shown above. These softkeys may be used to select the input attenuation and input impedance for each of the three receiver channels. Also, the

CLEAR

TRIP for the receivers is included in this menu.

Each input channel has two possible input impedances (500 or 1 MO) and two possible input attenuations (0 dB or 20 dB). When the instrument is PRESET aU channels revert to the default values: 500 input impedance and 20 dB input attenuation. All of the attenuation and impedance softkeys are the push-push toggle type. Each has two possible states; the bright part of the labels indicate which state is active. These parameters may only be changed by softkey selection.

Reference

Attenuation

The two input attenuation values may be thought of as measurement ranges. Normally the

HP 3577 A is in the high range, with 20 dB Of input attenuation. To increase the HP 3577 A's ability to measure vety small signal levels, change the input attenuation to

0 dB

.

The following table lists the signal levels at which overload occurs for any combination of input attenuation and impedance:

INPUT

AmNUATION

20 dB

O dB

OVERLOAO SIGNAL LEVELS

INPUT IMPEDANCE

500

OdBm

- 20dBm

- 1 3 dBV (224 my)

- 33

1 MO dBV (22.4 mY)

All front panel connections on the HP 35677 A S-P ARAME1ER 1EST SET have a characteristic impedance of 50n If a 750 characteristic impedance is required use an

HP

35677B.

To modify the impedance and attenuation parameters:

L Press the

ATTEN hardkey to display the menu

2. Press the softkey of the parameter you wish to change

CLEAR TRIP (RECEIVER) is a softkey used to reset a RECEIVER TRIP. A RECEIVER TRIP provides input voltage protection by switching the input impedance to 1 MO when the signal level is

2:

When any receiver trips the screen message "INPUT TRIPPED: Chan -' Clear trip on

A TTEN menu" appears. This change of impedance does not show in the

ATTEN

menu. The menu shows the user's selections and has the CLEAR TRIP softkey which should be used to reset the TRIP condition. The CLEAR TRIP softkey clears any and all inputs that are tripped.

4-5

4-6

Reference

Attenuation

Average

AVERAGE is a hardkey in the RECEIVER section of the front panel used to display the menu of softkeys shown in figure 4-3. Selection of any of the numbered softkeys turns on the exponential averaging feature of the HP 3577 A When averaging is on, the LED above the AVG hardkey is illuminated. The number selected by the user from the menu is a weighting factor called N in the following discussion.

Averaging is useful for removing the effects of noise from a trace. It is best to select a small

N if you wish to adjust the response of the device under test while sweeping.

A small

N

(like 4) shows response changes faster than a large N. If you want a very good "final" picture, pick 256 (or other large value for

N).

The larger

N is, the more noise is reduced. This feature is capable of reducing trace noise as much as 24 dB (N

=

256). Another way to reduce trace noise when measuring weak signals is to switch out the 20 dB RECEIVER attenuators. See A TfENUA nON.

To use

AVERAGE, press the hardkey labeled

AVG in the

RECEIVER section of the front panel.

The list of choices appears in the menu area of the display. If the feature is off the word OFF appears bright in the menu.

If any other selection is made, the new selection becomes bright and

AVERAGE is on. The AVERAGE weighting factor N may only be changed by softkey selection.

Averaging does not stop after N sweeps.

.. - ""

ID

= r

=f: rg co oooo

0

[Ql

F"""

. iQo

IC:(.� l

@

0000

0 0

•

•

�

-

0

• et

•

G

•

•

I

�O

16

8

1

32

28

1--....;

I---i

:

0

0 o

Figure

4-3.

Reference

Attenuation

The averaging algorithm is a continuous process that begins when the feature is turned on

(N is selected). The number selected by the user (N) is used in the equation below to yield an exponential average.

NEXT VALUE

=

-k x (NEW VALUE) +

� x (CURRENT VALUE)

If N is 256, the new sweep data is weighted by 11256 and the current data by 255(256. You can see that each sweep does not change the trace much when N

=

256. If N is 4, the new sweep data is weighted by 1/4 and the current data by 3/4; so new data changes the trace faster when N is smaU.

The

HP

3577A stores the trace information in "bins." Each bin contains a measurement value taken at a discrete frequency in the sweep and is as wide as the selected bandwidth.

As each new value is taken, the math processor weights (multiplies) it by

IIN, weights the old value by (N-l)IN, adds the two together and stores the result in the same bin in which the old value was stored. Multiple traces are not stored. In this manner, the effect of any single sample diminishes as each average weights its value at some factor less than one and adds it to new incoming data

The preceding discussion has described how the averaging feature works after N sweeps (samples).

Until that time, the averaging algorithm cycles up through lower values of N until it reaches the user's selection. For example, let N

=

256. The fIrSt value used in the equation for N is 4.

After several sweeps a higher value of N is used and the process repeated until 256 is reached.

The

HP

3577 A uses this method because it displays a useable trace faster than if N were large and constan

1.

Note

After averaging with a large N for a long time (i.e. many sweeps) removing the device under test does not affect the trace noticeably.

The

LED

above the

AVG

key is on when the

HP

3577 A is averaging.

4·7

Reference

Continuous

Entry

Continuous Entry

In the DATA ENTRY section of the front panel there are three ways to enter or modify data: the keypad, the arrow keys, and the knob.

CONTINUOUS

ENTRY refers to the knob in

ENIRYmode.

To use CONTINUOUS ENTRY the active (bright) softkey must be a type that aUows data entry.

When the key above the knob is pressed the LEDs marked "MARKER" and "ENTRY" toggle.

The knob is capable of CONTINUOUS ENTRY when the ENTRY LED is lit. When in MARKER mode the knob moves the markers on the screen. It is recommended that the knob be left in

MARKER mode so that data modifications are not made when the knob is accidently rotated. The

ENTRY OFF hard key also turns off the knob ENTRY mode by removing the menu (and therefore any active softkey) from the screen .

........ 0

I"",,,

• o

Figure 4-4

.

4-8

Reference

Data

Entry

Data Entry

DATA ENTRY

,

I

000lQJ

000(2]

800

BACK

SPACE

0008

UARKI!R 0

ENTRY 0

0

-1 r �

�

(J�

-i-

Figure 4-5.

DATA ENTRY is a section of the front panel used for entering or modifying data. It contains a numeric keypad, increment/decrement (arrow) keys, a BACKSPACE key, ENTRY OFF key and the knob. If new entries are made with the keypad, units must be entered with the softkeys at the right side of the screen before the new entry is complete.

The BACKSPACE key is used to correct data entries or trace arithmetic equations. When the backspace key is pressed, the cursor in the entry block (text in the upper-right corner of the screen) backs up one space, erasing that character. If an error is made in the data entry, the HP 3577 A displays a screen message, beeps and retains the original entry. The new entry must be backspaced over before new data may be entered. Another alternative is to begin again with the hardkey. This replaces your data in the entry block with the current definition of the parameter.

Entry Off is used to keep the knob from changing an ENTRY value or to clear the screen of menus and messages. The graticule and all characters are displayed at low intensity and the trace(s) are bright.

The

KNOB is used in one of two modes: to move the MARKER or for (continuous ) ENTRY

(i.e. data modification). It toggles between these two modes when the key above it is pressed. Two

LEDs, marked MARKER and ENTRY, show which mode the knob is in. When preset, the knob is in the MARKER mode. It is good operating practice to keep it in MARKER so that accidental rotation of the knob does not modify whatever entry currently appears in the menu. Note: when

MARKER PosmON (in the MKR menu) is bright, the knob moves the marker in either

MARKER or ENTRY mode (the entry would be MARKER POSmON).

4-9

Reference

Data

Entry

The INCREMENT/DECREMENT keys are used to increment ( it) or decrement (1J) data for the selected (bright) softkey if it is an item that allows data entry; you can increment a sweep time but not a sweep type. The message "ENTRY UNDEFINED" appears if you try to modify a softkey for which data entry is not appropriate. If held down for more than 1 second, the up/down keys auto-repeal The amount of cbange is determined by tbe step size of tbe parameter to be modified and may be a data entry, itself. Refer to the particular parameter in this section for more information on its step size.

..

"

4·10

Reference

Data

Register

Data Register

There are four registers used to STORE trace DATA They are called D1, D2, D3, and D4. Stored data is in the same form (complex) created by the receivers and stored in trace memory. Therefore, any data register information may be recreated in any of the DISPLAY FUNCTION formats (LOG

MAG, PHASE, GROUP DELAY, etc.). Refer to Appendix A for more information on DATA

PROCESSING AND STRUCTURE.

The data stored in any of the data registers may be displayed by specifying the data register of interest as an INPUT. Press the INPUT hardkey and the softkey labeled DATA REG, then select the data register of interest from the menu. Refer to STORE DATA

C===============::l

DISPlAY FORMAT c:=============�

( o

T R_A_C_E

_

1

_

--,

) o

(�

_

_ R

_

_

A _ E 2

_

)

STORE

DATA

DISPLY

FCTN

(

MEASR

)

CAL

DEFINE

MATH

Figure 4-6.

4-11

4·12

Reference

Define

Math

Define Math

I

11]

Kl reOI

Kl Imag

K2 reel

K2 IITlCQ

K3 real

K) Imog

DEFINE

FUNCTION

"'-=

0

D

R=

!::

-

@

8888

-

•

�

Gl

0

-

[06091

•

• 0 •

I le

FS

RETURN

0

R

A a

D.

K

F

0

----.J

ENTER

Figure 4-7.

DEFINE MATH is a hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section of the front panel used to display the menu shown above. These softkeys may be used to define three complex constants and five functions. Constants and functions may be used as terms in USER DEFINED INPUTs or

USER DEFINED STOREs.

The constants are displayed in the menu as soon as the component, real and imaginary, of each constant,

DEFINE MATH key is pressed. Each

Kl through ra, may be defined by pressing the appropriate softkey and making a data entry with the numeric keypad. The entry appears in the entry block on the screen as it is entered. To correct entry errors use the backspace key in the

DATA ENTRY section.

The functions may be defined by pressing the DEFINE FUNCTION softkey. This displays a new menu containing

1. The 5 user definable functions, Fl through F5

2. A command to

DEFINE F

_

3. RETURN, which displays the previous menu.

Also displayed is an entry message (on the screen) showing the current definition of the bright function. This message changes to show the new entry as it is entered.

_,. I

;.. .

,

Reference

Define

Math

One of the another F

F

_ softkey labels is bright and appears in the DEFINE F

_ softkey label. Selecting

_ changes the DEFINE F

_ command. When the DEFINE F _ key is pressed the entry block shows the equation being defined and the menu changes to a selection of the first term to be used. This list includes the three input channels (R, three constants

A, and B). the four data registers (D�, the

(K�, the other functions (only lower numbered functions may be used to define this function), and parenthesis to be used in constructing tbe equation.

When a softkey is pressed tbe menu cbanges to tbe list of matb functions or (if

K_

F

_ or D

_ was the first selection) a list of numbers to finish describing tbe term. The menu continues to change as the equation is built and the entry block sbows wbat is being entered. If errors are made they may be erased by backspacing over them. When finisbed, one of tbe softkey labels should allow the function to be ENTERed. Character strings may not be longer tban 17; if longer strings are necessary you may divide them among as many user defined functions as necessary and then define an

INPUT equation with them. See MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION for an example. The default constant and function definitions are listed in the following table.

K1 = 1 .0 + O.Oj

K2 = 50 + O.Oj

K3 = 75

+

O.Oj

F1 = (B/Rl/(K1 - B/R)

F2 � NR

F3 = (K1 + F2)/(K1 - F2)

F4= K2*F3

F5 = K3*F3

When the function is ENTERed there is no change in the trace unless tbe

INPUT is a function of the term just defined. This new USER DEFINED FUNCTION may now be used in a user defined

INPUT or STORE. The trace aritbmetic capabilities of the

HP

3577A make complicated error corrections or special conversions easy. See MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION for examples.

Note

"

Pressing INSTR PRESET or cycling the power switcb redefines all user defined functions. Be sure to SA YE instrument state if you wisb to retain tbe

USER DEFINED FUNCTIONS.

Recall Old State may be used to recover the user defined functions as tbey were defined when power was last turned off or in case of power failure.

4-13

Reference

Display

Format

Display Format

I[]

1IIl =: r

I

0

(

TRACE

1

)

0

(

TRACE 2

J

1=

-

:

@

• ••••

_ . . . .

OOOO

0000

0000

0000

�

.,

-

• e

,

Id

'

0

•

�OO]

0000

0 0, ,

0 c:=Jt=l0

DODO

Cl)

�

•

.

CD

'

I

DISPlAY FORMAT

( SCALE)

(

G

MKR

)

Figure 4-8.

DISPLAY FORMAT is one of five front panel sections. The hardkeys in this section display menus of softkeys used to:

INPUT

Define screen trace in terms of receiver inputs, stored data, user defined constants, and user defined functions

DISPLAY FCTN

Define screen trace in terms of how the complex data is interpreted

(LOG MAG, PHASE, G ROUP DELAY, et c

.

)

SCALE

Define graticule scale (REF LEVEL, /DIV, etc.)

(Marker) read data from the displayed trace

MKR

MKR

...

(Marker goes into) enter data using the position of the mark

STORE DATA

MEASR CAL

Store complex data as defined under the

INPUT

hardkey

Normalize or do partial (two term) or full (three term) error correction of one-port measurements

DEFINE MATH Define three constants and five functions

4-14

Reference

Display

Function

Display Function

- - -

11

[] f--

F

\iJ

188�

�

.

@��

- -- 71

,,.

HAG

,.

"'"

.... "

'''' ..

'EA'

-,

OflA'

"""

D

Figure 4-9.

DISPLAY FUNCTION is a hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section of the front panel used to display the menu of softkeys shown above. These softkeys may be used to define the screen trace in terms of how the complex data in trace memory is interpreted. If any of the top 7 entries in the menu are bright, the trace is on. The trace may be turned offwith the bottom softkey.

4-15

Reference

Display Function

LOG MAGNITUDE is a softkey in the DISPLAY FUNCTION menu. Immediately after preset or power-on, LOG MAG is the active DISPLAY FUNCTION. If not already bright, pressing this softkey defines the y-axis as log magnitude. It does not accept data entry. The default SCALE parameters for LOG MAGNITUDE are:

REF LEVEL: 0 dBm (without test set)

!DIV:

lO dBm

REF POS: 100%

The REFERENCE LEVEL and/DIVISION parameters are listed on the screen above the graticule. Reference refers to the dashed line; its value is 0 dBm and its position on the screen is top or 100%. The REFERENCE POSmON may be checked by pressing the hardkey

SCALE, and then the softkey REF pas. At this point data may be entered for the reference position.

UNEAR MAGNITUDE

is a softkey in the DISPLAY FUNCTION menu used to define the y-axis as linear magnitude. It does not accept data entry from the keypad. When UNEAR MAG is selected the

SCALE

parameters change to the following:

REF LEVEL: O.OV (without test set)

!DIV: 100 mV (without test set)

REF POS: 0.0%

PHASE

is a softkey used to define the y-axis as phase information. The softkey label PHASE

SLOPE appears in the

SCALE

menu when

PHASE is the current display function. Default SCALE parameters for PHASE are:

REF LEVEL: 0.0 deg

!DIV:

45 deg

REFPOS: 50%

To use this feature, select the trace you wish to be a phase trace by pressing either the

TRACE 1 or

TRACE 2 hardkey, press the DSPLY FCTN hardkey, and then press the PHASE softkey. The selected trace is now phase information.

4-16

Reference

Display Function

POLAR is a softkey used to display trace information in a polar format. In the polar format, only one trace is displayed so if both traces are oh in a rectangular format when polar is selected, the non-active trace is turned off_ The active trace is indicated by the LEDs over the TRACE 1 and

TRACE 2 hardkeys.

The polar format changes the menu listings of the SCALE, MKR, and MKR

..

hardkeys as shown in figure

4-10.

REF

RE " lEvEL

I OIV

POSN

T

REF

ON

Llt-E

OFF

J

Reel

"

.

�

AUTO

SCALE

FCU

SCALE

PHASE

REF

RfF

POSN

-

SMITH CH

ON OFF p..jASE

0

0

CJ

SLOPE

PH SLOPE

ON OFF

Polar

0

I I

M

A

R

K

E

R

ON

OFF

ZERO

MARKER f"Il(R OFSl

ON

OFF

MARKER

O

F

S

E

T

O

F

F

FREC

F

SE

T

J«R

(PI..

ON OFF

0

MARKER

MARKER

ON

ZERO

MARKER

""R

POSN oFF

OFST

OFF

0

D

ON

MAO

OFFSET

M

I(

R

__

REF lVl

MKR-

START

MKR _

STOP

""R_

(ENTER

MKR OFST

_SPAN

0

0

0

Reet

0

PHASE

OFFSET

FREO

OFFSeT

MARKER

MP R.I

Poler

CJ

I I

HKR -

HAX

MI(R -

"IN

MARKER

SEARCH

Reef

0

Sf ART

STOf'

Ml(R

�.::p

OFST

-SPAN

MKR --

REF t1KR -

MAX

MKR _

MIN

Poiar

0

0

0

I

SCALE

!

8

I � I

4-17

Reference

Display Function

REAL

is a softkey used to define the y-axis as real. The unit of measure for the real and imaginary display functions is volts or units. When this display function is selected the HP 3577 A displays the real half of the complex data stored in trace memory. See Appendix A on Data Processing and Structure.

IMAGINARY is a softkey used to define the y-axis as imaginary. The unit of measure for the imaginary and real display functions is volts or units. When this display function is selected the

HP 3577 A displays the imaginary half of the complex data stored in trace memory.

DELAY (GROUP) is a softkey used to select group delay as the display function. When selected, this soft key label changes to DELAY APERTURE. DELAY APERTURE activates a menu which allows the user to change the delay aperture.

Choosing a display function selects the math used to interpret the data in trace memory as the selected function. The data collected during the sweep does not depend on which function is selected. How the data is collected is determined by the source and receiver settings. See "Data

Processing And Structure" in Appendix A

The is

DELAY display function does not exist in the

LOG SWEEP, AMPLITUDE SWEEP, CW

DISPLAY FUNCTION

or if the sweep mode is menu

MANU

AL if the

SWEEP TYPE

Group delay is the derivative of phase with respect to frequency (dljf>/dt). In the HP 3577 A this is approximated by using the function 6tp/(Mx 360). The user selects the DELAY APERTIJRE (M) in

% of span (frequency) from a menu. The HP 3577 A calculates the change in phase for the specified aperture and divide

64> by

� f x 360.

The point plotted is located between the data points used to calculate it. For example, the group delay for 100 Hz may be calculated by measuring the change in phase between 90 and 1 10 Hz.

Therefore, no data is calculated for the endpoints of the trace. If you had specified a start frequency of 90 Hz, 100 Hz would be the first point with group delay data. This results in a trace that does not extend to the edges of the screen (more noticeable as the delay aperture is made larger).

The unit of measure for group delay is time. The readings are in seconds or fractions of seconds from 0.01 ns to 1000.0 seconds. Larger apertures yield finer resolution of units because

Tg

(group delay)

=

64>

(with fIXed phase resolution) divided by M. The larger the aperture (M), the smallerrg is.

When the display function is group delay (or any phase dependent function) the scale menu includes

"PHASE SLOPE." Initially this feature is on and the default value is 0 deglspan.

.. ',I

4·18

Reference

Display

Function

DELAY APERTURE is a softkey label that is created in the

DISPLAY FUNCTION menu when

DELAY is selected. Delay aperture is the frequency span over which the HP

3577

A evaluates phase and calculate group delay. This frequency span is in percent-of-span; selections include .5%,

1 %, 2%, 4%, 8%, and 16%. The selected aperture appears below the lower-right corner of the graticule in Hertz when the active trace is group delay. See figure 4-1 1.

To find and/or modify DELAY APERTIJRE press

DSPLY FCTN

and then DELAY. The softkey DELAY changes to read DELAY APERTURE when pressed. Pressing this key displays the list of apertures in the menu area. Large apertures have more of a smoothing effect on the trace than smaller apertures

Delay aperture is somewhat dependent upon sweep resolution (a softkey in the

FREQ menu).

When sweep resolution is

201, the delay aperture cannot be less than 1 % of span. The HP 3577 A automatically changes aperture from

.5% to the larger value when sweep resolution is changed.

Aperture is increased to 2% when a sweep resolution of 101 is selected, and is increased again to 4% when sweep resolution becomes 51. See the example for

SWEEP RES under the

FREQ hardkey.

FtEF LEVEL o 00008

60 QOO""SEC

ID I V

1 0 . 00006

:" 0 O O O .... SEC

MARKER ' 0

"I.A.G I SZ 1 ,

MARK!;-=! ' 0

OELA'I'( S 2 1 I t87 6 2 5 .

000 Hz

_ 2 . 19,,,e l i P 6 2 5

.

00 0

... z e. 4 . D " 'uSI!!:C

.

.

"

OF SP"N

'"

OF SPAN

V

/

/

/

/

./

/

1(\

------r

I

I

I

CENTER

AMI'>TO

' 0 ' 3 5 0 0 0 OOOl'1z

I S . DaB""

\

1'-../

SPAN:

/ so _

\

\

\

\

OQo .

'" nOOHz

C£LAV A�ER �OO. O"�

�

---

I--

'"

OF SPAN

,%

OF SPAN

."

OF SPAN

,

."

OF SPAN

RETURN

Figure

4-1 1

D

D n

D

D

D

D

D

4-19

Reference

Entry Block

Entry Block

r

R E F � E v E L v . O O O d B

I Q I V

1 0

D O O d B

M A R K E R 1 6 7

5 6 2 5 0 0 . 0 0 0 H z

M A G r S 2 1 )

/

/

/,

I1

/ .

"\

F N T

, . 7

�"

F

'Fn

. 2 00 . 0

P

O H Z

\

\

\

\

\

I

I

I 1

/ i

:

",\,

C � N T E R 1 6 7 5 6 2 5 a O . O O Q H z SPAN 1 0 0 O O O . O O O H z

A M F' T D 1 5 . D d B m

START

F R E O s .... op

F R E O

[ E N T E R

F R E Q

F R E Q

S P A N

C

FREO

STEP

SWEEP

RESOLUTN

F U L L

SWEEP

1

Figure 4- 1 2

The ENTRY BLOCK is a portion of the screen where entry messages appear. These messages show the data entered or modified_ Any time a new menu is selected and the active (bright) softkey label is a data entry item, its current value appears in the upper-center portion of the screen_ If the selected trace is changed to 2 and trace 2 is off, no message appears_

Example:

TRACE 1

Press

SCALE hard key

REF LEVEL

0,000 dBm

... g�

�,j

;:�"!

' .

... ..1

4-20

Reference

External Reference

External Reference

This input on the rear panel allows the HP 3577 A to be connected to an external frequency reference. When a signal is present on this input the EXT REF LED in the upper right hand corner of the front panel lights. The HP 3577 A phaselocks to signals from

-

7 dBm to + 15 dBm at any frequency, accurate to ± 20 ppm, that is tbe result of dividing 10 MHz by an integer and is above

100 kHz.

If the source connected to the EXTERNAL REFERENCE varies more than this, the

HP 3577 A switches to its own internal reference. When this occurs, the EXT REF LED extinguishes and the HP 3577 A beeps as pbaselock is lost during tbe switch. lIIl _ =

ID

= �

10 r-:c=J

�

0000

0

0000

-

0

1Ql

•

.

0

F'T":Ja;

[go,oA

•

.

•

.

., 0

•

I

EXT REF I

0

0

•

0

0

0

0 g g o g

0

0 g

0

0

000

Figure 4-13.

4-21

Reference

Frequency

Frequency

FREQUENCY

is a hardkey in the SOURCE section used to display the menu of softkeys shown above. These soft keys are used to modify the frequency parameters. Immediately after pressing

INSTR PRESET

or cycling power, START FREQ is the active (bright) softkey.

The top 5 softkeys in this menu allow data entry. SWEEP RESOLUTION calls another menu used to select the number of sampled frequencies or bins that are the data points of the trace. FULL

SWEEP is an immediate execution command that resets the start frequency and stop frequency to get a full sweep; or you may think of it as resetting the center frequency and the frequency span.

If the

SWEEP TYPE

is LOG FREQ the menu consists of tbe following:

START FREQ

STOP FREQ

FULL SWEEP

If the SWEEP TYPE is CW or AMPTD the menu consists of the following:

FREQ

STEP SIZE

If the

SWEEP TYPE is ALTERNATE, different frequency parameters may be entered for each of the two active traces. See SWEEP

TYPE,

ALTERNATE.

START FREQ

is a softkey used to enter data for the sweep start frequency. To enter a new start frequency:

\. Press the FREQ hardkey to display the menu

2. Press the START FREQ softkey (if label is not bright)


OR

Enter a new value with the numeric key pad

4. Select units from the menu (press a softkey)

4-22

Reference

Frequency re

., - =

� l e

.

Q ODClD

= 0000

�§

•

OO

•

•

IQl

0000

•

•

•

•

I

:>TAR!

F""Q

STOP

F,:jEa

C!NTER

FRfQ

F""Q

SPAN

( FREe mp

SW..,

RESOLUTN o o

FCC' sw£EP o

Figure 4-14.

STOP FREQ is a softkey used in the same manner as

START FREO for entering data for the sweep stop frequency. The

START and

STOP

FREQ values appear below the graticule.

CENTER FREQ is a softkey used in the same manner as

START and STOP FREO for entering data for the sweep center frequency. There is no defined center frequency when the

SWEEP TYPE is

LOG FREQ, CW, or

AMPTD. The

START and

STOP information below the graticule changes to

CENTER and

SPAN when either of the latter two are selected.

FREQ SPAN is a softkey used in the same manner as START

FREQ for entering data for the frequency span represented by the graticule. There is no frequency span when the

SWEEP TYPE is LOG FREQ, CW, or AMPTD. If the frequency span is 0 Hz and sweep time is less than 1000 seconds, the marker position reads in units of time.

CENTER FREQ STEP

is a softkey used to enter data for the step size taken when the increment/decrement arrows are used to modi

fy

the center frequency value. Data entry for this parameter is accomplished in the same manner as for START FREQ.

4-23

Reference

Frequency

SWEEP RESOLUTION is a softkey used to change the number of sample frequencies measured by the HP 3577 A The default value for sweep resolution is 401 points. These correspond to the bins referred to in Appendix A Each bin is as wide as the selected resolution bandwidth and has associated with it a bin number (position information) and measurement value. The user may select

401, 201, 101, or 51 points per sweep. The larger numbers provide a smoother trace while the lower number of points per sweep allow a shorter

SWEEP TIME.

To select a value for

SWEEP

RESOLUTION, press the FREQ hardkey, SWEEP RESOLUTN softkey, and then press the softkey corresponding to the desired value.

Note

"

Changing SWEEP RESOLUTION or SWEEP TYPE erases registers R, A, and B in trace memory (sets all zeros).

When the display function is group delay, delay aperture is somewhat dependent on sweep resolution. If the sweep resolution is decreased, the HP 3577 A automatically increases the delay aperture and displays the screen message "DELAY APERTIJRE INCREASED."

EXAMPLE:

1 . PRESET; Swp Res

=

4 01 , Aperture

=

.5% 01 span

2. Change Swp Res to 201, Aperture changes to 1 %

3.

Change Swp Res to 101 , Aperature changes to 2%

4. Return Swp Res to 4 01, Aperature does not change

FUU SWEEP is a softkey used to reset the start/stop sweep parameters to their maximum values.

Full sweep, in a linear sweep, is from 0 to 200 MHz. In log sweep, full sweep is from 5 Hz to

200 MHz. The presence of a test set does not affect full sweep.

4-24

Reference

Gratlcule

Graticule

I

Ig i

I ·

.

1IIl _

I! I:

.

'

I i

Ill,

L

�

E

�

�

I: oooo

0000 ld

.

/

8

P6'

[G"600]

0 0 . .

0

�

•

.

•

.

•

.

0 0 <0

I

GRATICULE

is a scale for measuring quantities displayed on the CRT (referred to as the display screen). The HP 3577A has different graticules for LOG and

UNEAR sweep types.

POLAR display function and changes the POLAR display graticule to a Smith chart with a softkey in the

Scale menu.

I

I

,

,

I

:

,

I i

1001<

'H

"H

I

1 0011

Figure

4-15.

4-25

4·26

Reference

Hardkey

Hardkey

� � """"A _ · _

I D o 0 0 0

0000 r---:::-

--'

� a • • •

I euiue

=

I

IF;;;-��;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;��J

0000 r=====' � ,

Figure

4-16 o o o i

11

HARD KEY refers to all of the keys on the front panel that have command names printed on them. Most hardkeys are used to display a menu of softkey labels. Exceptions to this are the keys in the DATA ENTRY section, the

TRIG/RESET key, the

LCL key,

TRACE

1 and

TRACE

2, and the

INSTRUMENT PRESET key.

Reference

Input

I nput

.. -= la

,

" !

,

MR

""

OATA

REO uSER OEF

'NPUT copy

TIC 2�1

".17.<1.

I

(g

0

0

0

lQl

0000 0

-� fd:00I

Cl

• •

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

---:h 0

I

USER Cle:fK

N'VT

CoPY

Tre 2 ... 1

FWO REV

.4_1'B

512

S22 e ... T.A

REO

TEST sn

0

0

0

0

Figure 4-17A!8.

INPUT is a bard key in the DISPLAY FORMAT section used to display the menus of softkeys shown in figure 4-17. These softkeys may be used to define the active trace in terms of

1 .

2.

Receiver inputs

Data registers (contain stored traces)

3. User defined functions

4. User defined complex constants.

Connecting an HP 35677

A/B

S-parameter Test Set to the HP 3577 A changes this menu as shown in figure 4-17B. If the test set is used, the S-parameters may be turned off witb a softkey found under the

SPCL FCTN hard key. When the S-parameters are turned off, the sbown in figure 4-17 A

INPUT menu cbanges to that

Without the test set, the default selection for

R,

INPUT

is the R input. When tbe INPUT definition is

A,

or a, the trace appears

as

a display function of tbe signal at the selected input. The tbree inputs are identical. If NR or BiR are selected

as

the

INPUT

then the trace consists of the data at the A or a input divided by the data at R. This may be used to remove the response of the source from the trace by using a power splitter as shown in figure 4-17C.

4-27

Reference

Input

,

[11]

--

_.-

F'"

[]

I"

'"

=

=

,

-

,....

-

L

@

• c::::J c:::oco c::::J 0000

0000

0000

-=-

[Ql

0 o 0 c:=J�O

0 0 0 0

Iooo-a

�

�

0 0 0 0

0[0

• •

-

,

I

,.

�,

•

J

O U T

•

,.

@

I

Figure 4-17C

The DATA REG softkey may be used to select one of the four data registers as the INPUT definition.

The USER DEFINED INPUT softkey may be used to construct an equation using constants, data registers, inputs, and previously dermed functions as tenns. The user may also copy the

INPUT defmition for the other trace into the definition of the active trace using the Copy Trace softkey.

With the S-parameter test set the selections for inputs R, A, B,

INPUT

menu has most of the same features. In place of the

AIR,

and BIR are the S-parameters Sll, S21, S12, and S22. When the

USER DEFINED INPUT is active the softkey label TEST SET FWD/REV appears at the bottom of the menu.

DATA REGISTER

is a softkey used to select a trace stored in a data register as the displayed trace.

Pressing this softkey changes the menu to a list of the four data registers, D1-D4. Pressing one of these softkeys accomplishes the selection of that data register as the trace INPUT. Be aware that the sweep parameters of the stored trace may be entirely different from those in effect now. SCALE parameters are the only values that affect the trace when the

INPUT

is defined to be a data register. rc-';

\" '

4-28

Reference

Input

USER DEFINED INPUT is a softkey used to create an equation to define a trace

INPUT that is more complicated than the common ones offered at the top of the menu. The user may use

1. The three receiver inputs

2. Three user defined complex constants

3. Four data registers

4.

Five user defined functions as terms in this equation.

To make a USER DEFINED INPUT:

1. Press the

INPUT


2. Press the USER DEF INPUT softkey (if label is not bright)

3. Press the softkey corresponding to a math term

4.

5.

Press the softkey corresponding to a math function

Repeat steps 3 and 4 until the equation is complete

6.

Press the ENTER softkey

COPY Trc n - m is a softkey used to defme the INPUT of the active trace to be identical to the other trace INPUT. The softkey label is COpy INPUT 2

-

1 when TRACE 1 is selected and

COPY INPUT 1

-

2 when TRACE 2 is selected.

TEST SET FWD/REV is a push-push toggle type sofikey used to select which of the two

S-pa r a m ete r test set ports is the source.

When FWD is bright PORT 1 is the signal source and when

REV is bright PORT 2 is the source. This softkey appears only when the USER DEF INPUT softkey is active and the test set is connected.

4-29

4-30

Reference

Instrument Preset

Instrument Preset

l1iJ

-

-

-.A_

- -

It]

I

1

1

�

�

@

0 c=J D O D O

0

0000

0000

I F= ===I .

Id

0

�

0 0 0 0 c=J,qO

D O D O

�

O

O

=a

C&:

�

0

(j)

0

�

�

I

Figure

4-18.

(j)

0

�

Figure 4-18

INSTRUMENT PRESET

This key resets the values of is a green hardkey in the INSTRUMENT STATE section.

HP 3577 A parameters to a known state. This operating state is especially useful

as

a reference condition. Immediately after preset or power-on, the HP 3577 A parameters are set to their default values. These parameters and their preset conditions are shown in table 4-1.

.

'

� ;

.!:

.•

Reference

Instrument Preset

Table 4-1

Function

P resat Condition

Display function

Input (both traces)

Active trace

Scale

Reference level

Reference position

Start frequency

Stop frequency

Amplitude

Amplitude step size

Sweep type

Sweep time

Sweep mode

Sweep resolution

Trigger mode

Aesolution bandwidth

Averaging

Attenuation (input)

Impedance (input)

Length A

Length A

Length B

User def constants

User del functions

Wilhoul lasl set

Log magnitude

R input

Trace I la dB IDIV

O dBm

1 00% (for log mag) o Hz

200 MHz

- 1 0 dBm

1 dB

Linear frequency

I second

Continuous

401 pointslspan

Free Run

I kHz

Off

20 dB (all 3 inputs)

50 ohms (all 3 inputs)

On, 0 meters

On, 0 meters

On, 0 meters

Kl = 1 0 + jO.O

K2 = 50.0 + jO.O

K3=750+ jO.O

Fl = (B/A)I (K1 - B/R)

F2 = AIR

F3 = (K1 + F2)1 (KI - F2)

F4 = K2*F3

F5 = K3*F3 same same same same same same

On, 1 .3 meters same same same same same same same same

With test sel same

S21 same same same same

100 kHz same

+15 dBm same same same same same same

Where Fl converts closed loop gain to open loop gain, F2 is input reflection (if the test set is configured forward). F3 converts the reflection measurement to normalized impedance for port the test set, F4 converts normalized impedance to actual impedance where

Zo

=

500, and F5 converts normalized impedance to actual inpedance where

Zo

=

1

750. For a more complete listing of of preset parameters, refer to the REMOTE OPERATION section.

4-31

Reference

Instrument State

Instrument State

INSTRUMENT STATE

is one of five front panel sections. The hardkeys in this section may be used to

SAVE

and

RECALL

instrument state, PRESET the HP screen, monitor the

HP-m status of the

HP

3577 A,

PLOT what appears on the

3577 A, or use the SPECIAL FUNCTIONS.

SPECIAL FUNCTIONS include changing the HP-IB address. confidence testing the HP

3577A, turning the beeper on and off, service diagnostics. and INPUT menu S-parameter control.

INSTRUMENT STATE is also a term that refers to the state or values of all parameters. This state may be SAVEd and later RECALLed. For more information on the features described here. refer to the hardkey of interest.

'"'

-le l=f:

g

�

� O��IDRDI

8888

•

•

•

INSTRUMENT STATE

0

[Doo"D]

•

•

[;;.a

•

•

I

(

SPeL

FCTN

) (

B

SAVE

8

LeL

) (RECALL) r o

TAU(

INSTR

PRESE T r 1

0

""MOrE

0

USTEN o "Aa

Figure 4-19.

4-32

Reference

Knob

Knob

MARKER

0

ENTRY

0 u

Figure

4-20.

The KNOB in the DATA EN1RY section is used to move the marker or modifY data. It is toggled between these two modes with the unmarked key above it. The current mode of the knob is indicated by the LED's above it. The knob may not be used to change the HP·m address.

4-33

Reference

Length

Length

--

0

;:::;:

�

@

�8° .

��

��

•

•

•

•

• •

• c '::::"RR

J.EN,jll1 A.

. D

LENGTM JO.

"" _

LENGTH B

."

.

LfNGTH D

STEP

= =

Figure 4-21 q

B

LENGTH is a hard key in the RECEIVER section of the front panel used to display the menu of softkey labels shown above. These softkeys may be used to select the electrical length of each of the receiver inputs to compensate for, or simulate cable lengths. Propagation velocity is assumed to be the speed of light. The actual cable length should be compensated for using a relative velocity.

Each input"s LENGTH feature may be turned off, which is equivalent to setting its value to O.

To change the value of length for a receiver input:

\. Press the

LENGTH


2. Press the softkey LENGTH_ for the channel to be modified (if the label is not bright)


O

R


Select units from the menu (press a softkey)

Length affects phase functions only; there is no loss factor. If the current DISPLAY FUNCTION is

LOG or

UN MAG there is no change in the trace with changes in

LENGTH.

Preset or default value: O.Om.

ON

(without test set)

Upper limit: 1 second or 300,000,000 meters

Lower limit:

-

1 second or

-

300,000,000 meters

Resolution: .001 ns or .1 cm

Menu Units: rn, cm,

SEC, mSEC, jtSEC, nSEC, EXP

4-34

Reference

Local

I

Local

I

III

:I.nA -.-

1 1

!

r

[]

I

0

Fa

(6

�

(

[

0

0

0

1 ;=

�

1

0 0

1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0000

0 0

00

� ,

0

0

0

(

0

0

0

0 l H O

100001

=

OQO LJ q Ill:) :

@

0

@

0

@

0

� (@) �

,

,

I

I

Figure 4-22.

LOCAL

is a hardkey in the INSTR

HP-IB status of the HP

3577

A from REMOTE to LOCAL has not been issued.

UMENT STATE section of the front panel used to change the

if

the LOCAL LOCKOUT command

The LCL key is part of the HP-IB STATUS block.

This block has four LED indicators that show the

HP-IB status for REMOTE, TALl(, LISTEN, and SRQ. If the REMOTE LED is illuminated, the front panel keys are disable until the

LCL key returns LOCAL control (which extinguishes the

REMOTE LED). If the HP-IB controller has issued the LOCAL LOCKOUT command and the

REMOTE LED is illuminated, the

LCL key, too, is disabled. See the section on remote operation.

4-35

Reference

Marker

Marker

MARKER is a hardkey in the DISPLAY

FORMAT section of the front panel used to display the menus of softkey labels shown in figure 4-23. These softkeys may be used to read data from the displayed trace. After being PRESET the HP 3577 A's knob is in the marker position mode. The marker (small circle) may be moved to any part of the trace with the knob and tbe data for that point appears in the

MARKER BLOCK above tbe right half of the graticule. Note that tbe

MARKER information is valid even tbough tbe trace may be clipped by the upper or lower edges of the graticule. The arrow keys may also be used to move the marker across the trace. If the frequency span is 0 Hz and the sweep time is less than 1000 seconds, the marker position reads out in uni

IS of time.

'"' - =

I�

�

� w

MARKER

F'09<

::

MA.RKER

MKR OFST

ON OFF

MARKER

OFFSET

�'o�j f---

!----; i-�

:

;

:

:

D

D

B

8888

-

[Ql

0

�

[0""00""0]

�

.o

a

•

•

•

•

•

•

0

I

NARKER

PO"

MARKER

"" OFF

D

D

ZERO

MARKER t1KR OFST

ON OFF

MAO

�SET

PI1ASE

OFFSEl

'REO

OFFSET

MAF!I(ER

MP 1'IJ o

D

Figure

4-23.

4-36

Reference

Marker

MARKER POSITION

is a softkey which must be selected when the arrow keys are used to move the marker. Note that when MARKER POSITION is bright the knob moves the marker in either the

MARKER or

ENTRY modes.

MARKER ON/OFF is a push-push toggle type softkey used to turn the marker and the

MARKER

BLOCK off and back on. The default condition is on. If the marker is off, pressing the MKR hardkey turns it on.

ZERO MARKER is a softkey which turns on the

OFFSET MARKER and sets its X-

Y coordinates

(offset values) to those of the regular marker. This marker appears as a small triangle on top of the regular marker (which is a small circle). When

ZERO MARKER is activated the marker information block above the graticule contains

OFFSET information. The offset marker hecomes the reference for the regular marker.

MARKER OFFSET ON/OFF

is a softkey used to turn on the offset marker at the values represented by the

MARKER OFFSET

(magnitude) and

FREQ OFFSET parameters. This is a push-push toggle type softkey. When on, the triangular offset marker appears on the screen (if its coordinates are on-scale) and the word

"MARKER" changes to

"OFFSET' in the marker block above the graticule.

MARKER OFFSET

is a softkey used to enter a reference value for the Y-axis of the

OFFSET

MARKER.

The default value for

MARKER OFFSET is 0.0 dBm. To change this value:

1. Press the

MKR


2. Press the MARKER OFFSET softkey (if label is not bright)

3. Modify the data with the knob or arrow keys

OR



FREQUENCY OFFSET

is a softkey that allows the user to enter a reference value for the X-axis of the

OFFSET MARKER.

The default value for FREQUENCY OFFSET is 0

Hz

(in a frequency sweep). When

SWEEP TYPE

is AMPLITUDE this softkey label reads "AMPLITUDE OFFSET." This parameter may be modified in the same manner

as

MARKER OFFSET.

4-37

Reference

Marker

MARKER COUPUNG ON/OFF

is a push�push toggle type softkey used when two traces are on. In the default setting (ON) both markers move together when the knob is rotated. If MARKER

COUPLING is turned OFF, turning the knob moves only the marker on the active trace.

When the DISPLAY FUNCTION is POLAR only one trace is active, so there is only one active marker. This marker has three values associated with it; frequency, magnitude and phase (or frequency, real, and imaginary). With the POLAR DISPLAY FUNCTION the MKR menu appears as shown in figure

4-23B.

The following discussion of softkey features assumes that the active display function is POLAR. The top four softkey labels operate in the POLAR DISPLAY

FUNCTION the same as they do in a rectangular display function.

MAGNITUDE OFFSET is a softkey used to enter or modify the value of magnitude for the offset marker. The default value of magnitude offset is O.OV without a test set and 0.0 units with a test set.

Pressing the

ZERO MARKER softkey resets this value to the current magnitude value of the regular marker. This softkey label changes to read with the MARKER M,P R,I

"REAL OFFSET' when the selected units are changed soft key. To change the value of this parameter:

1. Press

DSPL Y FCTN

hardkey to display a menu

2. Press the POLAR softkey (if label is not bright)

3. Press the

MKR


4. Press the MAG OFFSET softkey (if label is not bright)

5. Modify the value with the knob or the arrow keys

OR

6. Enter a new value for MAG OFFSET with the numeric key pad

Select units from menu (press a softkey)

PHASE OFFSET

is a softkey which allows data entry of the phase data to place the offset marker as a reference for the regular marker. This parameter value may be entered or modified in the same manner as described previously for MAGNITUDE OFFSET. The OFFSET MARKER may be on or off when this is done. Pressing the

ZERO MARKER softkey resets this data to the current phase of the regular marker. The softkey label changes to IMAGINARY OFFSET when the units are changed with the softkey at the bottom of the menu from magnitude

& phase to real & imaginary. This is described later in this discussion.

FREQUENCY OFFSET is a softkey that operates the same in the POLAR as in a rectangular display function. Note that in polar display function, changing this value does not change the screen position of the offset marker. The value of this parameter may be modified to offset the frequency readout in the marker information block.

MARKER M,P R,I is a push-push toggle type softkey which changes the units of the marker information from magnitude & phase to real & imaginary. The default setting is magnitude and phase units. To change the units to real and imaginary, press the

MARKER M,P R,I softkey once.

Pressing it a second time returns the units to magnitude and phase. The selected unit type is indicated by bright letters M,P for magnitude and phase or bright letters R,I for real and imaginary.

4·38

. ,

Reference

Marker -

Marker -

..

- -

1[1

""

"

-

"".

-

�T.Ri

""

.

srop

"'.

-

(ENTER t'lCR OFST

_ SPAN

"'.

-

MA>

"'.

-

�N

Cl

D

D

�B

0

0

"".

R TARG

MKR_

L TARG

"'ARKER

TARGET

RETURN

. �Ir.-:

.

0

:""':"'1

000 ro6o�

§§§§�

•

•

• • •

D

D

"· ----�

I I

�

'

MKR_

START f1KR _

I

"" - 0

FI.J..L SCL

0 c;;;�D

KKR OFST

-SPAN

'

��;,

" "

MAX

MKR _

M'"

�

Reclangular

Polar

Figure

4-24.

MARKER

-

Is a hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section of the front panel used to display the menus of softkeys shown above. Some of these softkeys may be used to enter data corresponding to the position of the marker. Others move the marker to points of interest.

MARKER - REFERENCE LEVEL is a softkey used to change the current value of reference level to the magnitude (position) of the marker. This redefines the level at the dashed line such that the trace moves up or down putting the marker on the reference line. To use this feature:

L

Move the marker to the point on the trace whose magnitude you wish to be the new reference level (dashed line val ue)

2.

Press the

MKR

.... hardkey to display the menu

3.

Press the

MKR .... REF

LVL softkey

4·39

Reference

Marker

...

MARKER ... START FREQ is a softkey t1Sed to change the current value of start frequency to the frequency (position) of the marker. To use this feature:

1 . Move the marker to the point on the trace that you wish to be the new start frequency

2. Press the

MKR

... hard key to display the menu

3. Press the MKR ... START softkey

MARKER

...

STOP FREQ is a softkey used to change the current value of stop frequency to the frequency (position) of the marker. To use this feature:

1. Move the marker to the point on the trace that you wish to be the new stop frequency

2. Press the MKR

... hard key to display the menu

3. Press the MKR ... STOP softkey

MARKER ... CENTER FREQ is a softkey that allows the present frequency of the marker to be entered into the center frequency value. To use this feature:

1 . Move the marker to the point on the trace that you wish to be the new center frequency

2. Press the

MKR

... hardkey to display the menu

3. Press the

MKR ... CENTER softkey

MARKER OFFSET ... SPAN is a softkey used to select new START and STOP frequencies (i.e., frequency span). The start and stop frequencies are selected by positioning the reference and regular markers. To use this feature:

1. Move the marker to the point on the trace that you wish to be one of the end frequencies

2. Press the MKR hard key to display a menu

3.

Press the ZERO MARKER softkey to turn on the offset marker

4. Move the marker to the point on the trace that you wish to be the other end frequency

5. Press the MKR

... hardkey to display the menu

6. Press the MKROFST ... SPAN softkey

440

Reference

Marker -

MARKER - MAX is a softkey used to moye the marker to the bin containing the largest value.

To use this feature:

1. Press the

MKR ...


2. Press the MKR

...

MAX softkey

MARKER ... MIN

is a softkey used to move the marker to the bin containing the smallest value.


1. Press the

MKR


2. Press the MKR - MIN softkey

Note that if future sweeps create maximum or minimum values in bins other than the position of the marker, the marker does not move to that bin. The marker remains at the position selected through the use of the last MKR ... MIN or MKA .. MAX softkey.

MARKER SEARCH

is a softkey used to search for a target value defined by the user. Pressing this softkey displays a new menu shown in figure 4-24B. The active softkey in this menu is

MARKER TARGET.

MARKER .. RIGHT TO TARGET is a softkey used to search to the right for the target value entered by the user. The default value of the MARKER TARGET is 1 0.01 dBm without the test set and

-

3 dB with the test set. To use this feature: t. Press

MKA

... hardkey to display a menu

2. Press the MARKER SEARCH softkey to display the second menu

3.

Press the MKR ... R TARG softkey

If the target value does not exist to the right of the marker, the screen message "TARGET VALUE

NOT FOUND" appears and the marker does not change position. If the value exists in more than one bin the marker moves in the selected direction to the first bin containing the value closest to the target value. Refer to the marker information block above the graticule.

4-41

Reference

Marker ..

MARKER .. LEFT TO TARGET is a soft\cey used to search to the left for the Target value entered by the user. The default value of the

MARKER TARGET is 10.01 dBm without a test set and

-

3 dB with a test set. To use this feature:

I. Press the MKR

.. hard key to display a menu

2. Press the

MARKER SEARCH

softkey to display the second menu

3.

Press the

MKR .. L TARG

softkey

If the target value does not exist to the left of the marker. the screen message "TARGET VALUE

NOT FOUND" appears and the marker does not change position. If the value exists in more than one bin the marker moves to the closest bin containing the target value. The bin value is not n ecess arily exactly equal to the target value. Refer to the marker information block above the graticule.

MARKER TARGET is a softkey used to enter a value

to

search for with the marker. The default value of the target is 10.01 dBm without a test set and

-

3

dB with a test set. To use this feature:

I.

Press the MKR

..


2. Press the MARKER SEARCH softkey to display the second menu

3.


OR



RETURN is a softkey that displays the previous menu. This may also be done by pressing the

MKR .. hardkey.

When

the

DISPLAY FUNCTION is POLAR

the

MKR

..

menu appears with different softkey labels than when the

DISPLAY FUNCTION

is one of the rectangular formats as shown in figure 4-24C.

The following discussions of softkey features assume that the active

display

function is polar.

MARKER

..

FULL SCALE is a softkey used to change the value of FULL SCALE to the magnitude

(position) of the marker. This sets the level of the outer ring of the polar graticule to the current magnitude of the marker which has the effect of changing the scale. To use this feature:

1.

Move the marker to the point you wish to be on the outer ring of the polar graticule

2. Press the MKR

..


3.

Press the

MKR .. FULL SCL

soft key

442

Reference

Marker ..

MARKER .. START FREQUENCY is a softkey that also appears in the MKR menu for rectangular display formats. It works the same for polar fonnats. ]n POLAR there is only one trace and only one marker. The marker has three values associated with it: frequency, magnitude, and phase (or frequency, real, and imaginary). The MKR - START FREQ softkey puts the present frequency value of the marker into the start frequency value.

MARKER .. STOP FREQUENCY

is a soft key that works the same in polar as rectangular display fonnats.

MARKER .. CENTER FREQUENCY

is a softkey that works the same in polar as rectangular display fonnats.

MARKER OFFSET .. FREQ SPAN is a softkey that works the same in polar as rectangular display formats.

MARKER .. REFERENCE

is a hardkey that puts the current pbase value of the marker into tbe value of the reference line. This has the effect of rotating the polar trace, leaving the marker on the dashed line . To use this feature:

1 . Move the marker to the point on the trace that you wisb to be the new pbase reference

2.

Press the

MKR

.. hardkey to display tbe menu

3. Press tbe MKR .. REF softkey

MARKER

..

MAX

is a softkey that works the same in polar as rectangular display formats.

MARKER .. MIN is a softkey tbat works tbe same in polar as rectangular display fonnats.

4-43

Reference

Measurement

Calibration


i

.. _ j

ID

-

c=

==

=-

"

0000

0

•

@

0000

F_

It

.

0

[Ql

0

" " :===F ro6o�

D Oe "

•

.

•

§ o

,oa

•

.

Cl

I

NORHLlZE

NORHLlZE

(SHORT)

ONE PORT

PART (Al

ONE PORT

FULL CAL

F"lIJure

4-25.

MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION is a hardkey in the

DrSPLA Y

FORMAT section of the front panel used to display the menu of softkeys shown in the figure above. Items in the MEASR CAL menu help the user calibrate out the effects of measurement hardware imperfections. None of these softkey functions are operable if the active sweep type is alternate sweep.

Reference

Measurement

Calibration

NORMALIZE is a softkey that is used to remove cable lengths and imperfections in the source flatness from simple measurements. To use this feature:

1.

Set up the measurement

2. Replace the device under test with a through (barrel adapter)

3. Wait for a full sweep update of the trace

4.

Press the

MEASR CAL hardkey to display the menu

5.

Press the

NORMUZE softkey

6.

Replace the barrel with the test device

!Ill =--:; =-_

I

F'

IDl

� rg c::=J

0000

0000

0000

�

�

�

[Ql

0

0 , , .

[D"oo:oJ

10 F ,o, o

0 j

,

.<

•

0

•

,

«ii> �

1- - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1

�JJ

I

�

Fig ure 4-26.

To normalize, the

HP 3577 A uses the INPUT as it is originally defined to store the trace in register

01 (for trace I) or 02 (for trace 2). Then it redefines the INPUT to be "old INPUT'IDI or "old

INPUT'ID2. whichever applies (dependent on trace being operated on).

NORMAUZE may also be used to calibrate a reflection measurement. The configuration shown in figure

4-27 should be used with an open as the standard. The procedure is the same as previously described except that. instead of replacing the device under test with a through 1 meg. the O. V.T. should be disconnected and the connection to the directional bridge left open.

NORMAUZE (SHORT) may be used in the same manner as

NORMAUZE for normalizing single port (reflection) measurements. The standard used should be a short.

4-45

4-46

Reference

Measurement calibration

,

11 lIJ == _ .. -

Note

, i

=

[DJ

nil

r----.

I

-

0 c=J 0 0 0 0

0 c=J 0 0 0 0

0000

0000

0

@l

0000

, r=== =;

Id

1

� �l c=JHO ro:oo=o] , o

FP.ol

,

�

.

,

�

0 tI!

0

�

� t

Figure

4-27.

'x

�

OUT

STD

� r

The HP 3577 A does not allow normalization of INPUT expressions other than A.

B, R, NR, OR B/R

::',�.

:. ...•

Reference


A

s

PORT 1 lZ

where:

M actual

=

D = Tt

F = Tt

lac:

Mmeas - 0

F

Figure 4-28.

ONE PORT PARTIAL CAL is a softkey label in the MEASUREMENT CALffiRATION menu used to improve accuracy of return loss measurements by doing two-term error correction. Use of this feature destroys the contents of registers D3 and D4 and redefines the function

F2 and the constant

K1.

T o use this feature:

1. Set up the measurement (INPUT, FREQ, AMPTD, SWEEP TIME etc.)

2.

P r ess the

MEASR CAL


3. The HP 3577 A displays a screen message to LEA YE PORT 1 OPEN

4. Disconnect the cable to PORT 1

5. Press the CONTINUE CAL Softkey

6. Wait for the HP 3577 A to do a complete sweep

7.

The HP 3577A displays a message to INSTALL REFERENCE LOAD ON PORT

1 of the

HP 35677

AJB S-parameter test Set

8. Install a calibrated load of characteristic impedance on PORT 1 of the HP 35677 AJB

S-parameter test set

9. Press the CONTINUE CAL softkey

10. Wait for the message CALIBRATION COMPLETE

1 1.

Reconnect the device to be tested to PORT 1

4-47

Reference


When calibration is complete the INPUT is the user defined function F2, calibrated reflection. To display the normalized impedance function' select INPUT = F3 as follows:

I. Press the

INPUT


2.

Press the USER DEF INPUT softkey

3. Press the

F softkey

4. Press the 3 softkey (or 3 in the numeric key pad)

5. Press the ENTER softkey

To display the definition of F3:

I. Press the DEFINE MATH hardkey

2. Press the DEFINE FUNCTION softkey

3. Press the F3 softkey and read "(Kl +F2)/(KI-F2)" in the entry block portion of the screen

The error model expression is Mm ... = D

+

F"Mactual

where D is the directivity error term and F is the frequency response error term. When calibrated the HP 3577 A displays

Mactual

=

(Mmeas-Dl )/F.

To solve for Mactuah the HP 3577A stores NR measured with an open termination into D4. Then it stores the directivity error term D (with the standard load) in D3 and redefines D4 to be D4-D3, the frequency response error term F. The user defined function F2 is now the calibrated reflection function used to solve for M.etuBI; F2=(NR-D3)/D4 which represents M.et",,1 =(Mm

... -

D

)

/F

. s

1< ,: !

'X'

PORT 1

M

QClUOI

Mmeos

macs ..

0

T where lz o

•

Tt

T

=

21sc <Cc - Ttl Iso - Ioe

I

Is, - tac

5

•

::.

-"s e =-

Ise - la c r:",oc�

Fig ure

4-29.

4-48

Reference


ONE PORT FULL CAL is a softkey label in the MEASUREMENT CALmRATION menu used to improve return loss measurement accuracy� Use of this feature destroys the contents of data registers

D1

(for trace

I)

or

D2

(for trace

2), D3, and

D4, and redefme F1,

F2, and

Kt.

Use of this feature is identical to that of the two-term error correction described previously, with the addition of a step requiring that PORT 1 of the S-parameter test set be terminated with a short.

Messages on the screen ask the user to LEAVE PORT 1 OPEN, INSTALL SHORT ON PORT 1, and INSTALL REFERENCE LOAD ON PORT 1 (of tbe S-parameter test set). After each termination is connected, the CONTINUE CAL softkey is pressed and the HP 3577 A collects data by sweeping over the selected frequency range (during which we must patiently wait). When this sequence is complete, F2 is the displayed trace and has been defined to be tbe CALIBRATED

REFLECTION. The normalized impedance function may be displayed by selecting F3 for the user defined INPUT, as previously described.

The error model expression used for the 3-term correction function is Mmeas=(D+ T ' M a ctua l

)/

(

I-S*Mac,ual

) where D is the correction factor for directivity, T is the correction factor for transmission and S is the factor for source match. When calibrated, the HP 3577 A displays

Mac,ual = (Mmcas-D)/ (S'Mmcas+ T).

To solve for Mac,uah the HP 3577 A stores AIR measured with the open termination in D3. Then it requests tbe short termination and stores (AIR)+ D3 in D4, stores (AIR)-D3 in

D 1 (or

D2, depending on the active trace) defines

K1 =2+jO, and stores

Kt 'AIR 'D3 in

03.

Next, it requests a standard load and stores D3-AIR *D4 in 03, stores 03/01 (or 02) in 03 (wbich is now used as the error term B), stores the error term C), and stores

Kt' AIR-04 to 04, stores

D4/Ot

(or 02) to D4 (now equivalent to

AIR in

Ot

(or D2) (which is A in the error model expression). Finally, it defines F1 = 04* AIR + D3 and F2=(AIR-02)/F1.

Note

..

Changing either START or STOP frequencies destroys the calibration. Be sure to repeat normalization or calibration after any frequency modification.

4-49

Reference

Menu

Menu

A MENU is a list of softkey labels that is displayed on the CRT next to the column of softkeys. This part of the display is called the ME NU AREA

D •

D,," ll[�fL g . IIOO<Oll

'D'�

.0.00''''

._.

.. .04<:",.

'67

I

'/

!

/

/

'�NTlii Fl

.-�

,,7 U u , u ... l ' •• .

I

\

\

\

"\.

OO_ '00 DOO .

i

I

.....

Figure

4-30.

--

--

-

DeLAY

..

I

-

, �

o o

B

4-50

Reference

Menu

No menu contains more than eight softkey labels. Each softkey label is associated with the softkey beside it such that pressing its softkey effecis the command represented by the softkey label.

Menus change whenever a hard key is pressed or, when a menu is more than one level deep certain softkeys are pressed (see figure 4-31).

Hardkeys are the stenciled keys on the front panel that do not change definition. Hardkeys

(excluding the

DATA

EN1RY section) are used to display menus of softkey labels. Five hardkeys that do not display a menu are

INSTR PRESET, LCL, TRACE 1

and

TRACE 2,

and

TRIG/RESET.

MKR -

REF LVL

MKR --

S T A R T

MKR -

STOP

MKR --

(ENTER

D e

MKR -

R TARG

MKR -

L TARG

MARKER

TARGET

D

D

MKR OFST

-- SPAN

MKR -

MAX

MKR --

MIN

MARKER

SEARCH

1

GJ

Figure 4-31.

RETURN

[

D

I

I

4-51

4-52

Reference

Message Block

Message Block

The

MESSAGE BLOCK is the area within

the

graticule in which messages appear. See figure

These messages may be warning. error. or general information messages. For a listing of these

4-32.

messages see Appendix C.

I r

,

!

0

ERC AO oN

O N U T ,

STOP 200

0 0 0

O O O . OOOHz coo

MAO

PHASE f'tOLAR

REAl.

' MAG

SWR

C O N

MAO

'

!

�o

0

0

DELAY

OFF

0

0

Figure

4-32.

.

..

.1.: ... ,

Reference

Output

Output

The

OUTPUT of the HP 3577 A is the signal source. It is located at the lower center position on the front panel and is the left-most of the four type-N connectors arranged along the bottom. The

OUTPUT signal is controlled by the keys in the SOURCE section of the front panel. The characters across the bottom of the CRT show the status of the frequency and amplitude of the source. In LOG and ALTERNATE sweep modes the amplitude information does not appear on the screen.

I!:J

D

IQCOOOI�� i§§�a

_

..

��Vt!L

01 DeOal!

1 0 1 11

'01 000<111

.....

O ' S2 ' )

�.1 �Do_a�o

_ ' ) . '7

1

..

�

!

� I

\

1

7 r7

I

\

<:I!:Nl,,'" H,? '.2 �oo. ooo

_Ta 1 ' . 0 ... ..

1 1

...

S,OO

.....

"l

I

,

Figure 4-33. Output Signal Information

The OUTPUT has protection circuitry that disconnects the output port if a signal level greater than

4V appears on the connector. This open condition is called TRIPPED. The screen message

"SOURCE TRIPPED, Clear trip on AMPTD menu" directs the user to the AMPTD menu where the softkey CLEAR TRIP may be found.

4-53

Reference

OverlOOd

Overload

OVERLOAD occurs when a signal level larger than 0.0 dBm (with ATIEN

=

20 dB) or - 20 dBm

(with A TIEN are below 10

=

0 dB) is applied to one of the three receiver inputs. (If the frequencies of interest

IcHz, reduce tbese signal levels 6 dB). When an input is overloaded the measurement accuracy is degraded and action should be taken to reduce the input level. When an overload occurs, the HP 35TI A sounds an audible alarm (if the beeper is

O

N). illuminates the red

OVERLOAD

LED above the input being overloaded. and displays a warning message on the screen. The red alarm

LED is a real-time indication of an overload condition while the screen message remains until the beginning of a new sweep.

�

===========:JI

RECEIVER ' ::

=== === === ==

=:J

INPUT R

•

OVERLOAD

INPUT A

•

OVERLOAD

INPUT

B

•

OVERLOAD

PROBE PWR

@

PROBE PWR

@

+3n dBm

(SOO)

25V DC MAX

PROBE PWR

@

Figure

4-34.

Note

"

If an overload occurs during a slow or single sweep. inaccurate trace data may remain on tbe screen. It is recommended tbat a new sweep be taken with reduced input levels before measurement values are taken.

If the signal level is increased to 1.1V the receiver input TRIPs (cbanges to 1 MQ impedance) to protect itself from damage. To reset the TRIP press the

ATIEN hardkey and then the

CLEAR TRIP softkey. Note that the TRIP cbanges the impedance of the input but the ATIEN menu shows an impedance of 500. The impedance shown in the menu is a user selection. not the active impedance value.

4-54

Reference

Plot

Plot

PLOT

is a hardkey in the INSTRUMENT STATE section of the front panel used to display the menus of softkeys shown in figure 4-35A These softkeys are used to reproduce the display screen on paper, using an HP-IB plotter. The plotter must be configured to LISTEN ONLY and the

HP 3577 A must be in the TALK ONLY mode (press

SPCL

FCTN hardkey, then the

TALKONL Y

ON/OFF sOftkey so that "ON" is bright). Connect the HP-IB ports of the plotter and the HP 3577A with an HP-IB cable. (Refer to "INSTALLATION" in the GENERAL INFORMATION section).

PLOT ALL is a softkey used to plot the active traces, the active markers, the graticule, and the alphanumerics above and below the graticule. When pressed, the plot begins, the screen message

PLOT IN PROGRESS appears, and the menu changes to ABORT PLOT. Line types and pen numbers used are discussed under CONFIGURE PLOT. ABORT PLOT allows the user to interrupt the plot and the original menu returns. After a plot is aborted, it cannot be restarted where it stopped.

While the plot is in progress,

ABORT PLOT

is the only softkey label in the menu area.

All

other front panel keys (except INSTR PRESET) are ignored.

ABORT PLOT

may not stop the plot immediately. The delay depends on the time required for the plotter to execute the last command sent to it by the HP 3577 A

Id m _ _

�

B8

- -

��

0

106�

•

•

• • •

'-)5'"

"'-"

AU.

PLOT

TRoI.CE 1

"'-"

TRACE 2

"'-0.

"'''

.... 0.

(HAR:

.... 0.

I'1"RKER '

",-0'

HAAk:ER 2

,-

.... 0'

D m-.ct; ,

LN::TTPE

TRACE 1

LINETYJI'f

0

TAACE

1

..... ....

�

TAME 2

,.,,, ....

ORAl

"" ......

PN SPEED

SlOW FSf

Of"'.\A. T

""'"

"T"",

0

,.""

Fig ure

4-35.

4-55

Reference

Plot

PLOT TRACE

1 is a softkey used to plot only trace one. When pressed, trace one and any active markers on it are plotted. The plot may be interrupted by using the ABORT PLOT softkey as described in

PLOT ALL

PLOT TRACE

2 is a softkey that plots trace two exactly as described above for PLOT TRACE 1 .

PLOT GRATlCULE is a softkey used to plot the active graticule and reference lines. The reference lines are plotted using the pen (number) selected for plotting its associated trace. Pressing

ABORT PLOT interrupts the plot. If you don't want to plot the reference lines, turn them off with softkeys in the SCALE menu.

PLOT CHARACTERS is a softkey that plots the alphanumerics above and below the graticule.

Pressing ABORT PLOT interrupts the plot.

PLOT MARKER

1 or 2 are softkeys used to plot multiple markers. This allows the user to mark many points of interest on the plot. The "extra" markers appear as a cross hair on the trace and the marker block information is plotted next to it. If the marker is near one of the edges of the graticule the marker information is moved such that it all appears on the graticule. Information blocks may overwrite each other if the markers are close. See figure 4-36. To use this feature:

1. Move the marker to the point of interest on the trace

2. Press the

PLOT hardkey to display the menu

3. Press the PLOT MARKER

_ softkey (1 =trace 1 , 2=trace 2)

"I!:P' LI!YI!L

_U. QOO"II

IClOY

11 1 . 000".

�S!'T

U,

""'015211 oao.ooOOlz

_O . �7.dlt

I

lL

· ...

"'1

-

I

I /

CENTEI'I . ? �.Q aDo 000"" SP .....

\

""

"

-

\

1,\

100 o"a, Oa_2

-

�

I

MAAK!:

HAG

,

H,1 S

2 1 )

_

I

OQQ . 1l

.,,:; dO

1

/

'

""

Figure

4-36.

4-56

Reference

Plot

CONFIGURE PLOT is a softkey used to select pens, line types and pen velocity. Pressing this softkey changes the menu listing as shown in figure 4-35B. These parameters are not affected by use of the

INSTR PRESET hardkey and are not saved with instrument state. See

DEFAULT

SETUP later in this discussion.

TRACE

1

UNElYPE is a softkey used to select the plotter line

type

(solid. dashes, dots, etc.) for trace 1. The line type available is dependent on the plotter. The default value is 7 (a solid line) and the range is 0-7. To select a line type:

1.

Press the

PLOT hardkey to display the menu

2. Press the CONFlGURE PLOT softkey

3. Press the TRACE

1

LlNETYPE (if label is not bright)

4.


OR


Press the UNITS softkey

TRACE

2

UNETYPE is a softkey used to select plotter line type for trace 2 as described for trace 1 above. The default value for TRACE 2 LINETYPE is 7 (solid).

TRACE

1

PEN NUMBER is a softkey used to select the plotter pen number for trace

1.

This pen is also used to plot the alphanumeric information associated with trace

1.

The default value for

TRACE 1 PEN NUMBER is I. Pen number is modified in the same manner as linetype. The range of pen numbers is 0-8.

TRACE

2

PEN NUMBER is a softkey used to select the plotter pen number for trace

2 as described for trace l. The default value for TRACE 2 PEN NUMBER is 2. PEN NUMBER is modified in the same manner as linetype in the range 0-8.

GRATICULE PEN NUMBER is a softkey used to select the plotter pen number for the graticule and any alphanumeric information that is associated with both traces. This information includes

"REF". " /DIY", start and stop or center and span frequencies (when not in Alternate Sweep Type). and source amplitude (when not in Alternate or Log Sweep Type). In Alternate Sweep the frequency information is associated with a specific trace, so pen numbers selected by trace are used and amplitude information does not appear. In log freq sweep, amplitude information does not appear at the bottom of the screen. The default value of GRATlCULE PEN NUMBER is 2. This parameter may be modified in the same manner as linetype. The range of numbers allowed as data for this entry is 0-8.

4·57

Reference

Plot

PEN SPEED SLOW/FST is a softkey used to select either a slow pen velocity or the maximum. The default setting is FST. This pen velocity is dependent on the plotter in use. The SLOW pen speed is

10 cm/s for plotting with marginal pens or transparencies. This softkey is a toggle selection. To modify this parameter, press the

PLOT hardkey, and then the

CON FIG PLOT softkey. The current setting of

PEN SPEED appears bright. To change to the other selection of pen speed, press the

PEN SPEED softkey once.

DEFAULT SETUP is a softkey that resets the plot parameters to their default parameters:

TRACE

1

LINETYPE

=

7

TRACE

2

LINETYPE =7

TRACE 1 PEN NUMBER

=

1

TRACE

2

PEN NUMBER

=

2

GRATICULE PEN NUMBER

=

2

PEN SPEED

=

FST

RETURN is a soft key that changes the menu listing back to the

PLOT menu. This allows the user to plot after reconfiguration. The same thing is accomplished by pressing the

PLOT hardkey.

4·58

Reference

RecaJl lnstrument State

Recall Instrument State

- - =

1

1

1_� = l=

·

� II

9 0000

=qo

8888

•

O

�

'

0

0600

Iocr.hl

•

- ••

�

I

RECALL

OfG '

R£CALL

RtG ,

ReCAll.

"'. ]

RECALL

"'

.

,

RECAl.l

"'. 5

D

RCL OLD

STAre:

Figure 4-37.

RECALL is a hardkey in the INSTR UMENT STATE section of the front panel used to recall 5

SAVEd states or the state of the

HP 3577

A when it was last turned off

(RCL OLD STATE).


1. Press the

RECALL hardkey to display the menu

2.

Press the softkey corresponding to the instrument state you wish to recall

If

SAVE and RECALL hardkeys are held down when power is turned on, a special test of all main processor non-volatile memory is run that is not part of the regular power-on test. These two keys must be held down until the test messages begin appearing on the screen. One message should be

"TOTAL RAM TEST. NON-VOLATILE MEMORY LOST."

This

test erases all main processor memory resetting INSTRUMENT STATE, PLOT parameters, and the

HP-m

to default parameters and trace data stored in

D 1

through

D4.

For the

HP-IB

this means that TALK ONLY is OFF and the bus address is

1 1.

This test may be used if the

HP 3577

A won't respond to key presses and

INSTRUMENT PRESET and cycling power has not cleared the problem.

4·59

Reference

Receiver

Receiver

:::.r ::aG _.

,

: i

�. f-

�

@

0

0000

F==

0

0

0

8

.

0 i

. o Q

0000 r. � h o .oEl

•

RECEIVER o

( �EJ ) G 8 (LENGTH]

Figure 4-38.

The

RECEIVER section is ooe of five front panel sections. This section has four hard keys which allow the user to control resolution bandwidth, vector averaging, attenuation, impedance, and length for each of the three receiver inputs. For more information on the individual hardkey, refer to the item of interest.

Resolution

Reference

Bandwidth


I

ID

- _ Cl.=-:

Cl

"'"

-

1Ql

.

'�DI'

- DD

0000

0

0000 o� . .

0

� �

•

•

•

0

•

•

I

1 KHl

100 Hz

10 HZ

, H,

D

A.UTO RBW

ON OFF

D

Figure

4-39.

RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH is a hardkey in the RECEIVER front panel section used to display the menu of softkeys shown above. These softkeys may be used to select one of four resolution bandwidths for the receiver IF.

The top four softkey labels in this list are the only valid selections for resolution bandwidth. No data entry is appropriate. Narrow bandwidths usually require more sweep time for accurate measurements. For more on optimizing sweep time for a given bandwidth, refer to "Optimizing

Sweep Time" in Appendix

A

AUTOMATIC RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH ON/OFF is a fifth softkey in the

RES BW menu when the

SWEEP TYPE is LOG FREQ. AUTO RBW is a feature that cycles up through the lower values of resolution bandwidth as the band is swept until it reaches the active (bright)

RES BW.

This prevents LO feed through at low frequencies and allows fast, accurate measurements at high frequencies. With default parameters (sweeping

50 Hz to 200 MHz and RES BW

=

1 kHz) the sweep starts at

50 Hz with a resolution bandwidth of 10 Hz. At 400 Hz the bandwidth changes to

100 Hz and at 4 kHz the bandwidth changes to 1 kHz. If FULL SWEEP is selected from the FREQ menu (or if

START FREQ is changed to 5 Hz) AUTO RBW starts by waiting approximately

4 seconds for the source to settle. Then the sweep begins at 5 Hz with 1 Hz BW and changes to

10 Hz BW at 40 Hz. The cycle continues as described previously.

4-61 .

Reference


When the

SWEEP TYPE is ALTERNATE, the user may select a different resolution bandwidth for each of the two traces. This is in addition to being able to select different band sweeps, sweep times, and source amplitudes for each trace.

Each of the four resolution bandwidths has a settling time associated with it. Settling time is the time the source stays at the start frequency (or amplitude) before beginning a sweep. The following table lists the default values of settling time. Values other than these may be entered only through the use of the HP-ID and a computer controller. For more information on entering new values for settling time refer to the section on remote operation.

Res BW

1 kHz

1 00 HZ

1 0 Hz

1 Hz

SeHling time

22 ms

55 ms

370 ms

3.707 s

4-62

Reference



Front Pon.l

11=

Rear Ponel

=

1 0

0

0 1

0

0

0

0

0 I)

11

11

PORT

, ,

I

In::::: 11

I I

,/1

J pu �

P(RT 1

PORT ;1

NPUT

Figure

4-40.

R •

El

The HP 35677 NB is an S-parameter test set built for use with the HP 3577 A Network Analyzer.

The

A model has 500 ports and the B model has 750 ports. Frequency response for the test set is from 100 kHz to 200

MHz. For complete specifications see the General Information section.

The test set has no internal power supply or HP-ID interface; it is powered and controlled by the

HP 3577 A The two are connected together by an interconnection cable between the two instruments' rear panels and by four RF cables between the front panels. The rear panel cable supplies power and ground, control of the test set's coaxial switch and a sense line to indicate when the test set is connected to the analyzer (this changes the INPUT menu).

When the HP 35677 NB S-parameter test set is connected to the HP 3577 A Network Analyzer the

INPUT menu consists of S-parameters SI I, S21, S12, and S22. These are defined in terms of receiver inputs and test set direction in figure 2-29. Changing the test set direction effectively switches the signal source and termination of the device under test as though it were removed and reconnected to the test set in the reverse direction.

Reference

S-Parameter Test Se t

Different S-parameters may be selected for each of the two traces. If this requires the test set to be configured in both directions at the same time, ALTERNATE SWEEP TYPE must be used. In

ALTERNATE SWEEP each sweep updates one of the traces and then reconfigures the test set and sweeps the other trace. This switches the test set's relay between sweeps. After five minutes operation in this manner, the HP 3577 A times out, changes to single sweep mode to limit wear on the test set relay. The user may change the sweep mode back to continuous for another five minutes of operation or make single sweeps by pressing the

TRIG/RESET hardkey.

If alternate sweep is not used and the input of a trace is changed such that the test set must change directions, the other trace input is redefined also, since the test set can't be configured in both directions at the same time.

The direction of the S-parameter test set may be controlled directly by the user if a user defined input is being specified. This may be done in the following manner:

1.

Press the

INPUT hardkey to display the menu

2 Press the USER DEF INPUT softkey

3. Enter the input equation as described under the INPUT listing found earlier in this section.

4. Note the new softkey label that appears at the bottom of the menu TEST SET FWD/REV. This is a push-push toggle type key that directly controls the direction configuration of the test set.

The change in configuration does not occur until the end of a sweep.

The ONE PORT calibration softkeys (PARTial and are meant to be used with the HP

FULL

CAL) found in the

MEASR CAL menu

35677

A/B

S-parameter test set or a similar configuration of power splitter and directional bridge.

. E F

L E V E L a . D O O d B

I D I V

1 0 . 0 0 0 d B

MARKER

' . 7

MAG C S2 1 )

.

5 . 2

"

5 0 0 . 0 0 0 H z

:3 7 7 dB

/

/

I i/

/

T r oc�

NPC

- S I R

'\

1\

\

\

,

\

\

CENTER

/

/

' 0 7 5 . 2

1 5 . 0 d B m

S O C . OOOH:: SPAN 1 0 0 0 0 0

"'-

O O O M :: s o ,

. "

$ ' 2

5 2 2

USER

OEF

I NPuT

T c o

2- ,

TEST

SET

FWD REV

Figure

4-41.

4-64

Reference



COl _ le] f:

1= le 0000

�

88§8

-

1QJ

0

�

•

•

•

•

.,

•

.,

I

SAVE

REG

1

SAVE

REO '

SAVE

REG :3

SAVE

REG ,

�

AVE

'0 ,

D

D n

~

Figure 4-42

SAVE is a hardkey in the INSTR UMENT STATE section of the front panel used to display the menu of softkeys shown above. These softkeys may be used to save 5 instrument states.

An instrument state is the total set of instrument parameters. This feature is convenient for saving a complex and/or often-used test configuration and RECALLing it for use at a later time.


1. Press the

SAVE


2. Press the softkey corresponding to the register in which you wish to save the current instrument state

If

SAVE and

RECALL hardkeys are held down when power is turned on, a special test of all main processor non-volatile memory is run that is not part of the regular power-on test. These two keys must be held down until the test messages begin appearing on the screen. One message should be

"TOTAL

RAM TEST-NON-VOLATILE MEMORY LOST." This test erases all main processor memory resetting instrument state, plot parameters, and the HP-IB to default parameters and trace data in registers Dl through D4. For the HP-IB this means that TALK ONLY is OFF and the bus address is 1 1. This test may be used if the HP 3577 A won't respond to key presses and

INSTRUMENT PRESET and cycling power have not cleared the problem.

4-£5

Reference

Scale

Scale

_ _

...

1Oa

ID

D

'"

�

D

DoOO

BBBB

�

0

I'· ·,q61

�

©:

O

•

�

•

•

•

�

f-

--;

REF

LEVEL

' OIV t---i O

FULL

�"'LE

PHASE

REF

REF POSN

REF LNE

ON OFF

COpy

SCL 2_1 f---i

:

0 r---

0

F POSH

RE

R

EF ,t£

ON OFF

P''HH CH

ON OFF

S

�

O

P

H SLOPE

-

Polar

•

•

•

0

D

D

0

LJ

I

Figure

4-43.

SCALE is a hardkey in the DISPLAY

FORMAT

section of the front panel used to display the menus of softkeys shown in figure

4-43.

These soft keys may be used to modify the vertical axis scale and value of the reference line. None of the

SCALE features require a new measurement sweep when their values change (unless in ALTERNATE SWEEP). Each uses data stored in trace memory to reconfigure the screen.

REFERENCE LEVEL is a softkey used to enter the value the dashed reference line represents.

The

default values for REFERENCE LEVEL are 0 dBm without and 0 dB with the test set. The reference level value is valid and active even when the reference line has been turned off.

To change the value of REFERENCE LEVEl:

1 . Press the

SCALE hardkey to display the menu

2. Press the REF LEVEL softkey (if label is not bright)


OR



4·66

." 0 "

Reference

Scale

IDIV is a soft key used to enter a value for the vertical scale. The value of IDIV may be changed in the same manner as shown for REFERENCE LEVEL

REFERENCE POSITION is a softkey used to enter a value that moves the dashed line to a different height on the graticule. For LOG MAG the default position is the top of the graticule, or 100%.

PHASE REFERENCE POSITION is 50%, L l N MAG REF pas is 0% (the bottom of the graticule).

The value of REF pas may be changed in the same manner as shown for REFERENCE LEVEL

REFERENCE UNE ONIOFF is a softkey used to turn the dashed reference line off and back on.

To use this feature, press the

SCALE hardkey, and then the REF LINE ONIOFF softkey. This

is

a push-push toggle type key function. Each time the softkey is pressed the softkey label changes from

OFF to ON or ON to OFF. The current status of the feature is indicated by the relative brightness of the ON or OFF in the label.

COPY SCALE is a soft key used to copy the

SCALE parameters REF LEVEL, and IDIV of the inactive trace into the active trace. The softkey label varys depending on which trace is selected. If trace

I is selected it reads COPY SCALE 2

...

1 ; if trace 2 is selected it reads COPY SCALE 1

...

2.

AUTO SCALE is a softkey used to quickly scale the trace so that it fills the graticule without clipping the trace. To use this feature, press the

SCALE hardkey and then the AUTO SCALE softkey.

PHASE SLOPE is a softkey that appears in the menu when the display function is PHASE or a function of phase (like delay). This softkey is used to add or subtract a phase shift term to the defined input. PHASE SLOPE units are degreeslSPAN or radianslSPAN. This is somewhat like the

LENGTH for use with a trace instead of individual receiver inputs and may be used as a phase flattener. Note that changes in frequency span require modification of PHASE SLOPE if it is to have the same effect on the new span. The value of manner as shown for REFERENCE LEVEL

PHASE SLOPE may be changed in the same

One important difference between

LENGTH and PHASE SLOPE is that LENGTH values are used to pr ocess incoming data when a measurement is being taken and affects values stored in trace memory. PHASE SLOPE processing uses data stored in trace memory to create a new trace for the screen and so does not affect stored data or require a measurement sweep when new PHASE

SLOPE values are entered.

4-{)7

Reference

Scale

PHASE SLOPE ON/OFF is a softkey used to turn the phase slope feature off and back on. This is a push-push toggle type softkey. Turning the feature off has the same effect on the measurement as if a value of 0 deglSP AN was entered for PHASE SLOPE.

FULL SCALE is a softkey used to change the value of magnitude represented by the outer ring of the polar graticule. If the display function is POLAR, the menu shown when the hardkey

SCALE is pressed contains FULL SCALE instead of REF LEVEL To change the value of FULL SCALE:

1. Press the

SCALE hardkey to display the menu

2. Press the FULL SCALE softkey (if label is not bright)


OR



PHASE REFERENCE is a softkey used to change the value of phase represented by the dashed line that exists between the center and outer ring of the graticule. Changing the PHASE REFERENCE has the effect of rotating the trace. The value of PHASE REF may be changed in the same manner as shown for REFERENCE LEVEL

REFERENCE POSmON is a softkey used to reposition the dashed reference line on the polar graticule. Changing the REF POS has the effect of rotating the trace and reference line. The value of REF POS may be changed in the same manner as shown for REFERENCE LEVEL

REFERENCE LINE ON/OFF is a softkey used to turn the dashed reference line off and back on.

This is a push-push toggle type key. Turning the reference line off does not change the effect of reference position (i.e. a change in the REF POS value rotates the trace even if the reference line does not appear).

SMITH CHART ON/OFF is a softkey that allows the user to overlay the polar graticule with a Smith chart. This is a push-push toggle type key. The Smith chart is used to graphically convert reflection coefficient to normalized impedance. The marker information reads impedance when the Smith chart is on.

To use this feature, the input definition should be SI] (AIR) or S22 (B/R) and the full scale value should be ].0. If full scale is a value other than 1.0, the trace values cannot be read directly from the

Smith chart but the marker information is still valid. Note that the marker units may be toggled between magnitude & phase and real & imaginary by pressing the MARKER M,P

R,I softkey in the

MKR menu.

4.£8

Reference

Screen

Screen

R E F L E V E L a . D O O d S

I D I V

1 0 . 0 0 0 dB

MARKER 1 6 7 5 6 2 S O O . Q O O H z

MAG ( S 2 1 )

- 1 3 . 3 7 6 d B

L E N G T H �

I

,

•

1 . 3 0 m

1

"-

I

,

,

/

/

I

i/

,

17

7'

i

(ENTER 1 6 7 5 6 2 5 0 0 . 0 0 0 H z SPAN

1\

\

\

\

\

!

,

I

�

1 0 0 O D O . O D OH z

A.MPTD 1 S . 0 d B m

i

L E N G T " 1

ON OFF

R

L E N G T H A

I

I

:....ENGTH A

ON O F F

L E N G T H e

L E N G T H B

ON O F F

S T E P

S I Z E

Figure

4-44.

The

SCREEN is the total CRT display area. It is composed of the graticule, which takes up most of the screen in the center, the menu area (down the right side from top to bottom), and the alphanumeric characters which appear above and below the graticuie. See figure

4-44.

4-69

Reference

Soflkey

Softkey

The eight keys with no stenciling next to the menu area of the screen are called SOFTKEYS. The lettered keys are referred

10 as hard keys. Most hard keys only function is to display a menu of softkey labels. Exceptions are the keys in the DATA ENTRY section of the front panel and the

INSTR PRESET, LCL, TRACE

1 and

TRACE 2, and

TRIG/RESET hardkeys. See figure 4-45 .

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

SCll1<eY$

Figure

4-45.

, , .

.. '

4·70

Reference

Source

Source

The

SOURCE section of the front panel contains the hardkeys that display menus of softkeys which control the parameters of the source. These parameters include

SWEEP TYPE

(linear, alternate, log, amplitude, or CW),

SWEEP MODE

(continuous, single, or manual),

SWEEP TIME,

FREQUENCY, AMPLITUDE, TRIGGER MODE

TRIGGER/RESET.

(free run, line, and external), and

For more information on individual functions refer to the hardkey of interest. f[]

"il

0

[Ql

0000 0

� �

'

[DoDO]

1

0

•

$

'"

$

•

$

I

r,=��==�. SOURCE �==:::::::��

0

SETTLE

0

WAIT TRIG

0

EXT REF

0

(

SWEEP TYPE

) [S�� )

Figure 4-46.

4·71

Reference

Special Functions

Special Functions

ADD

�

�

�

�

TALKONLY

ON OFF

CONF

TEST

BEEPER

ON

OFF

SERVICE

1 r[J

I1

[J

[J

I

I

OIAG

S PARMS

ON OFF

[J

[J

LEYELING

ON OF!:

SETTLING

ON OFF

S�Z 5�AFG

TEST

PA TTERN

TRf�s,?M

FASTPRO(

TEST

FAST 8US ·

1Nl TEST

_

_

MO

R

E

H

.

I

[J,. h[J

D

D

'

HEM

TEST

DISPLAY

HP-IB

HP�e

SIG ANAL

[J i

�

I�

I

�

I

�B

RETURN

� -

I� r="-

0)

8888

-

�

0

�oo

'00

• .

0

I

Figure

4-47.

•

10

•

I)

•

ID

The

SPECIAL FUNCTIONS hardkey in the INSTRUMENT STATE front panel section contains the softkey menus for viewing and modifying the HP-ID address, running a confidence test, turning the beeper on or off, and many service diagnostics.

HP-IS ADDRESS is a softkey used to view and change the address of the HP 3577 A on the

Hewlett-Packard Interface Bus. This address is set at the factory to 1 1 and may be set to any whole number from 0 to 30, inclusive. INSTR PRESET does not change this value, nor does cycling power.

This number cannot be changed via the HP-IB; it can only be changed manually. To modify the

HP -IB address:

1. Press the

SPCL FCTN hardkey to display the frrst menu

2. Press the HP-IS ADDRESS softkey

3. Enter the new address with the numeric key pad

4. Press the ENTER softkey

TALK ONLY ON/OFF is a push-push toggle type softkey that changes the HP-ID configuration to

TALK ONLY (ON) for driving a plotter. TALK ONLY should be turned OFF when the HP 3577 A is controlled via HP-IB.

4·72

Reference

Special Functions

CONFIDENCE TEST is used to check each receiver channel for general pass/fail status. A screen message requests the user to put a cable between the source output and the receiver to be tested.

Nine tests are run and the status of each (pass/fail) is displayed on the screen as the results are determined. Any test that fails, stops the test and highlights the screen message specifying the failure. The test may be continued from a failed test by pressing the softkey "CON11NUE TEST."

The S-parameter test set should not be connected to the receiver being tested during the

CONFIDENCE TEST. In the case of a test failure, refer the problem to a service repair facility.

BEEPER ON/OFF is a push-push toggle type softkey used to turn the beeper off and back on. This is not reset by

INSTR PRESET.

S PARMS ON/OFF is a softkey used to change the

INPUT definition menu between the

S-parameters menu to the standard input menu.

SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS is a softkey which displays a menu used for diagnosing service problems with the HP

3577 A

The menu items that follow are described briefly. For more details on these features and their uses refer to the

HP 3577 A

Service Manual.

LEVEUNG ON/OFF is a softkey that disables the source leveling loop when OFF. This is used for service of the

HP 3577 A

and should Dot be changed by an operator. This feature is reset to ON by

INSTR PRESET or power on.

SETTLING ON/OFF is a softkey that turns the digital filter settling on (default condition) or off.

This is used for service of the HP reset to ON by

3577 A

and should not be changed by an operator. This feature is

INSTR PRESET or power-on.

SYNTHESIZER DIAGNOSTICS ON/OFF is a softkey used to turn on the fractional N synthesizer diagnostics for service of the status is reset to OFF by

HP 3577 A

and should not be changed by an operator. This feature's

INSTR PRESET or power-on.

TEST PATTERN is a softkey that turns on the digital display test pattern. This feature is used for alignment of the screen area of the

HP 3577 A

To terminate the test pattern and return to tbe measurement state press tbe INSTR PRESET bardkey.

TRACE MEMORY TEST is a softkey that tests tbe RAM in trace memory when pressed. This test takes approximately

20 seconds to run during which time all other activity is suspended. This test may be interrupted by pressing

INSTR PRESET.

4-73

Reference

Special Functions

Note

"

This test clears all information stored in trace memory including D

1 ,

D2, D3,

D4, R, A and B.

FAST PROCESSOR TEST is a softkey that runs a test on the fast processor board. This test should immediately display the message "FP SELF TEST PASSED."

FAST BUS INTERFACE TEST is a softkey that tests the port between the main processor and the fast pr ocess or. This test should immediately display the message "MP/FP PORT TEST PASSED."

DISPLAY MEMORY TEST is a softkey that tesu the memory of the digital display unit. This teSt takes approximately 5 seconds to run, during which time the display is blank. The

HP

3577 A returns from the test in the preset condition.

DISPLAY HP-IB is a softkey that puts a picture of the HP-IB connector on the screen. Pin numbers and signal names are labeled on the figure and a bright dot appears on any pin that has a TRUE

(Iow) signal state on it. This feature allows the user to display the status of the HP-IB lines of the

HP 3577A

HP-IB SIGNATURE ANALYSIS is a softkey that runs a program to allow signature analysis tests to be run on the HP 3577 A's HP-IB section.

SOFTWARE REVISION is a softkey used to display a screen message which shows the revision status of the operating system.

,

. : ..•.

.

;

"

4·74

Reference

Sto re Data

Store Data

ID

Cl

I

.

00

0000

- �

•

•

•

1Ql

IORDII

[060"'0]

•

•

• •

•

I

STORE

REG 02

STORE

REG D�

STORE

REG

U�!;r'6,pEEF

�_...,

04 � __ :

STORE 8.

DISPLAY

� __

>-_....:

I

0

0

0 o

Figure 4-48.

STORE DATA is a hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT front panel section used to display the menu of softkeys shown above. These softkeys may be used to store a trace as it's specified by the

INPUT definition, store a trace defined by the user, or store and compare. The trace stored is independent of the active display function. The data stored is complex trace data identical to what is stored in trace memory registers R, A, and B when a measurement is taken.

The HP 3577A does not "remember" the instrument state (such as INPUT definition or start and stop frequencies) active when the data was stored. If the stored information is used in a user defined equation, care should be taken that the parameters of all terms are compatible. For example, for a user defined INPUT of

RlDl

(where Dl is data register one), R and Dl should both have the same start and stop frequencies, amplitude, and sweep type. The user may

SAVE instrument state at the same time that data is STOREd to be able to recall the state used to store data.

4·75

Reference

Store

Data


I. Press the

STORE DATA hardkey to display the menu

2. Press the softkey corresponding to the register you wish the active trace to be stored in

USER DEFINED STORE is a softkey used to define a function and have the results stored in the register of choice. This equation is constructed in the same manner as done for user defined functions and user defined inputs. When selected, the menu changes to the first term selection menu. Terms include five user defined functions, four data registers, three user defined complex constants, and the three receiver inputs: R, A, and B. is displayed containing the four possible math functions (+,

-,

*, and f) and the STORE IN

REGISTER D _command. These two menus alternate until you finish the definition and use the

D _ command to select the register to store into. This store occurs without affecting the trace on the screen unless the active INPUT definition is a function of the register stored to.

STORE & DISPLA

V is a softkey used to store the currently selected trace and compare the stored data with measurement data using one key press. The storage register used for the STORE depends on the active trace. If TRACE 1 is active, data is stored in data register D3; if trace two is active then data is stored in D4. After the STORE, the INPUT definition of the inactive trace is changed to display the data just stored. If TRACE 1 is active the store goes into D3 and the

INPUT definition of TRACE 2 becomes D3. If TRACE 2 is active when STORE & DISPLAY is pressed the store goes into D4 and the INPUT of TRACE 1 becomes

D4.

Note

"

Because this feature writes to a data register, information stored there is overwritten and lost.

4·76

Reference

Sweep Mode

Sweep Mode

.m _ _

I�

CONT

1

StllGLE

MAt'4./Al

�

0

0

0

-

�O C;

IQJ

[DooOJ

0000

0000

O D

.

•

- �

• e

•

• •

I

(('Nl

SffiLE

MANUAL

FRf'

, o

B

""' -

MANUAl..

0

0

Figure

4-49.

SWEEP MODE is a hardkey in the SOURCE section used to display the menus of softkeys. These softkeys may be used to select

CONTINUOUS, SINGLE, or

MANUAL sweeps. The default selection is

CONTINUOUS.

CONTINUOUS is a softkey that selects a sweep mode which starts a new sweep after each sweep completion. The

TRIG/RESET hardkey resets the sweep in progress; after which settling takes place and the next sweep begins. For more information on settling time, refer to

RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH.

SINGLE is a softkey that selects a sweep mode which sweeps once each time the

HP 3577 A is triggered. To use this feature press

SWP MODE hardkey, and then the

SINGLE softkey. The sweep in progress continues but no new sweep begins when the current sweep ends. The

WAIT lRIG

LED illuminates until the

TRIG /RESET hardkey is pressed to start a new sweep. The

TRIG/RESET hardkey may also be used to stop a sweep in

SINGLE SWEEP MODE.

Settling is done for the next sweep immediately upon completion of the present sweep. Thus the sweep begins without delay on the next

TRIG/RESET key press if the SETTLE LED is dark.

4-n

Reference

Sweep Mode

MANUAL is a softkey used to sweep the display manually using the knob or the arrow keys. To use this feature:

\. Press the

SWEEP MODE hard key to display the menu

2.

Press the MANUAL softkey. The label changes to MANUAL FREQ and the new label

MKR ... MANUAL appears in the menu. Also the marker in the marker information block changes to

MANUAL

3. Move the marker using the knob (in MARKER mode) to the point of interest on the trace

4. Press the MKR ... MANUAL softkey. The sweep dot moves to the marker position and the marker information block shows the measurement being made.

5. ModifY the frequency value with the knob (in ENTRY mode) or arrow keys. If the knob is used in ENTRY mode the marker moves to the sweep dot when the knob is first rotated.

OR


Select uni ts from the menu (press a softkey)

MANUAL SWEEP allows the user to make measurements at frequencies that would not be sampled in an automatic sweep of the same span. Any frequency from 0 to 200 MHz may be entered, to the nearest mHz, with the numeric keypad.

If the offset marker is on in manual sweep the marker information block displays OFS MN instead of MANUAL, MARKER, or OFFSET.

4-78

Reference

Sweep Time

Sweep Time

SWEEP

T�E

.. -

IDJ

Cl

08

Tt1E

ISTEP r---:-

0000

880

-

8

�

0

[Do�

0000

0 0 . .

0

•

CD

•

0

•

..

I

0

SAMPLE

~

SWEEP

=

AMPTD

TYPE

SWEEP

SwEEP

=

MANUAL

MODE FREO

Figure 4-50.

SWEEP TIME is a hardkey in the SOURCE section of the front panel used to select measurement times. Immediately after power-on or

INSTRUMENT PRESET, the sweep time for a linear frequency sweep is 1 second. If the

TIME/STEP is 0.050

SWEEP TYPE is changed to AMPTD SWEEP the default seconds and the total sweep time depends upon the STEPS!SWEEP (found in the

AMPTD menu). If the SWEEP MODE is changed to MANUAL, the default SAMPLE TIME is 0.050 seconds. In a frequency sweep, the sweep dot appears if the sweep time is 1 second or more.

4-79

Reference

Sweep Time

In an amplitude sweep the sweep dot appears if the time/step is 0.010 seconds or more. When the sweep type is ALTERNATE SWEEP, different sweep times may be selected for each of two traces.

For more information see ALTERNATE SWEEP listed under SWEEP TYPE. When the sweep type is LOG SWEEP, the sweep time may appear to be greater than the value entered for sweep time, due to overhead time. The device under test is swept at an effective rate equal to the value of sweep time.

To change the value of

SWEEP TIME:

1. Press the

SWEEP TIME hardkey

2. Modify the value with the knob or the arrow keys

OR

3. Enter a new value with the numeric keypad


Sweep time may be limited by the math processing load. When this occurs, the screen message

"SWEEP TIME INCREASED" appears and the sweep time increases automaticaUy. Refer to

Appendix A for more information on HP 3577 A data processing and sweep time optimization.

4-80

Reference

Sweep Type

Sweep Type

'"'0

•. ggg-gg]��i

10 0000 0 � o . . h=G;;;-Dl====��.

=�.

.

.

I

LIN FREa

SWEEP

"LTERNTE

SWEEP

LOG FREO

SwEEP

AMPTD

SWEEP

(W

LD

D

D

SW"" OIR

UP DOWN

Figure

4-51.

SWEEP TYPE is a large hardkey in the SOURCE section of the front panel used to display the menu of softkeys shown above. These softkeys may be used to select from five sweep types.

Note

..

Changing sweep type or sweep resolution (in the FREQ menu) erases registers

R, A, and B in trace memory (sets all zeros).

LINEAR FREQUENCY SWEEP is the default sweep type. The graticule displayed on the screen has ten equal divisions. This softkey is a mode select type of key; data entry is not appropriate.

4-81

Reference

Sweep Type

ALTERNATE SWEEP

is a softkey used to assign separate FREQ, AMPID, RES BW and

SWP TIME parameters for each trace. The sweeps are linear and alternate. Without using

ALTERNATE SWEEP the user may define different display functions, inputs, and scales for each trace. With ALTERNATE SWEEP each trace may also have different frequency parameters

(start/stop, center, span), source amplitudes, resolution bandwidths, and sweep times.

When the sweep type is alternate, stores are not allowed. This means that none of the

MEAS CAL features may be used in alternate sweep. Averaging is turned off when alternate sweep is active. If two amplitude values selected cause the output relays to switch as the sweeps alternate, the

HP 3577 A times out after five minutes. Also, if the inputs selected for the two traces cause the

S-parameter test set to switch configuration from forward to reverse, time out occurs after five minutes. Time out changes sweep mode to single, changes the menu to

SWP MODE and the

WAIT TRIG LED illuminates. The user may trigger single sweeps with the

TRIG/RESET key or change the sweep mode back to continuous for another five minutes of uninterrupted operation.

Time out extends the life of the HP 3577 A and HP 35677 A!B relays.


I. Set up trace 1 parameters (input, display function, frequency, source amplitude, scale, sweep time, and resolution bandwidth).

2.

Turn on trace 2 by pressing hardkeys

TRACE 2, DSPL

Y

FCTN,

and selecting any menu item

(use of POLAR turns trace

1

off). Trace

2

turns on having the same start/stop frequencies, amplitude, bandwidth and sweep time as trace

1

and both traces are swept simultaneously.

3. Press

SWEEP TYPE

hardkey, and AL TERNTE SWEEP soft key. Trace 2 parameters revert

10 their previous settings (if the

HP

3577 A was just preset, these are the default parameters).

This allows the alternate sweep trace to be turned off and back on without losing trace parameters.

4.

Enter the new parameters for trace

2.

4-82

Reference

Sweep Type

LOG FREQ SWEEP is a softkey that selects a log scale for the horizontal axis of the display. The logarithmic graticule has frequency values listed across the bottom of the screen. The graticule changes as the start and stop frequencies are changed. When the ratio of STOP FREQiSTART

FREQ is less than four, the graticule changes back to a linear scale.

When LOG FREQ SWEEP is active the

FREQ

menu contains only START FREQ, STOP FREQ, and FULL SWEEP. There are no CENTER FREQ, FREQ SPAN, or SWEEP RESOLUTION softkeys as in LIN FREQ SWEEP. Default Sweep is from 50 Hz to 200 MHz. FULL SWEEP is from 5 Hz to

200 MHz.

When

LOG FREQ SWEEP is active the RES BW menu has an added item called

AUTO RBW

(for automatic resolution bandwidth) which is on. The sweep starts at 50 Hz and stops at 200 MHz and the resolution bandwidth changes during the sweep to reduce LO feed through at the lower frequencies. If FULL SWEEP is selected, the sweep starts at 5 Hz and the 1 Hz RES BW is active from 5 Hz to 40 Hz (4 seconds of settling occurs before the sweep begins). Then the

HP

3577A switches to 10 Hz BW until it reaches 400 Hz when it changes to 100 Hz. The last switch is at

4 kHz where it switches to 1 kHz RES BW. When AUTO RBW is on the RES BW selected (bright) is the widest bandwidth the AUTO RBW progresses to; if 100 Hz RES BW is selected and

AUTO RBW is on, the

HP

3577 A does not switch to 1 kHz

RES BW

at 4 kHz as it would if 1 kHz

RES BW

were selected.

Other menus that are changed by selecting LOG FREQ SWEEP are:

DISPLAY FUNCTION: no DELAY

MKR

..

: no MKR.. CENTER freq

SWEEP "TYPE:

no SWP DIR

AMPTD SWEEP

is a softkey label in the SWEEP TYPE menu. It is a logrithmic sweep of the source output amplitude. The default start and stop levels are - 40 dBm and 0 dBm, respectively.

Either start or stop amplitude may be from - 49 dBm to

+

15 dBm and start may be larger or smaller than stop amplitude (unlike frequency sweeps).

If left running, the amplitude sweep times out after five minutes. This is to prolong the life of the relays used to switch pads in the output circuitry in and ouL The time out condition switches the

SWEEP MODE

from CONTINUOUS to SINGLE and displays an error message. The user may trigger single sweeps with the

TRIG/RESET

key or change the sweep mode back to continuous.

CW is a softkey that puts the HP 3577 A in a single frequency measurement state. When the

SWEEP TYPE is CW the frequency menu contains only the menu items FREQ and STEP SIZE.

The display shows a single line from the bottom of the graticule to the height of the signal level at the specified frequency. Aoy frequency may entered with the numeric key pad with millihertz resolution. Group delay is not available on the DISPLAY FUNCTION menu when CW is selected.

4-83

Reference

Sweep Type

SWEEP DIRECTION UP/DOWN is a push-push toggle type softkey that allows the user to change the direction of the sweep_ The default direction is UP, or left to right. In frequency sweeps left to right is always up because the start frequency cannot be larger than the stop frequency. In an amplitude sweep the start amplitude may be larger than stop amplitude. so amplitude may be swept from a higher to lower value without changing the SWEEP DIRECTION. Changing sweep direction to DOWN in an amplitude swee p causes the sweep dot to move from right to left.

Changing sweep direction during a frequency sweep is useful for determining whether the sweep time is large enough for the selected resolution bandwidth. If you change the sweep direction while the sweep dot is on a steep part of the response and the dot does not exactly retrace its path. the sweep time should be increased. See Optimizing Sweep Time in Appendix A The SWEEP

DIRECTION selection is not offered in the CW sweep or log free sweep type.

4-84

Reference

Trace 1

Trace

2

, i

Trace

1

Trace

2

�

,

!

I

- --

-...

!

D

r-P r-B

0000

:

0

@,)

. F= � I

(:)-

0 0 0

�p

•

ooo

I

DODO

100001,

Op: v

0

=

DODO

r==

I

[]

�

@

0

�

@

0

�

0

� �

Figure 4-52.

TRACE

1 and

TRACE 2

are two hardkeys in the DISPLAY FORMAT front panel section that are used to select the active trace. The active trace is indicated by the illuminated LED over either the

TRACE 1

or

TRACE 2

key and by a bright trace and marker information block on the screen.

Hardkeys in the DISPLAY FORMAT front panel section are used for data entry or mode selection for one of the two traces. If SWEEP TYPE is

ALTERNATE

SWEEP (in the SOURCE section) then

FREQ, AMPTD, SWP TIME,

and

RES SW

data is also trace dependent. For these hardkeys, the data entered or mode selected affects only the selected trace.

When the HP 3577 A is preset or turned on, trace one two is off. To turn on trace

is

LOG MAGNITVDE and active and trace

2,

press

TRACE 2

hardkey,

DSPL Y FCTN

hardkey), and press one of the softkeys other than OFF, Trace two and characters related to it (REF, /DIY, and marker information) appear brighter than trace one when the

TRACE 2

LED is illuminated.

4-85

4-86

Reference

Trigger Mode

Trigger Mode

-_ ...

III

, ... ,

....

'"'

,Xl

D

@

_

0

•

;;!!

•

•

•

.7]

.... ,

....

''''

En

.....,

SWP

==

MODE

MANUAl

D

Figure 4-53.

TRIGGER MODE

is a hardkey in the SOURCE section of the front panel used to display the menu of softkeys shown above. These softkeys may be used to select the type of triggering used by the

HP 3577A to initiate measurement sweeps.

FREE RUN

is a softkey that is the default trigger mode selection. In FREE RUN the HP 3577 A triggers a new sweep as soon as the previous sweep ends and the source settles (settling is indicated by an LED in the SOURCE section). If the

SWEEP MODE is

SINGLE, the next sweep does not begin until the user presses the

TRIGIRESET

hardkey.

UNE

is a softkey that selects the power line as the trigger source.

This

results in the power line starting the sweep after the settling is complete.

If

SWEEP MODE is

SINGLE the next sweep does not begin until the user presses the

TRIG RESET

hardkey and the line trigger occurs.

" ,

Reference

Trigger Mode

EXTERNAL is a softkey used to select the external trigger input on the back panel as the trigger source. The trigger occurs after settling is complete and

(if

SWEEP MODE

=

SINGLE) the

TRIGGER/RESET hardkey is pressed. The HP 3577 A triggers a sweep on the high-to-Iow transition of a 1TL logic signal or a switch closure to ground. When the HP 3577 A is ready to be triggered the WAIT lRIG LED in the SOURCE section of the front panel is illuminated. If a trigger signal occurs when the WAIT lRIG LED is not illuminated the trigger is ignored. Each trigger requires a transition (edge) of the external trigger signal so the trigger signal must return to the pre-trigger state before triggering again; holding a closure to ground or low signal on the external trigger input does not continue triggering the HP 3577 A There is a delay of 250 to 500 microseconds from the time the trigger signal is received to the beginning of the sweep.

IMMEDIATE triggering is a softkey that appears in this menu only when the SWEEP MODE is

MANUAL If this method of triggering is selected, the operator triggers the HP 3577 A to take a measurement by pressing the

TRIG/RESET hardkey. To use this feature:

1. Press the SWP MODE hardkey to display a menu

2. Press the MANUAL softkey

3. Press the

TRIG MODE hardkey to display a menu

4. Press the IMMED softkey

5. Press the

SWP MODE hardkey

6. Move the marker to the point of interest

7. Press the MKR ... MANUAL softkey. The MANUAL FREQUENCY changes to that of the marker but no measurement is taken

8. Press the TRIG/RESET hardkey to take the measurement

OR



10. Press the TRIG/RESET hardkey to take the measurement

4-87

Reference

Trigger/Reset

I

Trigger/Reset

£li]

- --

t=

[] r-

0

(

0

) c )

0 0 0 0

��fj

-

(6

0000 oooo-l9'

' F===' � I o 0

�

DODO

DlD�

=

DODO

0

0

�

�

0

@J

0

@J

0

� � �

Figure 4-54.

TRIG/RESET

is a hardkey in the SOURCE section of the front panel that is used by the operator to either lRIGGER or RESET in preparation for a measurement. This is one of five hardkeys that do not display a menu. It executes its function immediately when pressed.

When the SWEEP MODE is

CONTINUOUS. the TRIGGER RESET hardkey stops the current sweep and initiates a new sweep. The new sweep starts as soon as settling is complete.

When the

SWEEP MODE

is SINGLE. the

TRIGGER RESET

triggers the measurement.

if

the

WAIT lRIG LED is illuminated. If a sweep is in progress. pressing

TRIGGER RESET

resets or stops the sweep. resets to the start frequency (or amplitude if

SWEEP TYPE is

AMPTD). and then settles. After settling. the WAIT lRIG LED illuminates and pressing

TRIGGER RESET

triggers the HP 3577A

When the SWEEP MODE is MANUAL and the TRIGGER MODE is

IMMED. the

TRIGGER RESET hardkey is used to take each measurement. See lRIGGER MODE,

IMMEDIATE for more information.

Chapter

5

.

General Information

General I nformation

Introduction

This chapter contains instructions for installing and interfacing the HP 3577 A Network Analyzer and the HP 35677 NB S-parameter Test Set. Included are initial inspection procedures, power and grounding requirements, operating environment, available a ccess ories and options, installation instructions, HP-m interfacing procedures, and instructions for repacking and shipment.

5

Initial Inspection

This instrument was carefully inspected both mechanically and electrically before shipment. It should be free of mars and scratches and in perfect electrical order upon receipt To confirm this, inspect the instrument for physical damage incurred in transit, inventory the supplied accessories

(listed in table 5-2), and test the electrical performance using the Confidence Test listed in the section on Getting Started. If there is physical damage, if the contents are incomplete or if the instrument does not pass the Confidence Test, notify the nearest HP Sales and Service Office. If the shipping container is damaged or the cushioning material shows signs of stress, notify the carrier as well as the Hewlett-Packard office. Keep the shipping material for the carrier's inspection.

Warning o

The integrity of the protective earth ground may be interrupted If the

HP 3577A is mechanicelly damaged_ Under no circumstance should the

HP 3577A be connected to power if it is damaged_

5-1

General Information

Power Requirements

Power Requirements

Caution

I

Before applying ac line power to the HP 3577

A. ensure the voltage selector switch on the back panel of the instrument is set for the proper line voltage and that the correct line fuse is installed in the rear panel fuse holder.

The

HP 3577 A can be operated [rom any single phase ac power source supplying:

86V to 1 27V from 48 Hz to 440 Hz

(1 1 5V Vo�age Selector setting) or

1 95V to 253V from 48 Hz to

66 Hz

(230V Vo�ge Selector setting)

Power consumption is less than 450

V A


The

HP 3577 A is

equipped with a three-conductor power cord which, when plugged into an appropriate receptacle, grounds the instrument cabinet. The type of power cable plug shipped with each instrument depends on the country of destination. Refer to figure

5-1

for the part number of the power cable and plug configurations available. If the appropriate power cable is not included with your instrument, contact the nearest

HP

Sales and Service Office and the proper cable will be provided.

Warning o

The power cable plug must be inserted into a socket outlet provided with a protective earth ground terminal. Defeating the protection of the grounded instrument cabinet can subject the operator to lethal voltages.

5-2

United Kingdom

Option 900

General Information


AuslroUo/New Zealand

Dptlon 901

E a rth

PLUG

..

, 65

136)A

(ABLE.:

HP SOtl-5607

2201,1-5A

OPERATION

Continental Europe

Option 902

PLUG,,",

(

A

[EE7-VI!

B

L

E

.. HP 50i.

1

-58

0

9

~

�

�

Earth eutral

Earth

220V-6A

OP

E

R A T

I

O N

U

S

A

2

5

0

V

O pt i on 904

PlUG ..

: NZSS 196/11,$ (1':2

[ABLE.;

HP

50" ·5808

22011-6A

OPERATION

USA/CAN

Option

903

�EO"h

/

Line

�

NeutrOI

PLUG", NEMA 5-15P

(ABLE ..

, HP 5041-5619

125V.l0A .. .

O

P

E

RA

T

I

(lI"II

Japan

Option 918

PLUG.: NEMA-G-1SP

(ABLE.: HP 50<11-5806

Switzerland

OptIOn 9

06

2S0V-SA ...

OPERATION

PLUG

..

, MIT! "'-9692

CABLE., HP 5041-5840

Denmark

Option

912

125V-12A

OPERATION

PLUG.· SEY 1011.1959-24507

TYPE 12

(ABLE.;

HP

5041-5812

220V-6A

OPERATION

PLUG

..

: DHCR

107

CABLE

..

HP

50.41-58'14

Figure 5-1

•

The number shown for the plug is the industry iden@er forthe plug only, the number shown for the cable is an HP part number for a complete cable including the plug .

••

Ul listed for use in the United States of America.

L.;::..

Neutral

22DV�6A

OFERATION

5-3

General Information


Operating Envi ronment

Warning o

To prevent potential fire or shock hazard, do not expose the HP 3577A to rain or other excessive moisture.

Temperature

The HP 3577 A may be operated in temperatures from 00 C to +550 C. The

HP 3577 A performance specifications apply within this temperature range.

Humidity

The instrument may be operated in environments with humidity up to 95%. However. the HP 3577 A should be protected from temperature extremes which cause condensation.

Altitude The HP 3577A may be operated at altitudes up to 4,600 meters (15,000 feet).

Cooling System The HP 3577 A is equipped with a forced-air cooling system to maintain the proper internal operating temperature. The cooling fan is mounted on the rear panel.

Air, drawn through the rear panel fan filter, is circulated through the instrument and exhausted through holes in the side panels. The HP 3577 A should be mounted to permit as much air circulation as possible, with at least one inch clearance at the rear and on each side. The filter for the cooling fan should be removed and cleaned at least once every 30 days. To clean the fan filter, flush it with soapy water, rinse, and then air dry.

Thermal Cutout

The HP 3577 A is equipped with a thermal cutout switch which automatically turns off the main power supply whenever the internal temperature is excessive. The temperature at which this occurs is dependent upon line voltage and airflow. With proper airflow and operating line voltage, thermal cutout does not occur at or below an ambient temperature of +550 C. The switch resets automatically when the instrument is turned off, allowed to cool and turned back on. If a thermal cutout occurs, check for fan stoppage, clogged fan ports, and other conditions that can obstruct airflow or otherwise cause excessive heating.

Note

.;

The thermal cutout will operate at any external temperature above + 150 C if the airflow is blocked.

5-4

General lnforrnation


Table

5:- 1 .


Description

Network Analyzef

S-Parameter Test SeVKit

Type N Calibration Kit

Type N Test Port

Extension Cables

Power

SplitIers

MINIMUM CONFIGURATION

SOQ

Impedance

7SQ

Impedance

Transmission

S·Paramelers

Transmission S·ParamBlers

High Impedance

tr

rans.er 'unctions

HP 3577A HP 3577A HP 3577A

HP 3577A

HP 35677A

HP 35678A

HP 35677B

HP 35678B

HP 35679A' HP 35679A'

HP 35679A' HP 35679B

Type N Minimum Loss Pac

Type N Accessory Kit

BNC Accessory Kit

1 1 850C or

1 1 667A

HP 35679A 1 1 8500

MINIMUM LDSS PAD AND ACCESSORY KITS

1 1 853A

1 1 854A

1 1 853A

1 1 852AJ

1 1 855A

1 1 854A

1 1 856A

TRANSISTOR FIXTURES

1 16008

1 1 855A

1 1 856A

T

0-18/T

Fixture

To-5IT 0-12 Transistor

Fixture

Transistor Fixture Adapter

1 1 6028

1 1 858A4

PROBES

HP 3577A

1 1 854A

500 MHz Active Probe

1 :1 Miniature Probe

10:1 Miniature Probe

�

2 pair recommended

418002

10438A2

1 0433Al

4

Requires 2ea 1 1 525A APC-7 to Type N Male adapters tor use w�h the HP 35677A

5-5

General Information



Table

5-1 lists

the accessories available for the HP 3577 A These accessories may be obtained through your

HP

Sales and Service office.

Accessories Supplied

Table

5-2 lists the accessories supplied with the HP 3577A Network Analyzer and the

HP

35677A

S-parameter test set.

Table

5-2.

For Iha HP 3577A

Power cord

(aty.

1 )

Type N(m)-to-BNC(f)

adapters

(aty. 4)

Far Ihe HP 35677 AIB

Interconnect cable

190 mm (7.5 in) 500 cable

Cabinet lock foot kit

(aty. 1)

(aty 4)

(aty.

1 ) see figure 5-1

1 250-0780

35677-61620

8120-4387

5062-3999

, ,

5-6

General Information

Options

Options

Table 5-3 lists the options available for the HP 3577 A These options are available either when the instrument is ordered or for later installation.

Table 5-3.

Option HP Part N umber

907

908

909

910

907

908

909

91 0

Description

For the HP 3577A

Front Handle K�

Rack Mounting Kit

Front Handle & Rack Mount Kit

Additional Service Manual

- OR -

Additional Operating Manual

For Ihe HP 35677A/B

Front Handle K�

Rack Mounting

Kit

Front Handle & Rack Mount Kit

Additional Service Manual

- OR -

Additional Operating Manual

5062-3991

5062-3979

5062-3985

03577-9001 2

03577-90002

5062-3988

5062-3974

5062-3975

35677-9001 0

03577-90002

5-7

General Information

Installation

Installation

The HP 3577 A is shipped with plastic feet attached to the bottom panel, ready for use as a bench instrument. The feet are shaped to make full-width modular instruments self align when they are stacked. Because of its weight, the HP 3577 A is not equipped with a tilt stand. It is recommended that a Front Handle Kit (Option 907, HP Part No. 5062-3992) be installed for ease of handling the instrument on the bench.

The HP 35677 A!B S-parameter test set was designed to be mounted to the bottom of the HP 3577

A

Network Analyzer as follows:

1. Install the Rear Panel Lock foot kit (5062-3999) as indicated by the kit instructions. This fastens the two instruments together using four slide-together clips across the front edges and two lock feet mounted at the corners of the rear panels' common side.

2. Install the test set interconnect cable (35677-61620) between the rear panels of both instruments as shown in figure 5-2 This cable a.

Supplies power and ground b. Lets the analyzer sense the presence of the test set (changes the INPUT menu) c.

Controls the test set's coaxial switch.

-= c:!)=-=

=

-

-0·

Figure 5-2. Rear panel Interconnect cable Installation

3. Install the four N-connector 50Q cables (HP part number 8120-4387) between the front panels of the two instruments as shown in figure 5-3.

D

I

.. I o = 0

=."" P6N! t:..mKI_ 1£1

-,:...---,/:"'-.L1_1

FI9ur& 5-3. From panel cable Installation

5-8

General Information

Installation

The HP 3577 A may be rack mounted with or without slides. Both mountings may be utilized for maximum strength and safety.

To rack mount without slides:

1. Remove the plastic trim and front handles if so equipped.

2. Remove the plastic feet from the bDttom of the HP 3577 A

3. Install the flange kit with or without handles according tD instructions included with the kit:

Rack Flange Kit(no handles) ... Option 908, HP P.N. 5062-3979

Rack Flange & Front Handle Kit...OptiDn 909,

HP

P.N. 5062-3985

4. Install an Instrument Support Rail on each side of the instrument rack. (The

Instrument Support Rails, used to support tbe weight of the instrument, are included with

HP rack-mount cabinets.)

Warning

(;

1 _ The weight of the HP 3577A must be supported by Instrument Support

Rails inside the instrument rack_ DO NOT, UNDER ANY

CIRCUMSTANCES, AnEMPT TO RACK MOUNT THE HP 3577A USING

ONLY THE FRONT FLANGES_

2. The HP 3577A is heavy (approximately 62 Lbs, 28 kg.). Use extreme care when lifting it to avoid personal injury.

5. Using two people, lift the HP 3577 A to its positiDn in the rack on top of the Instrument

Support Rails.

6. Using the appropriate screws, fasten the HP 3577 A's Rack-Mount Flanges tD the front of the instrument rack.

To rack mount with slides, the following items are required:

Quantity

1

1

Description

Rack Flange Krt (Option 908. HP 5062-3979)

OR

Rack Flange

&

Handle Kit (Option 909. HP 5062-3985)

Heavy-Duty Slide Krt (HP Part Number 1 494-0016)

5-9

General

Information

Installation

Note

"

Instrument Support Rails are not absolutely necessary when rack mounting with slides. However, they do relieve a considerable amount of strain from tbe slides and provide an extra measure of safety.

L Perform Steps 1 tbrough 4 of tbe previous procedure.

2. Attach a slide inner-member bracket to each side of the HP 3577A

3. Attach the slide's outer members to the instrument rack according to the instructions included with the slides.

4. If your instrument rack has extension legs on the front, be sure that they are extended at this time.

5. Using two people, lift the HP 3577 A to its position in the rack and mate the two sections of the slides together. Do not rest the full weight of the HP 3577A on the extended slides until you are sure the instrument rack will not overturn.

6. Slide the HP 3577 A into the rack. Using the appropriate screws, fasten the HP 3577 A's Rack

Mount Flanges to the front of the rack.

If alignment of the display is necessary, perform the following:

L Power ON.

2. Press the SPCL FerN hardkey.

3. Press the TEST P A TIERN softkey.

4.

Adjust HORIZ and VERT on the rear panel to center tbe pattern on the face of the CRT.

5. Adjust ALIGN on the rear panel (which rotates the display) until the bottom of the display is parallel to the bottom of the bezel.

6. Adjust FOCUS and ASTIG on the rear panel until the lines on the display are sharp and clear.

It may be easier to align this using a dot on the screen; press INSTR PRESET and use one of the decimal points in the alphanumerics.

5-10

General Information

HP -I B Connections

H P-IS Connections

The HP 3577A Network Analyzer is designed for use with the Hewlett-Packard Interface

Bus (HP-IB).

Note

•

The HP-IB is Hewlett-Packard's implementation of IEEE standard 448-1978,

"Standard Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumentation."

The HP 3577A is connected to the HP-m by connecting an HP-m interface cable to the HP-IB connector on the rear panel. Figure 5-4 illustrates a typical HP-m system in interconnection.

HP-IS PIGGYBACK

CONNECTORS

Figure 5-4. A typical HP-IB system Interconnection

5-1 1

General Information

HP-IB Connections

With the HP-IB system, up to 15 HP-IB compatible instruments can be interconnected. The

HP 10833 HP-IB cables have identical pig gy

-back connectors on each end so that several cables can be connected to a single source without special adapters or switch boxes. System components and devices can be connected in virtuaUy any configuration as long as a path exists between each device and the controller. As a practical matter, avoid stacking more than three or four cables on any one connector.

If the stack gets too long, force on the stack can produce sufficient leverage to damage the connector mounting. Be sure that each connector is firmly screwed in place to keep it from working loose during use. The HP 3577 A uses aU the available HP-IB lines; therefore, damage to any connector pin may adversely affect HP-IB operation. See figure 5-5.

To achieve design performance with the HP-IB, proper voltage levels and timing relationships must be maintained. If the system cable is too long, the lines cannot be driven properly and the system will fail to perform.

Total cable length for the system must

be

less than or equal to 20 meters ( 65 feet) or 2 meters

(6 feet) times the total number of devices connected to the bus, whichever is less.

Caution

I

The HP 3577 A contains metric threaded HP-IB cable mounting studs as opposed to

English threads. Metric threaded HP 10833A, B,

C, or D HP-IB cable lockscrews must be used to secure the cable to the instrument Identification of the two types of mounting studs and lockscrews is made by their color. English threaded fasteners are colored silver and metric threaded fasteners are colored black. DO NOT mate silver and black fasteners to each other or the threads of either or both will be destroyed.

5-12

PIN

20

11

2'

"

"

9

10

11

"

'"

" s

"

•

7

•

"

"

"

,.

,

,

,

,

LII'E

0101

0102

010'

010'

0105

0>0,

0107

0108

�Ol

REN

HP-IB 1n!i!fCorY1�Cl CODltS

PART tf...tl8fR

108330\

108339

108))C

10e:nO

LENGTIo;

1 .... I

J J HI

2 m 1(>6 III

(, m (13.2 ttl

0.5 /f1 1'6 I!I

0"

_0 t'OA(

Fe

'Ro

"N

�HtELD-CHA55IS GROLND

PlC l\oJrsrED PAIR WlTH PIN

PlO T .... ISTED PAIR WITH PIN 7

PlO T ..... ISTED PAIR wITH p,.. �

PlO 1 ..... 15 TED PAiR WlTH PN Q

O}

IH!:SE p�s

F'/('I TWISTED PAIR win; PIN '10

PlO TWISTED PAIR WITH PIN 11

'SOLATED DI$ITAl GRO�

GROUNDED

Figure 5-5.

HP-IB

Interlacing

General Infonnation

Storage and Shipment

Storage and Shipment

Environment The HP 3577

A

and HP 35677

NB

should be stored in a clean, dry environment. The following are environmental limitations that apply to both storage and shipment.

Temperature

Humidity

Mitude

- 40· C to +75· C

Up to 95% relative

Up

to

15,300 meters (50,000 feet)

The instruments should also be protected from temperature extremes which cause condensation.

Original Packaging Containers and materials equivalent to those used in factory packaging are available through Hewlett-Packard Offices. If the instrument is being returned to Hewlett-Packard for service, attach a tag indicating the type of service required, return address, model number, and full serial number. Also, mark the container FRAGILE to ensure careful handling. In any correspondence, refer to the instrument by model number and full serial number.

Other Packaging The following general instructions should be followed for repackaging with commercially available materials:

1.

Wrap the instrument in heavy paper or anti-static plastic. If the instrument is being shipped to a Hewlett-Packard office or service center, attach a tag to the instrument indicating type of service required, return address, model number, and full serial number.

2. Use a strong shipping container. A double-wall carton made of 350 pound test material is adequate.

3. Use a layer of shock absorbing material 70 to

100

mm (3 to

4

inches) thick around all sides of the instrument to provide firm cushioning and prevent movement inside the container. Protect the front panel with cardboard.

4.

Seal shipping container securely.

5. Mark shipping container FRAGILE to ensure careful handling.

6. In any correspondence, refer to the instrument by model number and full serial number

Caution

I

Styrene pellets in any shape should not be used as packing material. The pellets do not adequately cushion the instrument and do not prevent the instrument from shifting in the carton. The pellets also create static electricity which can damage electronic components.

5-13

H P 3577A Network Analyzer Specifications

Source Characteristics

• Frequency Characteristics

• Sweep Characteristics

Frequency Range: 5 Hz to 200 MHz.

Frequency Resolution:

0.001 Hz.

Stability: for Option 001,

±

5 x

1 0-8/day, 0 to 55° C

(applicable for Instrument on continuously

2::

48 hours.)

• Output Characteristics

Level Range:

+ 15 dBm to - 49 dBm

(1 .26 Vrms to 793

Jl

Vrms; 2 dBV to

-

62 dBV) into a 500 load.

Resolution: 0.1 dB.

Entry Units: dBm, dBV, V.

Accuracy:

±

1 dB at

+

15 dBm and 100 kHz.

Below

+

15 dB m, add the greater of ± 0.02 dB/dB or 0.2 dB.

Flatness:

1 .5 dBpp from 5 Hz to 200 MHz.

Impedance: 500;

>

20 dB return loss at all levels.

RF Output Connector. 500

Type N female.

Spectral Purity:

Phase Noise (in 1 Hz Bandwidth):

<

-

70 dBc at offset frequencies from carrier of

100 Hz to 20 kHz.

Harmonics:

<

-

25 dBc.

Non-Harmonic Spurious Signals:

<

-

50 dBc or

-

70 dBm whichever is greater.

Reverse Power Protection: Output Is automatically opened at a signal level of approximately

+ 22 dBm (500), or

±

4 Vdc, or greater applied to the source output. Source output is reconnected with the Clear Trip function.

Unear Frequency:

Range: 5 Hz to 200 MHz.

Entry: Start/stop or center/span frequencies.

Span: 0 Hz or 0.01 Hz to 200 MHz, phase continuous.

Sweep Time: 1 00 mS/span to

6553 s/span.

Direction: Increasing or decreasing frequency.

Log

Frequency

(segmented linear approximation):

Range: 5 Hz to 200 MHz.

Entry: Start/stop frequencies.

Span: 0.01 Hz to 200 MHz, phase continuous.

Log Accuracy: 2%.

Sweep Time: 200 ms/span to 6553 s/span.

Sweep Direction: Increasing frequency.

Alternate Frequency: two

Sweep a1temates between separate start/stop frequencies using linear sweep only.

Discrete:

From 2 to 51 discrete frequencies at points of interest. Resolution bandwidth and setting time are individually settable. The minimum measurement time for each frequency is typically

1 0 ms. The discrete sweep table becomes part of the

Instrument state.

Sweep Direction: frequency.

Increasing or decreasing

CW:

Frequency is fixed. Data is updated wtth a selectable sample time from 1 ms to 1 6 s.

Log Amplitude

(fixed frequency):

Range:

+

15 dBm to - 49 dBm.

Entry: Start/stop level in dBm or dBV.

Sweep nme: 1 ms/step to 1 6 s/step. Total sweep time/span depends upon total number of steps and time/step.

Sweep Modes:

Continuous, single, manual.

Trigger Modes: Free run, immediate, line, external.

''', ',-.

' :.

5-14

Aeceiver Characteristics


• Input Characteristics

Frequency Range:

5

Hz to 200 MHz.

Inputs:

Three receiver inputs (A,B and A).

Input Impedance:

Selectable 500 with

>

25 dB return loss, or 1 MO in parallel with approximately

30 pF.

Sensitivity due to noise and internal crosstalk between source and receiver'

Sensitivity

•

Min,

Freq

. •

30 kHz

(500)

Min. Freq. -300 kHz

30 kHz

-

200

MHz

(500)

300 kHz -

20

MHz

(1

MO)

(1 MO)

Resolution MinimulI

Bandwidth Freq,

Full SClle Input

Fall Scale I.put

O dBm -20 dBm

-1 3 dBm -33 dBV

(20 dB

Atten)

(0 dB

Atten)

O dBm

-13 dBV

(20dB

Atten)

-20 dBm

-33 dBV

(0 dB

Atten)

1 Hz 100 Hz r- 1 1 0 dBrr - 1 30 dBrr - 130 dBn

1 0 Hz 100 Hz - 1 00 dBIT - 120 dBrr - 1 1 0 dBn - 1 30 dBn

1 00 Hz 500

Hz

- 90 dBm r- 11 0 dBrr

- 1 25 dBn

1 kHz 5 kHz

- 80 dBm - 1 00 dBrr - 95 dBm - 1 1 5 dBn

'For 1 MO Inputs, add 5 dB to the table. l ca le Input Level:

Inpat

Impedance o dB

Ilput AIIenullion

20 dB

50 0 - 20 dBm O dBm

1 MO - 33 dBV

(22.4 my)

- 1 3 dBV

(224 mY)

Input Damage Level (approximate):

5

0

0

:

+ 30 dBm or 25 Vdc

1

M

O

:

+

16.9 dBV (7 Vrms) or 25 Vdc. The 500 input impedance automatically switches to

1 MO at approximately

+

20 dBm, and can be reset with the clear trip function.

Residual Responses:

>

100 dB below full scale input, except for crosstalk error limits, L.O. feedthrough, and ac line and fan related spurious signals.

Crosstalk Error Umits:

(

>

100 dB isolation between inputs.) i ., .. j sOl <Ill

Input Connectors:

5

0 0 Type

N female.

Resolution Bandwidth:

10 Hz, or 1 Hz.

Selectable 1 kHz, 100 Hz,

g

.0,01 !I!J tOOOI dB

, .,

'"

.0.1 deg

.001 dO'S!

.

"

,.,..,.._ �

....... n dB R.tah_ to �

RoecewlO!' Full Stole

..

...

I'1p,Jt L

_nr

...... t

L.O. Feedthrough:

<

-

33 dB below maximum input level.

AC

Une and Fan Related Spurious Signals:

<

- 100 dBm, frequency

<

1 kHz.

Electrical Length/Reference Plane Extension:

Provides equivalent electrical line length, or delay at inputs A, A, and B.

Aange: - 3 x 108 m to + 3 x 1 08 m, or ± 1 s.

Aesolution:

5 digits or 0.1 cm (3.3 ps) whichever is greater.

Accuracy: ± 0.1 cm or ± 0.02% whichever is greater.

5-15


• Magnitude Characteristics

Range:

Full Scale Input Level to Sensitivity.

Resolution:

Marker: 0.001 dB (log); 5 digits (linear).

Display: 0.01 dB/div to 20 dB/div (log absolute);

0,01 dB/div to 200 dB/div (log ratio);

0.1 nV/div to 1 0 V/div Oinear absolute);

1 O-10/div to l 020/div Oinear ratio).

Display Units: dB, dB m, dBV, V, and linear ratio.

Accuracy (at

1 00 kHz, 25' C, and Full Scale

I np ut):

Absolute (A,B,R): ± 0.2 dB.

Ratio (AlR,B/R,AlB): ± 0.15 dB (50g) ; ± 0.2 dB

(

1 Mg).

Accuracy and frequency response errors, and effects of different input attenuation can be calibrated out with normalization.

For Frequencies

2:

100 kHz

Dynamic Accuracy:

Error

Re.olllion Bandwidth

1 kHz, 100

Hz,

10

Hz

+

.04 dB

1 Hz

+

.02 dB

+

.05 dB

+

.04 dB

+

.02dB

+

.05 dB

+

.15 dB

+

.75 dB

+

.75 dB

+

.25 dB

+

.75 dB

+

3.00 dB

Inpll Level Relalive

10

Scale l.put

Full

O dB lo - 1 0 dB

- l 0 dB lo - SO dB

- 50 dB 10 - 60 dB

- 60 dB 10 - 80 dB

- 80 d

B

10

-

90 dB

- 90 dB to - 100 dB

,

,

.06d8

�O.5dl

!\ kHZ. 100 Ht. 10 Hz

•

•

O.3dB

.0 ZCS

.O.ld

'c i!"CJUI LINe!

11'1

·zo d:! Rl!lo!iv� f--

.

"

FiJll

Sl:ol. lr4:Jul Levlil

!

V r7

TYCCa!

. .,

·'00

:o35d

.J Od

Br

,.2 SoB

.2.Od

,

.15C1

,

:

I

! i i

(1 Hz Re.olulioM Bandwidthl

B

, .

I i

.

"

., . inoul Level n dB relallve 10 Full Scale Ir\(:o,Jt Level

. .,

TYPII::al

.

'00

For Frequencies

<

100 kHz

Dynamic Accuracy:

Error

R .. olution Bandwidth

1 kHz, 100 Hz,

1 0 Hz

1 Hz

Inpll Level Relative

I.

Fill

Scale Input

+

.07 dB

+

.06 dB

+

.08 dB

+

.25 dB

+

.75 dB

+

.75 dB

+

.07 dB

+

.06dB

+

.08 dB

+

.30 dB

+

.75 dB

+

3.00 dB

O dB lo - l 0 dB

- 1 0 dB to - 50 dB

- 50 dB to - SO dB

- 60 dBto - 80 dB

- 80 dBlo - 90 dB

- 90 dB 10 - 100 dB

•

,O.7d

,

.O.5d

,

,

&Jd B

.O.2d B

I

I

(1 kHz. 100 Hz. 10 Hz re.oluttOl"1 bono

.. dlhl

! o

.

"

.,.

·6 • lnoul Le"'!;!1 n dB Retchve Full SCale Input Level

·OD ·,eo

.J Od

,

11 Ht Re�oluhon Bond

.. idthl

,.t5d B

I

�.5d •

.

"

.

"

Input Ll!"vel

11"\ de relativE' to Full S::o!e Input Level

/.

f--

---

·BD

Tyeleoi

-100

5-16

'O .


Frequency Response:

Specifications apply when inputs are driven from a SOQ source Impedance.

Absolute (A,B,R):

FreqallCY

20 Hz to 20 MHz

5 Hz to 200 MHz

5 Hz to 20 MHz

50Q Ilpll

.3 dB pp

.6 dB pp

-

Error

1

MQ IlpUl

.5 dB pp

-

1 dB pp

Ratio (A{R,B/R,AIB1:

Error'"

Frequency

500 lnplt

1

MQ l.pUl

20 Hz to 20 MHz

5 Hz to

200 MHz

5 Hz to 20 MHz

.3 dB pp

.4 dB pp

-

.3 dB pp

.6

dB pp

'For unequal 50Q inPut attenuation add 0.15 dB pp (20 Hz 10

20 MHz). 0.3 dB pp (5 Hz to 200 MHz). For unequal 1 MO input attenuation add 0.2 dB pp (20 Hz 1020 MHz). 0.4 dB pp

(5 Hz 10 20 MHz).

·O.3d!

-C .

ldS

-0

-0

"'B�.:lliml:mU

-0 ldS

'IN-+l+IlIII-+HI

-02d5

-0 ""

Frequency

(Hz)

Reference Level:

Range: - 207 dBm to +

33 dBm

(

-

220 dBV to +20 dBV) (log absolute);

- 400 dB to

+400 dB �og ratio);

OV to 10V (linear absolute); o

10 1020 Vinear ratio).

Resolution: 0.001 dB (log); S digits Oinear).

Stability:

Temperature: Typically

<

±

0.02 dBr C.

Time:

Typically

< ±

O.OS dB/hour at 2S' C.

S-1 7


• Phase Characteristics (A/R,B/R,A/B):

Range:

±

1 80 deg.

Resolution:

Marker:

0.005 deg

(0.0001 rad)

Display:

0.01 degldiv to

200 degldlv

(0.0001 8 rad/div to

3.49 rad/div).

D i s p lay Units: degrees, radians.

Accuracy

(at

100 kHz, 25°

Input

Level):

±

2.0 deg.

C, and Maximum

Accuracy and frequency response errors, and effects of different input attenuation can be calibrated out with nonnallzatlon.

Dy namic Accuracy:

Error·

± .4 dog

± .2 dog

± .5 dog

± 1 .5 deg

± 7.5 dog

Input

LIVII Rllalivl to

Malima

..

""owable o dB

10

- 1 0 dB

- 1 0 dB IO - 50 dB

- 50 dB to - SO dB

- 60 dB to

- 80 dB

- 80 dB to

- 1 00 dB

Hz

Resollltion Bandwidth.

�c�

-100

.5

.

,

.

,

.

,

.

.

.

..

,

.

, ,.,

.

,

�,

.,

-

.,

.,

.,

.,

.,

.,

.,

.,

.,

..

1

h

....

,

"

,

I I r

.�

I r i

•

-

. ..."

•

7d!!g

•

11 kH!. 1)(1 Hz .

10

H Z

RoeSQIUllOf1 BCl'ld"'(ltl'll

Crosstalk:

Specified under Input Characteristics.

Reference Level:

Range:

-

500 deg to + SOD deg

(

-

8.7 rad to

+ 8.7 rad)

Resolution:

0.01 deg .

StabllHy:

Temperature: Typically

< ±

0.05 deg!" c.

Time: Typically ±

0.05 deg/hour at

25°

C.

I

,

-

,

,

I

�

.70 ir1Du! Levll!'\ n cS A.IOI""'l to Full

-'0 -e>O

'3(01

..

""'out Level

.

80

•

Polar Characteristics

Range, Resolution, Display Units, Dynamic

Accuracy, Frequency Response, Uncertainty.

Crosstalk, Reference Level, and Stability specifications are the same as the corresponding magnitude and phase characteristics.

Frequency Response: cy

Specifications apply when

Full Scale Magnitude Range: nputs are driven from a

500 source impedance.

500 lnplll

Error ·

1

MO

Input

Absolute(A,B,R): 0.1 nV to 10V

Ratio (AIR,BIR,A!B):

10-10 to

1 020

20 Hz to 20

MHz

2 deg pp

5 deg pp

• Real/imaginary Characteristics

5 Hz to 200

MHz

1 0 dog pp -

5

Hz to 20

MHz

1 0 deg pp

'For unequal Inpllt attenua�on add

8 dog pp.

Range, Dynamic Accuracy, Frequency Response,

Uncertainty, Crosstalk, Stabiity specifications are the same as the corresponding magnitude and phase characteristics.

;

R

5-18


• Resolution:

Marker: 5 digits.

Display: 0.1 nV/dlv to 1 0 V/dlv for absolute;

1 0-

10 to 1020 for ratio.

Display Units:

V and linear ratio.

Reference Level:

Range:

±

10V for absolute; ± 102

0 for ratio.

Resolution: 5 digits.

• Delay Characteristics

(Unear Frequency Sweep and Discrete Sweep with equal frequency point spacing; AIR, B/R, AlB; 500

Input Impedance)

Range: defined by the equation tg

=

Minimum: expression

The minimum delay time is given by the

1.4 x l 0- 5

Aperture [Hz)'

Maximum: expression

The maximum delay is given by the

N -

1

2

S [H z

) where sweep; 3 to 51 for discrete sweep).

N

= number of points per sweep (51 , 101, 201 , 401 for linear

Effective Range: 1 ps to 20,000 s.

Resolution:

Marker: Same as minimum delay time or 5 digits, whichever is greater.

Display: 0.01 ns/div to 1000 S/div.

Aperture:

Selectable 0.5%, 1 %, 2%, 4%, 8%, 16% of frequency span for linear sweep. For discrete sweep, aperture is two times the spacing between the first two frequency points.

Display Units: seconds

A ccuracy:

. 1 3 s

(lreq [Hz))

2 ±

Dynamic Phase Accuracy

360 x Aperture [Hz) greater.

2 ns or

± 2 ns whichever is

The

. 1 3 s

±

2 ns

(lreq [Hz))2 term can be calibrated out with normalization.

Crosstalk:

Determined by the expression

Phase Crosstalk

360 x

Aperture [Hz]

Reference Level:

Range:

±

1 03 s.

Resolution: 5 digits.

Stability:

Temperature: Determined by the expression

Phase Temperature Stability

360 x

Aperture [Hz]

Time: Determined by the expression

Phase Time Stability

360 x Aperture [Hz]

5-19

Display Characteristics

Display Characteristics

Annotation: Start/stop, center/span or CW frequency, source level, scale/div, reference level, delay aperture, marker data, and soltkey functions.

Gratlcules: Rectangular logarithmic and linear, polar, and Smith. All graticules are electronically generated.

Traces: Two simultaneous traces may be present with a rectangular graticule. One trace with polar or Smith graticules.

Markers: Each trace has one main marker and an offset marker. Markers indicate data at corresponding trace coordinates in the same units as used to se! the Reference Level. Markers can be used to modify certain display parameters. Marker resolution is the same as horizontal display resolution.

Umlt Unes: Each trace can have separate limit lines made of up to 20 line segments. Upper and lower limit lines can be defined for each trace. The limit table for each trace becomes part of the instrument state. A Pass/FaU Indicator shows

tl!e.

results of a limit test on the screen.

Also, the FAIL line on the Programmable I/O Port is

set low

for a faUure, or high for pass just before the EOS Is pulsed low. Limit tests typically add between 10 and 120 msec delay between sweeps.

Reference Une Position:

Rectangular Graticule: 0% to 100% full scale deflection in 0.05% increments.

Polar/Smith Chart Graticule: ± 500 deg in 0.001 deg increments.

Data Storage: Measured data can be stored in vector format in twelve non·volatile storage registers 01 through 04. Stored data can be displayed again later or operated on with Vector

Math.

Vector Math: Input magnitude and phase data, stored data, and user defined constants and functions can be mathematically combined into expressions which define displayed or stored data.

Mathematical operations are: add, subtract, multiply, and dMde.

Calibration:

Normalization: Both traces can be normalized to measured data with full accuracy, and resolution. Scale factors can be changed alter normalization without affecting calibration.

Normalize (Short): Compensates for frequency response errors. Requires a short termination.

One Port Part Cal: Compensates for directivlty errors and frequency response errors. Requires open and load terminations.

One Port Full CaI: Compensates for dlrectivlty, frequency response and source match errors.

Requires open, short, and load terminations.

Noisa Averaging:

Type: Exponentially weighted vector averaging on successive sweep data.

Averaging Factor: Selectable

1

(off), 4. 8. 1 6. 32,

64, 128, 256.

The current trace An is always displayed and updated at the sweep rate according to the expression

An

=

Sn/F

+

(F

-

I)(An .

1 )/F. where

50

= current input signal. F

= averaging factor,

An

.

= previously averaged trace.

1

Averaging Factor is fixed at 1 in alternate sweep.

Unear Phase Slope Compensation:

Provides linear phase slope offset in deglspan.

Range: - 72.000 deg./span to + 72,000 deg./span (- 1 256 rad/span to

+

1256 rad/span).

Resolution: 5 digits or 0.001 deg whichever is greater.

Accuracy: 0.02%.

Autoscale: Automatically adjusts the reference level and scale/div. of the displayed measurement.

Measured No. of Points per Sweep:

Logarithmic frequency: 401

Linear frequency: 5 1 , 101, 201 , 401

CW frequency: 1

5·20

Measured No. of Steps per Sweep:

Logarithmic Amplitude Sweep:

5, 1 0, 20, 50, 100, 200, 400

Display Resolution:

Horizontal and vertical.

Rectangular: 1 600 points.

Polar: 1 200 points.



HP-IB

Cepability:

Remote programming is via the Hewlett-Packard Interface Bus (HP·IS)" for all

HP 3577 A front panel control functions except the ac line switch, display Intensity, entry knob, HP-IB address and system controller on/off. The

HP 35677

A!B

S-Parameter Test Sets are programmable through the HP 3577A interface only.

Interface Functions: SHl ,AH1 ,T5,TEI2l, L4,

LEI2l,SR1 ,RL 1 ,PPl ,DCl

,on

,CO,El .

Output Data Transfer TIme:

401 complex data points can be transferred directly to an HP 9000

Series 300 Computer in BASIC language as follows:

ASCII Mode: Typically 1500 ms.

Binary Roating Point Mode: Typically 160 ms.

Graphics Capabilities:

Alphanumeric Characters: 1 2 lines of text with 40 characters per line can be displayed. Character set includes alphanumerics, special characters and line vectors.

Vector Display: Trace lines and alphanumeric characters can be drawn on the display between any two points with a resel ution of 2048 points along the horizontal and vertical axes.

" HP-IS is Hewlett-Packard's implementation of

IEEE

Standard 488-1 978.

5-21



External Reference Frequency Input:

Frequency: to

Level:

Impedance:

10 MHzJN (N is an integer from 1

100).

0 dBm

±

1 0 dB, nominal.

500 , nominal.

Connector: BNC female, rear panel.

Reference Frequency Output:

Frequency:

1 0

MHz (nominal)

Level: Typically 0 dBm

Impedance: 500, nominal.


External Trigger:

Triggers on negative TIL transition or contact closure to ground.

Minimum Pulse Width: Typically l ,u sec.

Impedance: 50U, nominal.


Plotter Control:

Directly compatible with HP-IB graphics plotters that use Hewlett-Packard Graphics Language

(HP-GL) with listen on/y capabUity. Plotter may be controlled by the HP 3577A through the HP-IB connector without an external computer. Plotted data includes trace 1 , trace

2, gratlcule, and annotation. Additional markers can be plotted, and pen numbers, pen speed, and line type can also be selected.

Accessories Included:

4 ea. Type N male to BNC female Adapter.

(HP Part No.

1250-0780)

1 ea. Operating Manual. (HP Part No.

03577-90002) .

1 ea.

Service Manual. (HP Part No.

03577-90010).

Power: 1 1 5V

230 V maximum.

+

10%, - 25% (47

Hz to

440

Hz), or

+ 1 0%, - 1 5% (47 Hz to

66

Hz), 450 VA

Weight: 31 kg

(67

Ibs) net.

41 kg

(90

Ibs) shipping.

Dimensions: 222 mm H x 426 mm W x 578 mm

D (8.75 in x 1 6.75

In x

22.75 in). Add

1 1/8 inch to depth to include front panel controls and connectors.

Display Adjustments:

Astigmatism, x-axis position, y-axis position, alignment, focus, and Intensity.

Save/Recall:

Front panel setups can memory locations be stored in non-volatile

1 through 5. Last state is saved when power is removed.

Operating Conditions:

Temperature:

O·

C to

Relative Humidity:

<

Altitude:

<

+

55'

C.

95% at 40' C.

4,572 m

(15,000 It).

Non-Operating Conditions:

Temperature:

Altitude:

<

-

40' C to

1 5,240 m

+ 70' C.

(50,000 It).

5-22


H P 35677A/B S-Parameter Test Set Specifications

All specifications apply without bias signals.

Degrees are specified as deviation from linear phase. Frequency Response, Port Match, and Test

Port Reciprocity specifications are equivalent values for ratio measurements, and errors can be calibrated out.

Frequency Range: 100 kHz to 200 MHz.

Test Port Impedance:

HP 35677A: 50!:.!.

HP 35677B: 750.

Directlvity:

>

40 dB.

Frequency Response:

Transmission (S21 , 512):

:!: 1 dB,

:!:

5 deg.

Reflection (S", S22):

:!:

1 dB.

:!:

5 deg.

Port Match:

Test Ports 1 , 2: HP 35677A,

>

26 dB;

HP 35677B,

>

24 dB.

Test Ports 1 , 2 Open/short ratio:

HP 35677A.

:!:

0.75 dB magnitude and :!: 5 deg phase;

HP 35677B,

:!:

1 dB magnitude and :!: 7.5 deg phase.

Input Port:

>

20 dB return loss.

. Output Ports A, B. and R:

>

26 dB return loss.

Test Port Isoletion:

>

100 dB.

Insertion Loss:

RF Input to Test Port

1 or 2: HP 35677A, typically 1 3 dB; HP 35677B, typically 19 dB.

RF Input to Output Ports A. B, or R:

HP 35677 A, typically 1 9 dB; HP 35677B. typically 31 dB.

Test Port Reciprocity:

Transmission (S21, S,2): typically :!: 0.5 dB magnitude and :: 5 deg phase.

Reflection (S21 . 5,2): typically :!: 0.5. dB magnitude and :: 5 deg phase.

Incident Power Ratio (Test Port 1 to Test Port 2): typically :: 1 .5 dB.

RF Input Maximum Operating Level:

+

25 dBm or :: 30 Vdc.

RF Input Damage Level:

+

27 dBm or

:!:

30 Vdc.

Port

1 or

2

Damage Level:

Connectors:

+ 27 dBm or :: 30 Vdc.

Input Port and Output Ports A. B, and R: 500

Type N female.

Test Ports 1 and 2: HP 35677A. 500 Type N female; HP 35677B. 750 Type N femaie.

DC Bias Inputs: BNC female. rear panel.

DC Bias Range: Typically :!: 30 Vdc and :: 20 mA with some degradation of RF specifications;

200 mA damage level.

Accessories Included:

4 ea. 190 mm (7.5 in.) 500 cables with Type N male connectors for connection to HP 3577 A

(HP Part No. 8120- 4387).

1 ea

Test Set interconnect cable to HP 3577A

(HP Part No. 35677-61620)

1 ea. Rear Panel Lock Foot

Kit

(HP Part No.

5061-{)099).

1 ea. Service Manual (HP Part No.

35677-90010).*

Recommended Accessories:

HP 35677A: 35678A 500 Type N Calibration

Kit;

35679A SOQ Type N Test Port Extension Cables.

HP 356778: 35678B 75Q Type N Calibration

Kit;

35679B 750 Type N Test Port extension Cables.

Programming: The HP 35677/lJB are completely controlled through the HP 3577A using the

HP 3577A interconnect cable. All programming is accomplished through the HP 3577A HP-IB

Interface.

Power: All power is obtained through the

HP 3577A interconnect cable.

Weight: 6 kg (13 Ibs) net; 1 2 kg (12 Ibs) shipping.

* Note operation information included in HP 3577A

Operation Manual. (HP Part No. 03577-90002) .

5-23

5-24


Dimensions: 90 mm

H x

426 mm

W x 584 mm

D (3.5 in x 16.75 in x 22.75

in).

Add

1 depth to include front panel connectors.

1/8 inch to

:

...... �.y.

· · f

� .'1'1 S

· · · · · · _

;

'-r�

' "

:

'

:

:

:��

.&

�

� (

'i' 1

I

1 le I ;

�

:

'

'

'

:,.

::;;..

.0:,

:

• • -

--

-

-

-

.

__

.

-

-

-

-

- -

-

-

-

--

-

-

-

A v .

- - - _ .

:

.... s "".to dB

HP 356770\ Block

Diagrlm

.......

" ..

. -

--

_ .

--

- - - .

AI-!'I dB

--

-

•

� · l5n.s

c '

, . ..

""-loi'ong l"Oll' f�

.... """r�

�

J

IGn paa

6 1

I

LD" �

....

-r--'

JIt:I -Jl oII

•

...

x

I

DIr..:_ IIt"","

... x

<

, .. �

..... paa

�r - . e

-

-

-

-

- - - -

,

...,.], ..

....

,

...

"

I¥'" ..

HP 35677B Block

Di.grl. r - - - - - -

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

,

I

f--()()_--

---i300.2S HHz

SVNIH

300 11Hz

,...,..,.,,----,

SOOZS HHz

SYTH

100 ",.,

250

ktlz

�T R

I

�j

-

INPIJT a

>----

__

5Q1JI@ Q8 npuT R

!Opllon 002)

'-

-

-

HP 35770\ Block

Dilgro.

,(' 10 kHz

::::"' ...1

Appendices

A

Special Topics Appendix A

Data Processing and Structure

Knowing how the

HP 3577 A

takes measurements and what it does with the data will increase your effectiveness as a user. This section presents and explains the operating system flow chart of the

HP 3577 A

Network Analyzer. For the following discussion refer to the flow chart in figure

A-l.

The synthesized source sweeps the selected span continuously (when not in

CW

sweep type

or manual sweep mode) while the 3 receivers take measurements, digitize them, and output the data. The processor accepts data from the receivers only at certain frequencies. These are usually 401 equally spaced "bins" in the sweep span, but 201, 101, or 51 points/sweep may be selected for the sweep resolution. Each bin is as wide as the selected resolution bandwidth and has associated with it a frequency number (position information) and measurement value. Bins do not always overlap.

The process shown in the flow chart operates on one bin at a time. Data is taken and a point plotted on the screen before the next bin is sampled.

The receiver's output values are complex numbers of the form eX

+ jy), where X is real and jY imaginary. Two numbers eX

&

Y) are transferred to the processor for each bin. Data is collected from all three receivers simultaneously.

If the average or length features are in use, the processor implements those functions at this point and then stores the results in trace memory. Trace memory is used to store the complex numbers representing inputs R, A, B, and storage registers 01, 02, 03, and 04.

If length and average are inactive, the measurement data is stored in trace memory without change.

This point is emphasized because the average and length functions change what is stored in trace memory. Consider the case of single sweep mode. After the data is taken it may be formatted to any of a number of configurations, but changing length or average has no effect. Trace inputs, display functions, or scale may be changed and the display updated from trace memory without taking another measurement. If length or average are changed, a new measurement (sweep) must be taken and data stored in trace memory before the screen can be updated. Any math processing that occurs after data has been stored in trace memory registers R, A, and B, operates on this complex data.

A-l


Next. the operating system executes a store if it has been requested. If a STORE is executed, source sweep and receiver measurements are interrupted while a memory sweep of trace memory occurs.

If a simple "STORE REG D_" is executed (i.e. not USER DEF STORE) then the

STORE

math is the same as the INPUT math; the trace is stored using the current INPUT definition. If a USER

DEF STORE command is given. the user defmes the math done (and the data stored is not displayed). Changes in display function do not change what is stored. The data in trace memory may be processed by any display function and displayed as magnitude, phase, delay, etc. information.

After the

STORE math is complete the data is stored in the register specified by the user (DI-D4).

Next. (unless this was the last bin) the operating system continues the memory sweep, repeating this process for each bin. The displayed trace is not affected unless the input definition is a function of the storage register used.

If a

STORE

is not requested, the next step is to do the math defined by the

INPUT

function. Then. if PHASE SLOPE is on and the value is non-zero, the PHASE SLOPE math is done. Complex numbers are the result of all pr ocess ing done up to this point. This data is then p rocess ed according to tbe defmition of

DISPLAY FUNCTION,

resulting in a high-precision, floating point, scalar number. This number is stored in main memory for readout as MARKER data. The same number is then processed according to tbe scalar numbers provide

SCALE

definitions for placement on the display. These two

1. A trace tbat stays within the boundaries of the figure A-I graticule and

2

Good measurement data readout (via the marker) for all portions of the frequency span, even where tbe trace is off screen.

If a function change does not require new measurements to update the trace, a memory sweep occurs. The processor sweeps through the complex data in trace memory and updates the trace very quickly. The speed in which this happens is limited only by the rate at which the processor can manipulate numbers. If the processor is given a lot of math to do (averaging, length, and complicated user definitions for two traces) the HP 3577 A may cboose a slower sweep speed to allow time for the number processing. The message "SWEEP TIME INCREASED" appears on tbe screen when this happens.

It is important to keep in mind how tbe HP 3577 A does math and the form of the complex data in trace memory wben defining user defined equations for inputs, stores, or functions. For example, lo find tbe difference in pbase between inputs R and A the

INPUT definition should be NR

. not A-R.

See figure A-2 if: then:

A

=

R

=

X+jY

=

Meie1

S+jT

=

N ei e

2

INPUT

=

NR

=

(MtN)ei(el-<>2) where

(01-02) is the phase displayed

A-2


(�

.-

�>---------------------------------------------------4--C�--<

�

J�

� 'OC./

_,

1st bin?

NO

YES

NO

YES

1nC",_nl

01"1 pOinter

Figure A-1

A-3

Special Topics Appendix A lE _ =-

=

IDJ

.N "' k

,_r

=F

=r-

=r-

01

�

-� �

8888

0

= c::J 0000 0000

�

[gOPE]

�

.

.

•

.

0

.

-

•

I

LI

Figure

A-2

Optimlzing Sweep Time

The HP

3577A

Network Analyzer has 4 selections for bandwidth: 1kHz, 100Hz, 10Hz, and

1

Hz.

While each reduction in bandwidth lowers the noise floor, it also results in an increase in the pre-sweep settling time (done automatically) and may require selection of a longer SWEEP TIME.

This discussion is to help the user find the optimum Sweep Tune for a given Resolution Bandwidth.

Settling time is the time that the source holds at the start frequency before beginning the sweep.

This is done to allow the source amplitude and filters time to stabilize before starting the measurement. While the

HP

3577A

is settling the SETTLE LED is illuminated. The settling time is 22 rns for a 1 kHz bandwidth and progressively longer for narrower bandwidths (see Resolution

Bandwidth in the Reference section). Settling time changes automatically unless the user chooses to turn it off using the SPCL FCTN key.

There is no rigorous method for selecting

SWEEP TIME,

given

RES BW;

too much depends on the response time of the device under test. The filters of the

HP 3577 A

have a finite response time as does the circuit being tested. If the

SWEEP TIME

is too short there is not enough time to allow both to respond fully to each sampled frequency. When the sweep direction is up

(i.e., increasing frequency, the default condition) this phenomena is evident as a skewing of the trace to the right.

A-4


The object is to make an accurate measurement with as short a

SWEEP TIME as possible. There are several ways to decide whether or not the sweep time is too small:

1. Increment (increase) the

SWEEP TIME and look for a change in the trace shape. If there is, then the previous

SWEEP TIME was too small. Continue incrementing until no change is seen.

2. Reverse the sweep direction when the sweep dot is on the steepest part of the response. If the

SWEEP TIME is too small the trace skews to the left (or right, depending on sweep direction) and the dot does not retrace its path. Increment the SWEEP TIME and try again.

3. Let the HP 3577 A sweep once and then select MANUAL FREQUENCY SWEEP MODE.

Move the marker to the steepest part of the response and press the

MKR - MANUAL softkey.

If the marker is not on the trace the sweep time is too small.

A·5

Remote Graphics Appendix B

To enter display graphics under remote control, display commands must be issued to the Digital

Display Module using the ENA HP 3577A HP-IB code as described in this quick reference.

B

Digital Display Quick Reference Guide

Digital Display Commands

Note

"

Bit D15 is used only for vector memory board commands. For standard Digital

Display commands D15 should be O.

B-1

Remote Graphics Appendix 8


Digital Display 16 Bit Data Word.

MSB

LSB

D14 D13 D12 01 1

010 D9

08 07 06

0

5

04 03

02 01

DO

COMMAND

COMMAND MODIFIERS

Set Condition

Plot Command

Graph Command

T eXl Command

BH 1 4

I

0

0

1

Bit 1 3

I

0

0

Set Condition Command

Set Conditio. Commlnd:

MSB

014 013 012 OI l 010 D9

I I

"

10

X

Note: Bit 6 (06) must be zero.

X

OS

L1

07

Lo

06

0

COlllland Moditie .. : a. b. c.

To Set Line Intensity:

11

0

0

I

I

To

Set Line Type: to

0

I

0

I

L1 Lo

Intensity

Blank

Dim

Ha" Brightness

Full Brightness

Type

I

I

0

0

0

I

0

I

To Set Writing Speed:

W1 Wo

Speed

I

I

0

0

I

0

I

0

Solid Line

Intensnied End Points on Solid Line

Long Dashes

Sho" Dashes

O.Osin. per p s

0.10 in. per ps

0.15 in. perps

0.20 in. perilS

05

X

04

W1

D3 02

Wo

X

01

X

LSB

DO

X

8-2



Plot Command

Plot COIIMand:

MSB

�4 m 3 � 2 � 1 o

0

'IY

PC

�O 00

010 09

08

Os

07

07

DATA

06

05

Os

04

03 02

02

01

01

LSB

OD

Do

C.lIl1lld M.dlli ... : a.

'IY Information

(012) o

=

X coordinate

(0-2047), specrried by Do-01O

1

=

Y coordinate (0-2047), specITied by 00-010 b.

PC Beam Control Information

(01 1 ) o

=

1

=

Beam OFF (move)

Beam ON

(draw)

anges

Programming Command Ranges

Digllal Display

Command a.

PiO!

X

Y (beam off)

Y (beam on) b.

Graph

Set Oelta-X

Y

( beam off)

Y (beam on) c.

Text d. Set Condrtion

Octal Range

00000-1)7777

1 0001}-13777

14001}-17777

20001}-27777

30001}-33777

34001}-37777

4000I}-S7777

60001}-77777

Haxidecimal Range

OOOO-OfFF

1 001}-17FF

1800 -1FFF

2001}-27FF

3001}-37FF

380l}-3FFF

400l}-SFFF

6001}-7FFF

B-3



Graph Command

Grlpb COlllllld:

MSB

014 013 012

OIl

010 09 o

PC

Ora ()g

08

DB

07

D7

DATA

06

05

05

04

03

03

02

02

01

01

LSB

DO

Do

CDII

... nd Modifiers: a.

XX Information (012) b. o

=

Set Detta-X increment, specffied by Do-DID for all subsequent Y coordinates

I

=

SetY coordinate, specffied by Do-OlO. The beam is to be moved to this Y in conjunction wnh the Oetta X increment.

PC Beam Control Information (01

1) o

=

Beam OFF (move)

I

=

Beam ON (draw)

B-4


Digital Dispiay Quick Reference Guide

Memory Board Commands

Vector Memory Word

MI5 M14 M13 M12 Mll Ml0 M9 MS M7 MS MS M4 M3 M2 Ml o

MO

BD

(SEE DATA BIT DEFINITIONS FOR DIGITAL DISPLAY COMMANDS)

Internal Jump

An internal jump does not affect the Vector Memory address pointer.

�S � 4 � 3 M1 2 Mll � O o x x x

=

DON'T CARE

� �

Al l

Al0 A9

W

A7

�

MS

AS

M4

A4

M3

A3

MI5

=

1 ,

M 1 4

=

0; Internal jump to Vector Memory address speenied by Al l thru AD during refresh.

M2 Ml

Al

MO

AO

Address Pointer

MI5 M14 M13 M12 Mll M10 M9 MS M7 MS MS

X X X X

X

=

DON'T CARE

Al 1

M o

A9 q M q �

AD

=

0; Set pointer register to the Vector Memory address value speeniod by At t thru �.

M4

M

M3

U

M2

�

Ml

M

MD

�

8-5


Dignal Display Quick Reference Guide

Digital Display Modified ASCII Character Set

DIGITAL DISPLAY MODIFIED ASCII CODE CDNVERSION TABLE

LEAST

SIGNIFICANT

CHARACTER

0

2

3

0

1

HP logo

P

4 upper-ha� tic

5 lower-ha� tic

6 IIIft-han tic

7 right-han tic

8 back space

9

1/2 shift down

A line feed

B inv. line teed

C

1/2 shift up

0 carriage return

E horizontal tic

F vertical tic

MOST SIGNIFICANT CHARACTER

1 canter cantered 0 f

0-

�

... v

'" ll.

I'

·(degree)

Q p r

(J

;.

2 3 4 5 6

7

SP 0

@ p

"

1

2

A

B a

R a b

P q

Il

$

3 C S c s

4 0

T d

%

5 E U a

& 6 F

V j u v

7 G

W

9 w

( 8 H X h x

) 9

•

+

/

<

=

>

?

I

Y

Y

J Z j z

K

[ k {

L

M

\

I

J m

}

N

11 n

0

0 0

[>

EXAMPLES:

HP logo

A v

[> line teed

=

=

=

=

=

=

01

41

69

1 6

7F

09

.�,

'. 'C)

6-6



Capabilities for Character and Vector Combinations

Conditions

Average character drawing time:

16 sec

Recommended refresh rate: 60

Hz

-

1 6.6 msec

Digital Display writing speed: 0.1 iwsec

Vector dead time:

1 sec

Total frame time (msec)

Character writing time (msec)

Time left to draw vectors(msec)

0

1 6.67

0

1 6.67

NUMBER OF CHARACTERS

TO

BE ORAWN

1 00 200

1 6.67

1 .6

1 5.07

1 6.67

3.2

1 3.47

AVERAGE VECTOR LENGTH

APPROXIMATE NUMBER OF VECTORS DRAWN

0.1

0.5

2.0

6.0 in in in. in.

8330

2770

790

270

7530

2510

710

240

6730

2240

640

220

5930

1 970

560

1 90

300

1 6.67

4.80

1 1 .87

6-7



Text Command

Tell

COlllUnd:

MSB

014 013 01 2 011 010 D9

0

S1

SO

R 1 Ro

08

ES

07

06

05 04

C7

Cs Cs C4

CHARACTER

03

C3

02

C2

01

C1

LSB

DO

Co

CO.lllnd Modi'i.rs:

For CQ.C7, see ASCII Conversion Table a. ES Establish Size of Character b. o

=

Use previous size and rotation

1

=

Establish new size and rotation according to

51,

SO, R1 and Ro

Rotate Character counter-clockwise c.

R1

0

0

Ro

0

1

0

Rotation o degrees

90 degrees

180 degrees

270 degrees

Character Size

S1

So

Size W x H

(in addressable points)

0

0

0

1 1 .5x

0

I x

2x

24 x 36

36 x 54

48 x 72

1 1 2.5x 60 x 90

6-8

Remote Graphics Appendix

6

Digital D isplay Quick Reference Guide

4 PROGRAMMABLE CHARACTER SIZES:

1 .0 x 56 characters per line. 29 horizontal lines possible.

1 .5 x 37 characters per line, 1 9 horizontal lines possible.

2.0 x 28 characters per line, 1 4 horizontal lines possible.

2.5 x 22 characters per line, 1 1 horizontal lines possible.

Character Rotation

OiARACTER CB.l

8 B

SP

90° 51'

-

SP o

180°

0iARACTER ST AR'TJIIG POINT

SP

�

ZlOO

6-9

c

Screen M essages Appendix C

The HP 3577A Network Analyzer displays operator messages to inform the user of various conditions. These fall into three categories: instructions or informative messages, warning messages, and error messages. Under remote control, the user may select the message category level that pulls

SRQ and appears in the

DUMP

STATUS command as defined by the error reporting mode selected. Refer to "Masking the Status Byte" in the section on Remote Operation. In the following table W is used for warning, E is for error, and M for general information messages.

1

MESSAGE

MHz FAILURE

DIGITAL DISPLAY JUMP CMND

DISALLOWED

1

MHz & 8 kHz FAILURE

8 kHz FAILURE

ABORT CAL SOFTKEY ONLY

AMPLITUDE SWEEP TIMEOUT

AVG TURNED OFF IN ALT SWP

CONFIDENCE TEST FAILED

CONFIDENCE TEST PASSED

CONT CAL NOT ALLOWED

COPY NEEDS "FROM" TRC ON

DATA ERROR #

-

DATA INPUT ABORTED

DATA OUTPUT ABORTED

W - Warning

E - Error

E

E

E

E

W

E

W

E

M

E

E

E

E

E

DESCRIPTION

Hardware failure.

HP-lB. Use of the digital display module command is illegal when entering graphics.

Hardware failure.

Hardware failure.

During MEASR CAL Sweeps and CAL processing, the only key 10 which the HP 3577 A responds (besides

INSTR PRESET) is ABORT CAL.

Amplitude sweep operate in the CONTINUOUS SWEEP

MODE for five minutes before changing to SINGLE, to prevent excessive wear on the output relays. See

AMPLITUDE SWEEP TYPE.

If AVERAGE is on and ALTERNATE SWEEP TYPE is selected, this message appears.

� is not possible to use averaging with AL TERNA TE SWEEP.

One or more of the confidence tests do not pass.

Hardware failure.

All confidence tests passed.

HP-lB. Continue GAL not allowed unless in the MEASR

CAL sequence.

Both traces should be on to COPY SCALE. This message appeared because one is inactive.

HP-lB. User-entered data may cause data errors when, involved in trace ar�hmetic. This message may also indicate a hardware failure.

HP-lB. Data transfer to the HP 3577 A has stopped.

HP-lB. Data transfer from the HP 3577A has stopped.

C·1

Appendix C

Screen Messages

MESSAGE

DELAY APERTURE INCREASED

DISPLAY MEMORY TEST FAILED

DISPLAY MEMORY TEST PASSED

ENTRY SET TO 0.0

ENTRY TOO LONG

ENTRY UNDEFINED

EOI BEFORE INPUT COMPLm

EXPECTED

"#1"

FP CANNOT ACCESS TRACE MEM

FP CNTR/RCVR FAILURE

FP LOGIC FAILURE

FAST PROC NOT GRANTING BUS

FP SELF TEST PASSED

FP-MP COMMUNICATION ERROR

FRONT PANEL DECODING ERROR

FRONT PANEL KEY STUCK

ILLEGAL " #" RECEIVED

ILLEGAL SYMBOL

INCOMPATIBLE DISPLAY FCTNS

INCDMP. TESTSET POSITIONS

Tre

_ chgd to agree wtth

#

_

INP MUST BE A,B,RNR,B/R

C-2

INP SHOULD BE USER-DEFINED

INPUT(S)

_

MESSAGE

TRIPPED

INVALID EXPRESSION

INVALID HPIB COMMAND

INVALID LEARN MODE DATA

INVALID START ADDRESS

INVALID SUFFIX

KEY BUFFER FULL

KEY NOT APPLICABLE

KEY NOT IN MENU

MARKER OFFSET IS OFF

MARKER IS OFF

-

MEM FAIL-SAVED STATES LOST

MP/FP PORT TEST FAILED

MP/FP PORT TEST PASSED

NO CHARACTERS TO PLOT

NO COMMA IN TRACE ARITH

NO GRATICULE TO PLOT

Appendix C

Screen Messages

W - Warning

E - Error

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

W

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

DESCRIPTION

HP-lB. Set INPUT to be USER OEF before attempting to directly change the configuration of the S-parameter test set over the bus.

One or more of the RECEIVER channels has swrtched to

1 MQ impedance. (The message Indicates which receiver inputs have tripped). This message is accompanied by a message to "Clear trip on A TTEN menu."

User defined equation not valid such as NR. More common for HP-IB than front panel entries.

HP-lB. Code sent to HP 3577A not a valid HP 3577A

HP-IB Code.

HP-lB.

The checksum of the instrument state just loaded is incorrect possibly because the attempted to modify instrument state data outside the HP 3577 A.

HP-lB. Start address for ENG must be an integer between 0 and 923.

HP-lB. Code sent 10 HP 3577A for a data entry suffix is not appropriate for prefix parameter or instrument state.

The front panel key buffer can hold 6 key presses for processing.

When in MANUAL sweep mode and AL TERNA TE sweep type wrth trace one active (and trace two is not off) this error message appears � MKR .. MAN FREQ is used.

This is permitted only for trace two in this srtuation.

HP-lB. Command issued over the bus is not allowed;

� the label does not appear in the menu during local operation, rt cannot be used over the bus (e.g., "Smrth chart" in a rectangular display function).

Cannot use MKR OFST .. SPAN if the OFFSET MARKER is OFF.

Request to plot one of the markers or execute a MKR ... operation but the marker is not on.

A memory hardware failure has occurred and the instruments states which had been saved have been lost.

The test run on the port between the Main Processor and the Fast Processor has failed. Hardware failure.

For more details see the Service Manual.

HP-lB. Request to plot characters that have been tumed off.

HP-lB. Comma not allowed in trace arrthmetic.

HP-lB. Request to plot a graticule that has been turned off.

C-3

Appendix C

Screen Messages

MESSAGE

NO INPUTS ARE TRIPPED

NO KEYBOARD ATIACHED

NO LISTENER ON BUS

NO RESPONSE FROM FP

NO STORE & DISP IN POLAR

NON-NUMERIC DATA RECEIVED

NOT ALLOWED IN AL T SWP

NOT ALLOWED IN LOG SWP

NOTHING TO PLOT

NUMBER OUT OF RANGE

ONLY SMALLER FCNTS ALLOWED

OSCILLATOR UNLOCKED

OVERLOAD ON INPUT(SL

RECALL FAILED-STATE IS BAD

REFERENCE UNLOCKED

SELECTED TRACE IS OFF

SET HP-IS TO TALKONLY MODE

W - Warning

E - Error

W

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

W

DESCRIPTION

Results from pressing CLEAR TRIP in the

A

TIEN menu when no inputs were tripped.

Hardware failure.

User has requested data dump (such as PLOT ALL) and there is no listener on the bus.

Fast Processor didn't respond to seH test. Hardware failure.

Illegal in polar display function.

HP-lB. Data loaded was supposed to be ASCII number characters.

Functions not allowed when SWEEP TYPE is

AL TERNA TE are STORE, STORE & DISPLAY, and all

CALlBRA nON.

HP-lB. Display function DELAY is not allowed in

LOG SWEEP.

HP-lB. Request to plot after all screen features have been turned off.

Data enliy of a value beyond the capabilities of the

HP 3577 A such as SOURCE AMPLITUDE of

1 00 dBm.

When entering user defined functions, other functions may be used as terms in the new function as long as their function number is smaller.

Hardware failure.

One or more inputs are being overdriven by a large signal input but have not tripped. This warns the user that readings taken may be distorted.

The Instrument State the user tried to recall is bad so the recall failed. To clear the bad state, SAVE another state in the register. If this does not clear the problem cycle power while holding down SAVE and RECALL. This runs a special memory-clearing test that resets instrument state memory locations. See "In Case of Trouble" under

Operating Hints in the Getting Started section.

The internal VCXO is not locked to the external reference input, possibly due to a difference in frequency exceeding 20 ppm. This message appears briefly during warm-up when the oven reference switches on after reaching operating temperature power-on).

(

�

1 0 minutes from

Can't perform the requested Operation because the trace is OFF (as with scale parameter changes).

Before plotting. TALKONLY ON/OFF (in the SPCL FCTN menu) must be turned on.

C-4

MESSAGE

SOURCE NOT TRIPPED

SOURCE TRIPPED

STOP MUST BE ;,: 1 .05*START

STORED DATA 01·04 LOST

SWEEP MODE MUST BE MANUAL

SWEEP RATE UNCALlBRA TED

SWEEP RESOLUTN TOO COARSE

SWEEP SPAN LIMITED

SWEEP TIME INCREASED

SWEEP TIMING ERROR

SYSTEM ERROR

#

TALK ONLY MODE SELECTED

TARGET VALUE NOT FOUND

TEST SET RELAY TIMEOUT

TEXT STRING TOO LONG

TIMER INTERRUPT FAILURE

TOO MANY GRAPHICS COMMANDS

TRACE_ HAS BEEN TURNED OFF or

TAC 1 ,

2,

ARE NOW TURNED OFF

Appendix

C

Screen Messages

W · Warning

E · Error

W

E

M

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

M

E

M

W

W

E

W

DESCRIPTION

Resu�s from pressing SOURCE CLEAR TRIP when the

SOURCE wasn't tripped.

The Source Output is open (no power out). This is accompanied by a message to "Clear trip on AMPm menu."

In log sweep the stop frequency must be greater than or equal to 1 .05

X the start frequency.

Stored trace data in registers 01·04 has been lost.

HP·IB. User sent MKR- MANUAL over

\he bus without first setting SWEEP MODE to

MANUAl.

Selection of span and sweep time have resu�d in a very slow sweep rate. Due to limited resolution of the frequency synthesis circuitry

DELAY APERTURE is limited by the selection of

SWEEP

RESOLU"nON (in the FREQ menu). Coarse sweep resolution prohibits the use of small delay apertures.

This message appears when the user tries to select a smaller aperture.

This message appears when a center frequency and frequency span are selected such that the equivalent start or stop frequencies would be less than 0 Hz or greater than 200 MHz.

The sweep time has been increased automatically to allow enough time to do the required math processing.

Hardware failure.

Hardware failure.

HP·IB. The HP 3577A has been manually set to

TALKONLY (probably to plot) . When addressed the

HP 3577 A must listen even though the softkey setting is

TALKONLY.

A marker search did not find a the target value.

Same timeout as described for AMPLITUDE SWEEP.

See S-PARAMETER TEST SET.

HP·IB. Text string for ENA or ENM is too long.

Hardware failure.

Hp·IB. Enter Graphics code too long. Memory is limited to 924 1 6·bit commands.

One or both traces were group delay and the user selected a sweep type that does not allow group delay.

This message is accompanied by a message that

"DELAY IN UN, ALT SWEEP ONLY." (Not LOG. CW or

AMPTO)

C-s

Appendix C

Screen Messages

MESSAGE

TRACE MEMORY TEST FAILED

TRACE MEMORY TEST PASSED

UNEXPECTED TEXT STRING

UNMATCHED "(" AND ")"

UP/DOWN OR KNOB ONLY

WAITING FOR "#"

WAITING FOR OATA TRANSFER

WAITlNG FOR INPUT DATA

WARNING: TRACE IS OFF

W - Warning

E - Error

E

E

E

E

W

W

W

W

W

DESCRIPTION

Hardware failure.

For more details reler to the Service Manual.

HP-lB. Received text in QUotes with no prior command

(such as enter annotation) .

The user defined math equation is in emar. There must be as many opening as closing parenthesis.

Only the arrow keys in the data entry section or the

KNOB may be used to move the mar'Ker.

HP-lB. Data load in the binary format is waiting for the starting sequence

"#1",

HP-lB.

Waiting for a data-receiving device to handshake.

HP-IB,

Load ready and waiting for input data.

This message appears when an operation is performed with the active trace OFF

C-6

D

H P 3577A Programming Codes

funclion

DISPLAY FORMAT

HP·IB Function Hp·IB

TRACE 1

TRACE Z

DISPLAY FUNCTION

Log Magn�ude

Linear Magn�de

Phase

Polar

Real

Imaginary

Delay

Trace Off

Delay Aperture menu

Aperture .5% of span

Aperture 1 % of span

Aperture 2% of span

Aperture 4% of span

Aperture 8% of span

Aperture 1 6% of span

Return

INPUT

TRl

TR2

DSF *

DF?

DF6

DF5

DF4

DF3

DF2

OFl

DFO

DAP *

APl

AP2

AP3

AP4

AP5

AP6

RET *

Input

=

S22

Copy Input

Test Set FOIward

Test Set Reverse

SCALE

Autoscale

Reference Level (entry)

Scale/DIV (entry)

Reference Position (entry)

Reference Line Off

Reference Line On

Copy Scale

Phase Slope (entry)

Phase Slope Off

Phase Slope On

Polar Full Scale (entry)

Polar Phase Rei

Sm�h Chart Off

( entry)

Input

=

R

Input

=

A

INP *

INR

INA

Smith Chart On

MARKER

Marker Position (entry)

Marker Off

Input

=

B

Input

=

NR

Input

=

B/R

Input

=

Dl

Input

=

D2

Input

=

D3

Input

=

D4

Return

INB

IAR

IBR

IDl

102

ID3

ID4

RET *

Marker On

Zero Marker

Marker Offset Off

Marker

Offset

On

Marker Offset (entry)

Marker Offset Freq (entry)

Marker Offset Amp (entry)

Marker Coupling Off

MRl

ZMK

MOO

MOl

MKO

MOF

MOA

COO

User Defined Input UDI Marker Coupling On

COl

Input

=

S" 111 Polar Mag Offset (entry)

PMO

Input

=

S21

Input

=

S12

•

121

112

Polar Phase Offset (entry)

Polar Real Offset

(entry)

Use not required. The only function of 1I11s code is tD display a menu (n bus diagnostics

PPO

PRO are

Dn).

RL1

CPS

PSL

PSO

PSl

PFS

PPR

GTO

122

CPI

TSF

TSR

. SCL *

ASL

REF

DIV

RPS

RLO

GTl

MKR *

MKP

MRO

0-1

Appendix

D

Programming Codes

Function HP-IB Function HP-IB

Polar Imag Offset (entJy)

Polar Marker Units (Rellm)

Polar Marker Units (MglPh)

MARKER ...

MKR... Reference Level

MKR... Start Frequency

M KR... Stop Frequency

MKR ... Center Frequency

MKR Offset ... Span

MKR ... Max

MKR ... Min

MARKER SEARCH menu

MKR Target Value (entJy)

MKR ... Right for Target

MKR

...

Left for Target

Return

MKR ... Full Scale

MKR ... Polar Phase Rei

STORE DATA

Store in register 01

Store tn register 02



Store and Display

User defined store

Store to 01

Store to 02

Store to 03

Store to D4

MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

Normalize

Normalize (Short)

Calibrate. Partial

Calibrate. full

Continue Calibration

DEFINE MATH

Constant K1 . Real (entJy)

Constant K1. Imaginary (entry)

Constant K2. Real

(entJy)

Constant K2. Imaginary (entry)

TD4

CAL ·

NRM

NRS

CPR

CFL

CGD

MPF

STD"

SD1

SD2

SD3

SD4

STD

UDS

TD1

TD2

TD3

DFN ·

KR1

KI1

KR2

KI2

KR3

KI3

PlO

MRI

MMP

MKG *

MTR

MTA

MTIl

MTC

MOS

MlX

MTN

MSM *

MTV

MRT

MLT

REP

MTP

Increment (up arrow)

Decrement (down arrow)

Continuous Entry (knob) Off

Continuous Entry (knob) On

Entry Off

DISPLAY FORMAT SUFFIX UNITS dBm dBV (rms) dB relative

Vo� (rms) milli-Vo� (rms) micro-Vo� (rms) nano-Vo� (rms) degrees degrees/span radians radianS/span seconds milliseconds microseconds nanoseconds percent

Define Function

Function f1

Function F2

Function F3

Function F4

Function f5

Math term for input

R

Math term for input A

Math term for input B

Math term for storage reg

Math term for constant

Math term for function

Math bracket

Math function plus

Math function minus

Math function multiply

Math function divide

Math bracket

Return

DATA ENTRY SECTION COMMANDS

K

F

B

0

DfC '

UF1

UF2

UF3

UF4

UF5

R

A

(

+

--

*

I

)

RET·

DBM

DBV

DBR

V

MV

UV

NV

DEG

DSP

RAD

RSP

IUP

ION

CEO

CE1

HLD

SEC

MSC

USC

NSC Constant K3. Real (entry)

Constant K3. Imaginary (entry) %

Constant K4. Real (enITy) KR4 deareeS/span

•

Use not required. The only funcUon of thiS code is to display a menu

(� bus diagnostics are on).

DSP

D-2

Function radianS/span

MHz kHz

Hz

..mnnent

HP·III

RAP

MHZ

KHZ

HZ

E

Appendix

0

Programming Codes

0·3

Appendix D

Programming

Codes

SOURCE

Function HB-IB Function

SWEEP TYPE

Linear Sweep

Mernate Sweep

Log Sweep

Amplitude Sweep

CW

Sweep Direction Up

Sweep Direction Down

SWEEP MOOE

Continuous

Single Sweep

Manual Sweep

Manual Frequency (entry)

Manual Amplitude (entry)

Marker - Manual

SWEEP l1ME

Sweep Time (entry)

Step Time (entry)

Sample TIme (entry)

FREQUENCY

Source Frequency (entry)

Start Frequency (entry)

Stop Frequency (entry)

Center Frequency (entry)

Frequency Span (entry)

FRC Step size (entry)

Sweep Resolution menu

Freq Swp Res 51 ptSIspan

Freq Swp Res 101 ptSIspan

Freq Swp Res 201 pttJspan

Freq Swp Res 401 pttJspan

Return

Full Sweep

Freq Step Size (entry)

AMPlITUDE

Source Amplitude (entry)

Amp Step Size (entry)

Clear Trip, Source

Start Amplitude (entry)

Stop Amplitude (entry)

Steps/Sweep menu

Number of steps

=

6

S1Y *

ST1

ST2

ST3

ST4

ST5

SUP

SON

SMO*

SM1

SM2

SM3

MFR

MAM

MTM

STM-

SWT

SMT

MSR

FRO*

SFR

FRA

FRB

FRC

FRS

CFS

SRL *

RSl

RS2

RS3

RS4

RET-

FSW

FST

AMP -

SAM

AST

CTS

AMA

AMB

NST *

NSl

Number of steps

-

1 1

Number of steps

=

21

Number of steps

=

51

Number of steps

=

1 01

Number of steps

=

201

Number of steps

=

401

Return

Full Sweep

TRIGGER MODE

Free Run

Line Trigger

External Trigger

Immediate dBV (nms)

Vott (rms) milli-Vott (rms) micro-Vott (rms) nano-Vott (rms) seconds milliseconds

MHz kHz

Hz exponent

SWEEP TRIGGER

SWEEP RESET

SOURCE SUFFIX UNITS dBm

• Use not required. The only function of this code is to display a menu (� bus diagnostics are on).

HB-IB

NS2

NS3

NS4

NS5

NS6

NS7

RET -

FSW

TRM *

TG1

TG2

TG3

TG4

TRG

RST

SEC

MSC

MHZ

KHZ

HZ

DBM

OBV

V

MV

UV

NV

E

D-4

Appendix

0

Programming Codes function

RESOLIJTION aw

Resolution SW 1 Hz

Resolution BW 10 Hz

Resolution BW 1 00 Hz

Resolution BW 1 kHz

Auto Bandwidth

Off

Auto Bandwidth On

AVERAGE

Averaaina

Off

N - 4

N - 8

N - 1 6

N - 32

. .

N - 64

N - 1 28

N

-

256

AmNUATlON

Attenuation R

=

0 dB

Attenuation R

=

20 dB

Attenuation A

=

0 dB

Attenuation A - 20 dB

Attenuation B - 0 dB

Attenuation B

=

20 dB

Impedance R

=

50

Impedance R

=

1 M

Impedance A

=

Impedance A

=

50 0

1 MO

Impedance B - 50

0

Impedance B - 1 MO

Clear Trip, Receiver

LENGTH ·

Length R (entry)

Le

Le nath

R

Off

R On

Length A (entry)

Length A Off

Len

Leil

A On aii\

B (entry)

Length B

Off

Length B On

Length Step Size (entry)

AV7

ATT *

AR1

AR2

AA1

AA2

AB1

AB2

IR1

1R2

IA1

1A2

IB1

IB2

CTA

LEN *

LNR

LRO

LR1

LNA

LAO

LA1

LNB

LBO

LB1

LNS

AU1

AVE �

AVO

AV1

AV2

AV3

AV4

AV5

AV6

H

P

·

l a

RECEIVER

RBW * function

RECEIVER SUFFIX UNITS

RW1 meters

RW2

RW3

SW4

AUO centimeters seconds milliseconds microseconds nanoseconds exponent

•

Use not requirod. The only function of this code is to display a menu (if bus diagnostics are on).

Hp·la

MET

CM

SEC

MSC use

NSC

E

0-5

Appendix

0

Programming Codes

Function

INSTRUMENT STATE

HP-IB

Function

SPECIAL FUNCTIONS

Confi<!. (seH) test menu

SeH test channel R

Sett test channel A

SeH test channel B

Retum

Beeper off

Beeper on

Service Diagnostics menu

Source Leveling off

Source Leveling on

Settling TIme off

Settling time on

Synthesizer Diag off

Synthesizer Diag on

Display Test Pattem

Trace Memory Test

Fast Processor Test

VD

Port Test

More Serv Diag menu

Display Memory Test

Software Revision message

Retum

S-Parameters

Off

S-Parameters On

SAVE INSTRUMENT STATE






RECAll INSTRUMENT STATE

SRV

RET ·

SPO

SPl

SAV "

SVl

SV2

SV3

SV4

SV5

RCL ..

SYO

SYl

DTP

TMT

FPT

PRT

MOR ..

DST

SPC "

SLF "

STR

STA

STB

RET"

BPa

BPl

SDG "

SLO

Sl1

SED

SEl

Plot trace 2

Plot graticule

Plot characters

Plot trace 1 marker

Plot trace 2 marker

Configure Plot menu



Trace 1 pen number

(entry)


Graticule pen no. (entry)

Pen speed fast (max)

Pen speed slow

Set plot config to de1au�

Retum

Recall old (last) state

Recall register 1

Recall register 2

Recall register 3

Recall register 4

Recall register 5

INSTRUMENT PRESET

PlOT MEHU

Plot all

Plot trace 1

•

RLS

RCl

RC2

RC3

RC4

RC5

IPR

PLM*

PLA

PLl

Use not required. The only function of thiS code is to display a menu (� bus diagnostics are on).

HP-IB

PL2

PLG

PLC

PMl

PM2

CPT "

T1L

T2L

T1P

T2P

PGP

PNM

PNS

PLO

RET"

D-ti

, '.\

Appendix D

Programming Codes

Function

HP-IB Function

Settlino Time Entry

Dump register A

Dump register B

Dump racister R

Dump racister D1

Dumo reoister D2

Dumo reoister 03

Dump register 04

Dump trace 1

Dump trace 2

Dump marker 1

Dump marker 2


Dump marker 2 posttion

Dump state (leam mode out)

Dump status

Dump average number

Dump kev or knob

Dump characters

Dump Instrument 10

Menu off

Menu on

STE

DRA

DRB

DRR

DD1

DD2

003

004 on

DT2

DM1

OM2

MP1

MP2 lMO

OMS

OAN

OKY

OCH

ID?

LAA

Bus diagnostics on, fast

Bus diagnostics on, slow

Enter Menu (user defined)

Enter Annotation

Enter Graphics

Clear Keyboard Buffer

Take Measurement

Set SRQ Mask (entry)

Error Reporting node

0




Send SRQ load register A load reO i ster B load register R load register D1 load register 02

Load register 03

Load register 04

Load state (learn mode in)

Graticule off

Graticule on

Characters off

Characters on

Annotation off

Annotation on

Annotation Clear

LAB

LRR l01 l02 l03

LD4

LMI

GRO

GR1

CHO

CH1

ANO

AN1

ANC

MNO

MN1

Menu clear

ASCII data format

MNC

FM1

64 bit IEEE data format

FM2

32 bit HP 35n A binary

Bus diaonostics mode off

•

FM3

BOO

Use not required. The only function of this code is to display a menu (n bus diagnostics are on).

HP-IB

BD1

B02

ENM

ENA

ENG

CKB

TKM

SQM

ERO

ER1

ER2

ER3

SRQ

D-7

Appendix

E

E

Bibliography

Fitzpatrick, J., "Error Models for Systems Measurements," Microwave Journal, May 1978.

The following are Hewlett-Packard publications:

•

•

•

•

HP

Publication

#5952-9270,

"Vector Measurements of High Frequency Networks."

HP Application Note 95-1, "S-Parameter Techniques for Faster, More Accurate Network

Design."

HP Application Note 154, "S-Parameter Design."

HP

Product Note 35nA-1, "Users Guide to the

HP

3577A Network Analyzer."

E·l